JP2022125333A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can excellently enhance an attention degree to a game.

SOLUTION: A first operation port 33, a second operation port 34, and a through gate 35 into which a game ball can enter are provided in a game area PE. A winning or losing lottery of a first special pattern side is carried out on the basis of a ball entry into the first operation port 33, a result of which is issued by a first special pattern display part AS. A winning or losing lottery of a second special pattern side is carried out on the basis of a ball entry into the second ball entry part 34, a result of which is issued by a second special pattern display part BS. Games related to those lotteries can be progressed concurrently. When a specific state is satisfied in which a variable display time of the second special pattern side lapses before a variable display time of the first special pattern side lapses, a privilege is more likely to be granted. A shift condition to a game state in which the specific state is more likely to be satisfied, can be varied on the basis of a satisfaction of a predetermined change condition during a game.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of determining whether or not to award a privilege to a player.

2. Description of the Related Art As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine capable of determining whether or not to give a privilege to a player is known (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2005-074175 A

Here, there is still room for improvement from the standpoint of increasing attention to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily increasing attention to games.

The invention according to claim 1,
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
grant determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined grant condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the granting determination means determines that the granting condition is met;
state transition means for transitioning the game state;
with
The game state that can be shifted by the state transition means includes a second game state in which the ease of establishment of the granting condition is different from that of the first game state,
The state transition means is
special transition means capable of transitioning the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
transition condition changing means capable of changing the transition condition based on establishment of a predetermined change condition based on a predetermined game result;
characterized by comprising

It is possible to satisfactorily increase the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) A longitudinal sectional view of the first variable winning device in a closed state, and (b) a longitudinal sectional view of the first variable winning device in an open state. (a) A longitudinal sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the side, and (b) a longitudinal sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the rear. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the contents of various counters used for lottery and the like; It is explanatory drawing of a right/wrong table. It is explanatory drawing of a distribution table. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the outline of the support, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the positional relationship between each operation opening and the through gate, and (c) is a timing chart showing the winning timing of each operation opening and the through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a 1st game time control process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first fluctuation start process; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing forced termination processing; It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd game time control process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation start processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 9 is a flowchart showing V allocation setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a process of setting the first variable display time; 9 is a flow chart showing a second variable display time setting process; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table; It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a variable display by a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game result and opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game result and an production|presentation pattern. FIG. 10A is a flow chart showing a variable display time table switching process, and FIG. In the third embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table for the special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table for the normal figure. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display time table switching process in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a switching counter addition table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table; It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. FIG. 11A is a flowchart showing a variable display time table switching process, and FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram of the relationship between the ceiling value of the switching counter and each opening/closing execution mode in the first modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a variable display time table switching process in the second modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a variable display time table switching process in the third modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variable display time table switching process in the fourth modified example of the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display time table switching process in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a distribution table for disadvantageous special omission results; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation processing for specific periods by the production|presentation control apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of production. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the contents of various counters used for lottery and the like in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a condition table; It is explanatory drawing of a normal table and a special table. 4 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game time control processing by a main-control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first fluctuation start process; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing condition establishment determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a process of setting the first variable display time; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing condition cancellation processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd game time control process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing second fluctuation start processing; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a second variable display time setting process; 10 is a flowchart showing table return processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing table switching processing; It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display; It is a flow chart which shows processing for special production start by a production control device. It is a flow chart which shows processing for the end of special production. It is an explanatory diagram of a right or wrong table of the first special figure in the seventh embodiment. 4 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions; FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the condition establishment determination processing by a main controller. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing condition cancellation processing; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing table switching processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display; It is an explanatory diagram of a right or wrong table of the first special figure in the eighth embodiment. 4 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a 1st fluctuation start by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition determination. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display; It is an explanatory diagram of a right or wrong table of the first special figure in the ninth embodiment. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a normal table, a special table A, and a special table B; FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for state transition by a main controller. 9 is a flowchart showing a process of setting the first variable display time; 4 is a flowchart showing table switching processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display; FIG. 22 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions in a modification of the ninth embodiment; FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram of various right/wrong tables in the tenth embodiment; It is explanatory drawing of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing of a normal table and a special table. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the variable display time table, electric support, and V jackpot probability, and (b) is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions. (a) is an explanatory diagram of an allocation table for a variable display time table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a prescribed number of times allocation table. 4 is a flow chart showing storage processing of the first side 16R flag by the main controller; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for storing a second-side advantageous opening flag; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing table switching processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a special effect display; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of the arrangement of operation ports in the eleventh embodiment; It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view which looked at the 3rd operation opening from the side. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of a flow-down route to a fourth working port in the twelfth embodiment; (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) a front view showing the operation of the electric accessory provided in the fifth operation opening in the thirteenth embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the playability.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 66a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or shooting handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and game balls are shot (see FIG. 2).

The game board 24 is router-processed to form a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a first operating port (or a first starting ball portion) 33, a second operating port (or a second starting ball portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable A display unit 36, a main display section 37, a normal figure display section 38 as a character object display section, and the like are provided respectively. It should be noted that a plurality of the general winning openings 31 and the variable winning devices 32 are respectively provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33, four prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second working port 34, four prize balls are paid out. 5 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the general prize winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 32, , 15 prize balls are paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number of prize balls related to is less than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 33 may be configured. Also, the number of prize balls associated with one variable winning device 32 may be the same or less than the number of prize balls associated with other operating ports. The number of prize balls for each of the plurality of variable winning devices 32 may be different.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 24a. The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 24b for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, entering a ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A non-discharging mode is also included. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, there is a region where the game balls shot to the game region PE can flow down. partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is continuous with the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PE2 which is an area on the left, a right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PE2 and a right area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the amount of rotation in the first range which is less than the reference amount of rotation as the first shooting operation, the game ball is shot to the left of the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper region PE1. flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, the upper region PE1 is moved to the right of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, the player can adjust the rotation operation amount of the shooting operation device 28 so that the game ball can flow down the left side area PE2 of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down PE3.

The first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as a working port device and installed in the lower region PE4. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a will be described. The electric accessory 34a has a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34, and an open state (supported state or guided state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the closed state. can be switched to

The operation port case that constitutes the first operation port 33 protrudes forward and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the length of the upper side is smaller than the length of the lower side. At this time, the length of the upper side of the operating port case (that is, the lateral width of the first operating port 33) is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the length of the lower side is the length when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is greater than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. Also, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the installation interval between the two operating ports 33 and 34 is set such that the interval between the operating port case and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. adjusted.

According to the above configuration, when the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the second operation opening 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the winning to the second operation opening 34 becomes possible. Especially at this time, during the movement of the electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the first operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is fully opened, the winning of the game ball into the second operating port 34 becomes impossible, and the winning is possible only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. In other words, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case and is repelled to the outside, and does not enter the second operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in an extremely short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win the second operation opening 34, and only when the electric accessory 34a is kept open, the second operation opening 34 is opened. Easy to win prizes.

In addition to the configuration in which the operating port case of the first operating port 33 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operating port case of the first operating port 33 may be configured to have a two-stage structure with a narrow upper portion and a wide lower portion. Approximately V-shaped guide pieces may be provided on the left and right sides of the operating port 33, or obstacle nails may be implanted obliquely below the operating port case.

The first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 are provided with a first winning detection sensor 33a and a second winning detection sensor 34c capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, respectively. The ball is detected by the first winning detection sensor 33a, and the game ball that has entered the second operating port 34 is detected by the second winning detection sensor 34c. Then, the detection result is output to the main control device, and processing such as an internal lottery based on the winning is performed in the main control device.

The through gate 35 is installed directly above the first operation opening 33 as a pass-type winning opening. In other words, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 is discharged to the game area PE after winning, and enters the first operating port 33 . The through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 are arranged such that the lower end of the through gate 35 and the upper end of the first operating port 33 are spaced shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the event of winning the first operation port 33 without winning the through gate 35 does not occur.

More specifically, the positional relationship between the through gate 35 and the first operating opening 33 is such that the pair of nails 24b are positioned at a predetermined distance (slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball) in the gap between the lower end of the through gate 35 and the upper end of the first operating opening 33. A game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 passes between the pair of nails 24b and enters the first operation port 33. In this case, the gap between the through gate 35 and the first working opening 33 is filled with the pair of nails 24b, and the event of entering the first working opening 33 without entering the through gate 35 does not occur. In addition, since the gap between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 is as narrow as one nail, the period required for the game ball entering the through gate 35 to enter the first operating port 33 is minimized. set to be short. The gap between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 may be narrowed without providing the nail 24b between the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33. It may be provided in contact with the opening 33 . Further, the through gate 35 and the first operation opening 33 may be integrated into a prize winning section, and in one prize winning section, the processing based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 and the processing based on the prize winning to the first operation port 33 may be performed. may be configured to be executable.

The through gate 35 is provided with a through winning detection sensor 35a capable of detecting passage of a game ball, and a game ball that has entered the through gate 35 is detected by the through winning detection sensor 35a. Then, the detection result is output to the main control device, and processing such as an internal lottery based on the winning is performed in the main control device.

Since the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 are provided in the lower region PE4 as described above, the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2. Winning to the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35 is possible in both cases where the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. be.

The lower part of the variable display unit 36 is provided with a stage 36b on which a game ball can roll in the horizontal direction. and drop toward the through gate 35 . A game ball entered from an entrance portion 36c provided on the left side of the variable display unit 36 is led out to the stage 36b through a guide passage (not shown). In this way, the entrance 36c of the guide passage to the stage 36b is provided for the left side region PE2 and not provided for the right side region PE3. Winning to the first working port 33, the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 is more likely to occur than in the case of flowing down. In addition, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 24b in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 is also such that the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34, and the through opening 33, the second operation opening 34, and the through opening 34 are arranged in the left side area PE2 more than in the right side area PE3. It is set so that winning to the gate 35 is likely to occur. A game ball that has flowed down the right side area PE3 hardly enters the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 and the through gate 35.例文帳に追加That is, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are positioned so that the ball is easier to enter when the firing operation device 28 is operated in the first firing operation than in the second firing operation. are placed.

In addition, since the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided as a unit as described above, when a game ball is shot aiming at the first operating port 33, the game ball is shot in the second direction. When the game ball reaches the operating port 34 and is shot at the second operating port 34, the game ball reaches the first operating port 33. - 特許庁That is, the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 are prize winning portions that are difficult (impossible) to separate.

An internal lottery is held when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 . Then, when winning the lottery, the game shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 32 can win a prize.

The main display portion 37 and the normal figure display portion 38 are provided on a decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.例文帳に追加

A main display portion 37 and a normal figure display portion 38 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39 . That is, the main display portion 37 and the normal figure display portion 38 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls fall in front of these display portions 37 and 38. is prevented. It should be noted that, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the plurality of general prize winning openings 31 described above is installed in a state of being open upward.

When the variable prize winning device 32 enters the opening/closing execution mode (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered) by winning the internal lottery, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode is clearly indicated on the main display section 37. The round display part RS for doing, the first special figure display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the first operating port 33, and the winning to the second operating port 34 A second special figure display part BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on is set.

In the round display section RS, display of the number of round games is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the display is finished when the opening/closing execution mode is ended. The round game continues until the termination condition of winning a predetermined maximum winning number (for example, 10) to the variable winning device 32 or elapse of a predetermined maximum opening period (for example, 30 sec) is satisfied. It is a possible game. The round game ends even if the conditions for ending the upper limit winning number and the upper limit open period are not established, for example, when opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is performed for a predetermined number of opening/closing times.

In the first special figure display unit AS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the first working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the first working port 33 The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS After the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second special figure display part BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the second working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the second working port 34 The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the second operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the second special figure display part BS After the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33 and 34, the corresponding special figure display units AS and BS start variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and until the variable display is stopped corresponds to one game round.

The general pattern display section 38 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the general pattern display unit 38, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state for opening the electric accessory 34a, the normal figure display unit 38 displays a predetermined stop result. after the variable display is stopped, the state shifts to the support state. In the support state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operation port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the main display unit 37 and the normal display unit 38 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. good.

In the pachinko machine 10, a game round based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and a game round based on the winning of the second operating port 34 may be performed in some cases. Specifically, when the winning to the second operating port 34 occurs while the variable display is being performed in the first special figure display unit AS based on the winning to the first operating port 33, the first While continuing the variable display of the special figure display unit AS, the variable display is started in the second special figure display unit BS, and based on the winning to the second operation port 34, the variable display is performed in the second special figure display unit BS. When the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs while is being performed, the variable display is started also in the first special figure display part AS while continuing the variable display of the second special figure display part. However, the opening/closing execution mode when winning the internal lottery based on the winning of the first opening 33 and the opening/closing execution mode when winning the internal lottery based on the winning of the second opening 34 It is designed not to be duplicated. These controls will be described later in detail.

The variable winning device 32 is arranged downstream of the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 in the lower area PE4. In other words, the variable winning device 32 is operated to flow down the left region PE2 (when the first firing operation is performed), and the firing operation to flow down the right region PE3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated (when the second firing operation is being performed). In other words, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated aiming at the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35, the game ball is made to reach the variable winning device 32 without changing the operation mode. It is possible.

In the pachinko machine 10, a first variable winning device 32A and a second variable winning device 32B are provided as the variable winning device 32, and the variable winning devices 32A and 32B are opened according to the type of opening/closing execution mode. is switched. The first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are arranged vertically such that the first variable winning device 32A is upstream of the second variable winning device 32B.

First, the first variable winning device 32A will be described with reference to FIG.

The first variable winning device 32A is formed with a large winning opening (or special winning opening) 321 that is open in the front-rear direction and has a size through which game balls can pass. Alternatively, an opening/closing member 322 is provided for switching between a closed state in which passage is difficult and an open state in which game balls can pass. The opening/closing member 322 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving portion 323 . In addition, the first variable winning device 32A is formed with a winning passing portion 324 at a position through which the game ball entering the first variable winning device 32A through the big winning port 321 always passes. A detection sensor 325 for the big winning opening is provided so that a detection area exists at the position of the passing portion 324 for winning. The game ball that has won the first variable winning device 32A is individually detected by the detection sensor 325 for the big winning opening.

Next, the second variable winning device 32B will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the second variable winning device 32B is formed with a distribution entrance 351 that is open in the front-rear direction and has a size through which game balls can pass. A distribution member 352 is provided for switching between a closed state in which balls cannot or hardly pass and an open state in which game balls can pass. The distribution member 352 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the driving section 353 for the distribution entrance. The distribution entrance 351 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game balls flowing in from the distribution entrance 351 flow down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from its midway position, and constitutes one of an upstream region 355 forming the upstream side of the branch position and a downstream region of the branch position. V winning area (or useful area) 356, and discharge area (or unused area) 357 constituting the other on the downstream side of the branch position. In addition, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have reached the branch position from the upstream region 355 to either the V winning region 356 or the discharge region 357 . When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter driving section 359, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter driving section 359, The game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 356 .

A detection sensor 361 for counting is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which game balls that have flowed into the upstream area 355 always pass. When the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 361 for counting, the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second variable prize winning device 32B is executed. In addition, a detection sensor 362 for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 356 always passes. Based on the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, the opening/closing execution mode is started again after the opening/closing execution mode. More specifically, the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened is an opening/closing execution mode in which one round game is performed for a so-called small win, and V winning during the opening/closing execution mode. By being detected by the detection sensor 362 for the opening and closing execution mode, the opening and closing execution mode for the jackpot in which the round game is performed a predetermined number of times (16 times) is executed after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, a detection sensor 363 for ejection is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the area 357 for ejection always passes. Based on the detection results from the detection sensor 363 for ejection and the detection sensor 362 for V winning, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 32B.

The drive unit 359 for the shutter is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. More specifically, the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled in a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode at which the second variable winning device 32B is opened. As a result, the timing at which the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is distributed to the V winning area 356 side and the timing at which it is distributed to the ejection area 357 side are periodically switched.

In the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened, there are a plurality of different timings in which the distribution member 352 of the second variable winning device 32B is opened from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. The open/close execution mode is set. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, by varying the timing at which the distribution member 352 is opened, the probability that the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning area 356 is relatively high or low. 2, a high distribution mode (high expectation mode) of opening and closing execution mode and a low distribution mode (low expectation mode) of opening and closing execution mode are set. That is, the probability that a game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is distributed to the V winning area 356 is higher in the opening/closing execution mode of the high distribution mode than in the opening/closing execution mode of the low distribution mode.

However, the total probability that the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 in the opening and closing execution mode of the low allocation mode and the opening and closing execution mode of the high allocation mode in which the game ball can win the second variable winning device 32B is set to be less than a predetermined probability (1/10). In other words, even though the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 is increased in the opening/closing execution mode of the high allocation mode, when combined with the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low allocation mode, , the winning rate to the second variable winning device 32B, the passing rate of the V winning area 356, and the second variable winning device 32B in the opening and closing execution modes of the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode so that the probability is equal to or less than the predetermined probability When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the allocation ratio between the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode is set.

It should be noted that the second variable winning device 32B is preferably formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to which of the V winning area 356 and the ejection area 357 the winning game balls are distributed. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the second variable prize winning device 32B is formed to be colored and transparent or colorless and transparent.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of patterns. More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the first special symbol display unit AS based on the winning to the first operation port 33, the variable display or predetermined display of the pattern is performed accordingly. Along with being performed, when the variable display of the pattern or the predetermined display is performed in the second special figure display part BS based on the winning to the second operation port 34, the variable display of the pattern or the predetermined display is performed accordingly. . In addition, in the pattern display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 Display effect etc. in the opening and closing execution mode when winning is performed.

Display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of symbols will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numerals '1' to '9' are attached respectively, and sub-patterns composed of shell-shaped picture patterns. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 has three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), the display screen G is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It's like In addition, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. .

When the symbols are varied and displayed on the display screen G based on the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts as follows. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are displayed still in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display is finished. . Further, when the variable display of the symbols is finished, when it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode as a result of a big win, which will be described later, the same combination of odd symbols is formed on any of the effective lines, which will be described later. The same even symbol combination is formed on any of the active lines if it corresponds to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode that results in an advantageous special loss result.

The pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

In the lower part of the display screen G, a first special figure display area GA for the first operation opening 33 and a special figure display area GB for the second operation opening 34 are set. In the first special figure display area GA, information regarding the internal lottery of the game round in the first special figure display portion AS currently being executed is displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display area GB, information about the internal lottery of the game round in the second special figure display portion BS currently being executed is displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a game round in the first special figure display portion AS and a game round in the second special figure display portion BS may be executed in parallel. On the other hand, the game round by the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is executed so as to correspond to the game round of one of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. be. That is, although the game rounds in each of the special figure display units AS and BS are executed in duplicate, the game round in the symbol display device 41 is among the game rounds that are overlapped and executed in the special figure display units AS and BS. is executed to correspond to only one of the

The special figure display areas GA and GB each have a plurality of small display portions, and by blinking each of these display portions, variable display is possible. In addition, it is possible to inform the information of the corresponding internal lottery by the combination of the display colors when the blinking of each display is stopped. That is, the special figure display areas GA and GB have an auxiliary role in the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, and when each game round overlaps, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 This is to inform the result of the game round on the side where the variable display is not performed.

In this embodiment, the number of winnings in the first operating port 33 and the number of winnings in the second operating port 34 are not stored. The winning information is not stored. For example, if a winning to the first operating port 33 occurs while the game round based on the winning to the first operating port 33 is being executed, the winning information is not stored and the game round being executed is terminated. After that, the internal lottery is not performed and the game round is not started until a new prize is won. In addition, when a winning to the second operating port 34 occurs while the game round based on the winning to the second operating port 34 is being executed, the winning information is not stored, and the game round being executed is terminated. After that, the internal lottery is not performed and the game round is not started until a new prize is won.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prizes won in the through gate 35 is not stored. In other words, when a new prize is awarded to the through gate 35 while the variable display of the pattern is being performed in the general pattern display unit 38 based on the prize to the through gate 35, the winning information is displayed. is not stored, and after the end of the variable display of the pattern being executed, the internal lottery is not performed until a new winning prize to the through gate 35 occurs, and the variable display of the pattern is not started.

However, if a winning to the first operating port 33 occurs during execution of a game round based on the winning to the first operating port 33, prize balls will not be conducted based on the winning during the execution. is paid out. In addition, if a prize is won at the second operating port 34 during execution of a game round based on the winning at the second operating port 34, the internal lottery etc. based on the winning during the execution will not be performed. is paid out. On the other hand, if a winning to the through gate 35 occurs while the variable display based on the winning to the through gate 35 is being executed, no internal lottery or the like based on the winning during the execution is performed and no prize balls are paid out. .

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above structure is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 through which substantially the entire game area PE can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A display light-emitting portion 63 is provided on the right side of the window portion 61 as part of various lamp portions. An error light emitting section 64 is provided above the window section 61 . A pair of left and right speaker units 65 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 that bulge forward are arranged vertically in parallel. Inside the upper swelling portion 66 is provided an upper tray 66a that is open upward, and inside the lower swelling section 67 is similarly provided a lower tray 67a that is also open upward. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 67a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 66a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 81 that controls the main game is mounted. The main controller 81 has a main control board housed in a board box.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 81 . The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 66a or the lower tray 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply and a launch control device 78 are provided to control launching of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply and launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal plate 79 in addition to the payout mechanism section 73 and the controller assembly unit 74 . The external terminal plate 79 is installed on the back of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner portion on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15 . The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 201 that controls the main game, and a power monitoring board (blackout monitoring board) 205 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 . The MPU 202 incorporates a ROM 203 and a RAM 204 .

The ROM 203 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, as a read-only memory. The ROM 203 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data.

The RAM 204 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply to hold data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 203 when the data capacity is compared. The RAM 204 temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 203 .

In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 202 or the main control board 201 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 202, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 202 is connected to the power supply monitoring board 205, the payout control device 77, various prize detection sensors 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361, 362, 363, and the like. A power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to the power monitoring board 205 , and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power monitoring board 205 . In addition, based on the detection results of the various winning detection sensors 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361, 362, and 363, the MPU 202 determines whether each ball has entered a winning portion (ball entering determination) and passes through each passing portion. will be In addition, the MPU 202 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and also executes the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35. - 特許庁

A power monitoring board 205, a payout control device 77 and an effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU202. A winning ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result to the ball entering portion, for example. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a final stop command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, there are drive units 323, 353, 359 for the variable winning device 32 (first variable winning device 32A, second variable winning device 32B), and electric accessory drive for the electric accessory 34a. A main display portion 37 and a normal-figure display portion 38 having a portion 34b, a first special-figure display portion AS, a second special-figure display portion BS, and a round display portion RS are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

An external terminal board 79 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202 . The external terminal plate 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals). For example, eight external terminals are provided, and different types of information are output to the management computer. The plurality of external terminals include a terminal for externally outputting an opening/closing execution signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. The MPU 202 sets information according to the progress of the game to an external output buffer provided in the RAM 204 . Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer, the setting for signal output is performed for the external terminal board 79, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the management computer of the game hall. Each external terminal is configured using a photocoupler so as to enable transmission of electrical signals from the main controller 81 to the management computer while preventing the reverse flow.

The power monitor board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power and launch control 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power and launch control 78, which is a stable 24 volts DC. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 201 and the payout control device 77 etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. The power supply and shooting control device 78 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27 , and drives the game ball shooting mechanism 27 based on specifying a predetermined shooting operation for the shooting operation device 28 .

The effect control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting portion 63, the error light emitting portion 64 and the speaker portion 65 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and the display control device 212 is to control The display control device 212 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command input from the effect control device 82 .

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in MPU 202>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 202 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information to set the jackpot lottery, the support lottery for the electric accessory 34a, the setting of the display of the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, and the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. , display setting of the normal map display unit 38, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot generation lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for a jackpot result type lottery, and a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. , a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in each special figure display unit AS, BS and the symbol display device 41, and an electric accessary product release counter used for a support lottery to determine whether the electric accessary product 34a is in a support state C4 and are used. The counters C1, C2, CINI and CS are provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. FIG.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals.

Numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is provided as acquisition information storage means for holding information for the jackpot lottery when a prize is won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 . The reserved ball storage area 232 includes the first execution area RAE as an area for executing a jackpot lottery for the reserved information based on the winning to the first operating port 33, and the reserved ball storage area 232 for the reserved information based on the winning to the second operating port 34. and a second execution area RBE as an area for executing a big winning lottery.

In the first execution area RAE, each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is stored as the reserved information on the special figure side based on the winning to the first operation port 33. Then, based on the reservation information stored in the first execution area RAE, the success/failure determination and distribution determination for one game round are performed. The pending information stored in the first execution area RAE is erased when the game round being executed and the open/close execution mode based thereon are terminated.

In addition, in the second execution area RBE, based on the winning to the second operation port 34, each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS is stored as reserved information on the special figure side. . Then, based on the reservation information stored in the second execution area RBE, the success/failure determination and distribution determination of one game round are performed. The pending information stored in the second execution area RBE is erased when the game round being executed and the open/close execution mode based on it are terminated.

In these cases, in the present embodiment, new pending information is not acquired (not stored) during execution of one game round, so the pending information is stored in the first execution area RAE and the first special figure display unit Even if a prize is won in the first operation port 33 while the AS side (hereinafter also simply referred to as the "first special figure side") game round or the opening and closing execution mode based on it is being executed, a new hold is made. No information is stored in the first execution area RAE. In other words, in the first execution area RAE, the reservation information is stored and a game round is started. Also. Reservation information is stored in the second execution area RBE, and the game round of the second special figure display part BS side (hereinafter also simply referred to as "second special figure side") and the opening and closing execution mode based on it are being executed. Even if a prize is won in the second operation port 34 during the second period, new pending information is not stored in the second execution area RBE. In other words, in the second execution area RBE, the second special figure side game round and the opening and closing execution mode based on it are not performed. is stored and a game round is started.

In the first execution area RAE and the second execution area RBE, it is possible to draw a lottery for pending information and erase the pending information, independently of each other. Therefore, in a situation where the pending information is stored in the first execution area RAE, if a prize is won in the second operation opening 34, the second execution area RBE must not store the pending information. 2. Hold information is stored in execution area RBE. In addition, in a situation where the pending information is stored in the second execution area RBE, if a prize is won in the first operation opening 33, the condition is that the pending information is not stored in the first execution area RAE. Hold information is stored in one execution area RAE.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first execution area RAE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and stored in the second execution area RBE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34. be done. In addition, in order to make it easier to distinguish between the first special figure side and the second special figure side, in the following description, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area RAE is referred to as the jackpot random number counter CA1, and the second execution The jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the area RBE is called a jackpot random number counter CB1.

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 221 as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, as the winning/denying table, the winning/unloading table (first right/wrong information group) for the first special figure shown in FIG. 9(a) and the winning/failure table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 2nd right/wrong information group) is set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 includes a winning/failure table for the first special figure regarding the pending information based on the winning to the first operating port 33 and the second special figure regarding the pending information based on the winning to the second operating port 34. A pass/fail table is provided.

In each win/fail table, a big hit result and a losing result are set as the result of the win/fail lottery. The number of random numbers that result in a big hit is one in any of the success/failure tables for special symbols, and the probability of winning a big win is the same on the side of the first special symbol and the side of the second special symbol.

As the out-of-order results, a special out-of-order result and a normal out-of-order result are set. A special out result results in one round of the opening/closing execution mode being executed, while a normal out result does not execute the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode by the second variable winning device 32B is performed based on the result of the special loss. As already explained, in the opening/closing execution mode by the second variable winning device 32B, the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled in a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning game ball is for V winning. It is distributed to area 356 and area 357 for discharge.

Advantageous special loss results and disadvantageous special loss results are provided as special loss results. When the result is an advantageous special loss, the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B is controlled in such a manner that the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is easily distributed to the V winning region 356. mode is performed. In addition, when a disadvantageous special loss result is obtained, a low distribution mode in which the opening and closing control of the second variable winning device 32B is performed in a mode in which the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is difficult to be distributed to the V winning region 356 is performed. The open/close execution mode is performed.

In the present embodiment, the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled 1.0 sec after the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, and the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning area 356 . In addition, the drive control is maintained for 3.0 seconds after the drive control of the drive unit 359 for the shutter is performed, and after 3.0 seconds, the drive control ends and the light is distributed to the discharge area 357 . is set to That is, the shutter 358 distributes the game balls that have reached the branch position to the discharge area 357 for 1.0 sec from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, the shutter 358 distributes the game ball that has reached the branch position to the V winning area 356 from 1.0 sec to 4.0 sec after the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode. After 4.0 sec from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the shutter 358 distributes the game balls that have reached the branch position to the discharge area 357 .

In this case, in the opening/closing execution mode, which is a high allocation mode executed based on the result of the special advantage loss, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after the start of the opening/closing execution mode. 2 The variable winning device 32B is open for 30.0 seconds. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, the second variable prize winning device 32B can win a prize 0.5 sec after the start timing, and the shutter 358 moves to the V prize area 356 during the period in which the prize can be won. It is set so as to include the period in which it is in the sorting state.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode which is a low allocation mode executed based on the result of the disadvantageous special loss, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and after the lapse of the opening period, the second The variable winning device 32B will be in an open state over 0.3 sec. In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result, it is possible to win a prize in the second variable prize winning device 32B 0.5 sec after the start timing, but during the period in which the prize can be won, the shutter 358 is moved to the V prize area. 356 is set so as not to include the period in which it is sorted to 356.

Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 shoots the game ball at a predetermined cycle of 0.6 sec under the condition that the shooting operation device 28 is operated. In the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, the period during which the second variable prize winning device 32B can win a prize is longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball. In addition, the period (0.5 sec) from when the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened to when the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball, and the drive unit for the shutter The period (3.0 sec) during which the drive control of 359 is maintained is longer than the game ball shooting cycle. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, in the situation where the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state until the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled, the discharge area 357 side is allocated. In a situation where it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable prize winning device 32B and the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled to be distributed to the V prize winning area 356, one or more game balls enter the second variable prize winning device 32B. win a prize.

In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, the period from when the second variable winning device 32B is opened to when the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled is the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening and closing. The period is shorter than the product of the maximum winning number of the execution mode. Therefore, after the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened and before the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled, the upper limit winning number is reached and the opening/closing execution mode is terminated (for V winning). end of the opening/closing execution mode without being distributed to the area 356) is avoided.

On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result, the period (0.3 sec) during which the second variable prize winning device 32B is kept open is shorter than the game ball shooting cycle. Therefore, winning to the second variable prize winning device 32B is less likely to occur. Even if a prize is won, the period in which the second variable prize winning device 32B is in the open state as described above does not overlap with the period in which the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled. The balls are distributed to the ejection area 357 side instead of the V winning area 356 .

In the right/wrong table for the first special figure, one random number corresponding to the advantageous special losing result among the special losing results is set, and 597 random numbers corresponding to the disadvantageous special losing result are set. On the other hand, in the success/failure table for the second special figure, 597 random numbers corresponding to the advantageous special losing result among the special losing results are set, and one random number corresponding to the disadvantageous special losing result is set.

In the success/failure table for each special figure, one random number corresponding to the normal deviation result is set.

In other words, the probability of a jackpot result in the winning lottery for the first special figure is 1/600, the probability of an advantageous special omission is 1/600, and the probability of an unfavorable special omission is 600. 597, and the probability of a normal outlier is 1 in 600. In addition, the probability of a big hit result in the winning lottery for the 2nd special figure is 1/600, which is the same as the 1st special figure side, and the probability of an advantageous special loss result is 600 minutes higher than the 1st special figure side. 597, the probability of being a disadvantageous special out result is 1/600 lower than the 1st special figure side, and the probability of being a normal out result is 1/600 same as the 1st special figure side. Therefore, in the winning lottery on the first special figure side, most of the results are disadvantageous special off results, and rarely normal off results, jackpot results, and advantageous special off results. In addition, in the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure, most of the results are advantageous special outliers, and rarely normal outliers, jackpot results, and disadvantageous special outliers.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first execution area RAE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and stored in the second execution area RBE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34. be done. In order to make it easier to distinguish between the first special figure side and the second special figure side, in the following description, the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area RAE is referred to as the jackpot type counter CA2, and the second execution The jackpot type counter C2 stored in the area RBE is called a jackpot type counter CB2.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 222 as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203 . Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. 10 . As shown in FIG. 10, the distribution table includes the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first special figure in FIG. 10(a) and the second special figure in FIG. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

In each distribution table, 8R jackpot results (results corresponding to small bonuses) and 16R jackpot results (results corresponding to multiple bonuses) are set as distribution destinations of game results. In the distribution table for the first special figure, the 8R jackpot result is more easily distributed than the 16R jackpot result, and in the second special figure distribution table, the 16R jackpot result is more easily distributed than the 8R jackpot result. easy.

When an 8R jackpot result or a 16R jackpot result is reached, the opening/closing execution mode is performed in the first variable winning device 32A. The round game is performed 8 times for the 8R jackpot result, and the round game is performed 16 times for the 16R jackpot result. In these open/close execution modes, in each round game, 10 is set as the upper limit winning number, and 30.0 sec is set as the upper limit opening period. In other words, in the round game of each opening and closing execution mode, the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 32A reaches 10, or the open state of the first variable winning device 32A is maintained for 30.0 sec. It terminates based on the fact that either is established. Here, the upper limit opening period of each round game is a period longer than the product of the shooting period of the game ball and the upper limit winning number. Therefore, in the round game of the 8R jackpot result or the 16R jackpot result, it is possible to expect the winning of the upper limit number of prizes in each round game, and it is possible to obtain prize balls accordingly.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The variation type counter CS determines the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the main display unit 37 and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU 202 Used. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 . More specifically, it is stored in the first execution area RAE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and stored in the second execution area RBE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34. be done. In order to make it easier to distinguish between the first special figure side and the second special figure side, in the following description, the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first execution area RAE is called the fluctuation type counter CSA, and the second execution The variation type counter CS stored in the area RBE is called a variation type counter CSB.

The variation display time on the first special figure side and the variation display time on the second special figure side are obtained from the variation type counters CSA and CSB and the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. and is determined based on A configuration relating to this variable display time will be described later in detail.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric role product release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role execution area RCE of the electric role holding area 235 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, based on the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role execution area RCE, a support lottery is performed to determine whether or not the electric role product 34a is to be placed in the open state. Then, along with the support lottery, the variable display of the normal figure display unit 38 is performed, and based on winning the support lottery, the state shifts to the support state, and the electric accessory 34a becomes the open state. Then, when the support lottery is not won or the support state based on the winning ends, the electric accessory release counter C4 in the electric role execution area RCE is erased.

In this embodiment, a new electric role product open counter C4 (holding information on the general map side) is not acquired (stored) during the execution of the 1 support lottery, so the electric role product is stored in the electric role execution area RCE. Even if winning to the through gate 35 occurs while the open counter C4 is being stored, no new hold information on the normal side is stored. In other words, on the basis of the fact that the through gate 35 has won a prize in a situation where the support lottery and the support state based thereon have not been carried out, the hold information on the general drawing side is stored in the electric work execution area RCE. Lottery begins.

Here, please refer to FIG. 11 for the outline of the support lottery and support state performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 and the relationship between the winning of the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. while explaining.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when a support lottery is carried out based on winning a prize through the through gate 35, the time required for the support lottery, that is, the time during which the pattern is displayed in the normal pattern display unit 38 is changed. is a predetermined variation time (0.3 sec) in this embodiment. The probability of winning the support lottery is about 99.6%. If so, you will not be elected. Then, when the support win is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the open duration time is 1.5 sec.

In other words, when a win to the through gate 35 occurs, it is almost a support win, and the electric accessary 34a is opened from 0.3 sec to 1.8 sec after the win to the through gate 35.

Here, as already explained, the through gate 35 is arranged right above the first operation opening 33 , and when a prize is awarded to the through gate 35 , a prize is also awarded to the first operation opening 33 . In addition, the second operating port 34 is arranged downstream of the first operating port 33, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, a prize can be won.

The positional relationship between the through gate 35, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 11(b). Through gate 35 and first operation opening 33, from the position of through gate 35 (more specifically, the position where the game ball is detected by through winning detection sensor 35a) to the position of first operation opening 33 (more specifically are arranged so that the time required for the game ball to flow down to the position where the game ball is detected by the first winning detection sensor 33a is about 0.1 sec. In other words, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 enters the first operating port 33 with a delay of about 0.1 sec from the timing of the winning.

On the other hand, the through gate 35 and the second operating port 34 are located from the position of the through gate 35 to the position of the second operating port 34 (more specifically, the position where the game ball is detected by the second winning detection sensor 34c). They are arranged so that the time required for the game ball to flow down is about 0.4 sec, which is longer than the flow down time of the through gate 35 and the first operating port 33 . In other words, the game ball that does not enter the through gate 35 reaches the second operating port 34 after 0.4 seconds after passing through the side of the through gate 35 .

When the player operates the shooting operation device 28, the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched next to a game ball that has entered the through gate 35 basically reaches the vicinity of the through gate 35 after about 0.6 seconds. When this game ball does not enter the through gate 35, it passes through the side of the through gate 35 and reaches the vicinity of the second operating port 34 after about 0.4 sec. That is, after about 1.0 sec from winning to the previous through gate 35, the subsequent game ball reaches the second operation opening 34. As described above, a support lottery is held by winning a prize at the through gate 35, and the state is shifted to the support state based on the lottery. In this support state, the electric accessory 34a is in an open state from 0.3 sec to 1.8 sec after the through gate 35 is won. In other words, when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs and the subsequent game ball does not enter the through gate 35, the subsequent game ball is released at the timing when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state. The game ball easily reaches the object 34 a and easily enters the second operation opening 34 .

The winning timings for the respective winning sections 33 to 35 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 11(c).

For example, assuming that a winning prize to the through gate 35 occurs at the timing of t1, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 at the timing of t2, which is about 0.1 sec after the timing of t1, is the first operating port 33. win a prize. Moreover, support lottery is performed from the timing of t1, and the normal pattern fluctuation of the normal pattern display part 38 is implemented until the timing of t3 which is 0.3 sec later. Then, at the timing of t3, it shifts to the support state, and the electric accessory 34a is brought into the open state. This support state continues for 1.5 seconds, and the electric accessory 34a is in the open state from timing t3 to timing t6, which is 1.5 seconds later.

A game ball launched next to the game ball that entered the through gate 35 at timing t1 reaches the through gate 35 at timing t4 after about 0.6 sec. When the game ball does not enter the through gate 35, the game ball reaches the electric accessory 34a at the timing of t5, which is 0.4 seconds later. As described above, at the timing of t5, the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 34a at the timing of t5 can enter the second operation port 34.

Here, the game ball launched next to the game ball that reached the through gate 35 at the timing of t4 also enters the second operation port 34 at the timing that can enter the second operation port 34 if it does not enter the through gate 35. On the other hand, the game ball that is launched next to the game ball that reaches the through gate 35 at the timing of t4 does not enter the through gate 35, but at the timing that it reaches the second operation port 34, the electric accessory. 34a is in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second operation opening 34. - 特許庁In other words, after winning one through gate 35, the winning of a predetermined number (three) or later of the game balls launched after the winning game ball into the second operation opening 34 is regulated. It can be said that In other words, two game balls, which are less than the predetermined number, can enter the second operation port 34 among the subsequent game balls for one support win.

In addition, the game ball launched one before the game ball that entered the through gate 35 at the timing of t1 also reaches the second operation port 34, since the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, so the second operation It is difficult to win a prize to mouth 34 . Therefore, after winning one through gate 35, it can be said that the game ball launched before the winning game ball enters the second operation port 34 is also restricted.

Therefore, for one support win, at most two game balls can enter the second operation port 34. As shown in FIG.

Here, when the game ball wins to the first operating port 33 at the timing of t2, the first special figure side game turn is carried out based on the winning. Assuming that the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side is set to, for example, 10 sec, the game round on the first special figure side will continue from the timing of t2 to the timing of t7, which is 10 seconds later. In this embodiment, the timing of t3 to t6 when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state is included in the timing of t2 to t7 when the game round of the first special figure side is performed. The variable display time of game rounds is set. In other words, when the winning to the second operation port 34 can occur, the game round of the first special figure side is executed, and the game round of the second special figure side based on the winning to the second operation opening 34 is started, it means that the game round on the side of the first special figure is being carried out.

As already explained, in the MPU 202, using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in each execution area RAE, RBE, the variation display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS The variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination. Also, in the MPU 202, the values of the jackpot random number counters CA1 and CB1 and the values of the jackpot type counters CA2 and CB2 stored in the respective execution areas RAE and RBE are used to display the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display. The stop result in the part BS is determined, and the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 in advancing the game in each game cycle will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 202 executes main processing that is activated upon power-on and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 81, determines the states of the detection sensors (detection information from the detection sensors), and saves the detection information (winning detection information). For example, when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34, the winning detection flag for through, the winning detection flag for the first operation opening, the second operation Stores the corresponding winning detection flag, such as the winning detection flag for mouth. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 321, the winning detection flag for the big winning hole is stored. When a winning to the second variable winning device 32B occurs (a game ball is detected by the detection sensor 361 for counting), a winning detection flag for winning to the second variable winning device 32B is stored. Also, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the V winning area 356, a detection flag for V winning is stored. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the area 357 for ejection, the detection flag for ejection is stored. In addition, in the structure which does not have other sensors, such as the structure which does not provide the 2nd variable prize winning device 32B, it may be the structure which does not perform the state reading process of those sensors.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the working openings accompanying the winning of the working openings 33 and 34 is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

<Prize processing for through>
Now, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 13, the winning process for through will be described.

In step S201, whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35 is determined by the detection state of the through winning detection sensor 35a. When it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, in step S202, whether or not the number SN of the accessory reserved storage stored in the electric role reserved area 235 is less than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) determine whether The accessory reserved storage number SN is incremented by 1 when a support lottery is held in the electric role execution area RCE based on the winning of the through gate 35, and when the support lottery is not won or the support lottery is not won. 1 is subtracted when the support state based on the support win ends.

If it is not determined in step S201 that the through gate 35 has won, or if it is determined in step S202 that the value of the accessory reserved memory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit (not 0), the electric accessory The winning process is ended without storing the value of the open counter C4.

On the other hand, when the game ball wins the through gate 35 and the accessory reserved storage number SN is 0, the process proceeds to step S203, and 1 is added to the accessory reserved storage number SN. In the following step S204, the value of the electric role product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service execution area RCE of the electric service reservation area 235 of the RAM204. After that, the winning process is terminated.

<Winning process for operating port>
Next, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

In step S301, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operation opening 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first operation opening 33 (start winning). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, in step S302, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 77 to pay out four game balls is set. In the following step S303, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension storage number RaN stored in the suspension ball storage area 232 is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (0 or not). The first start pending memory number RaN is incremented by 1 when a lottery is held in the first execution area RAE based on the winning of the first operation opening 33, and the normal lottery does not correspond to the open/close execution mode in the lottery. 1 is subtracted when the opening/closing execution mode based on the lottery results ends in the case of a loss result or in the case of a result corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode (big hit result, various special loss results).

If it is less than the maximum number, ie, 0, then in step S304, a process of adding 1 to the first start pending storage number RaN is executed. After that, in step S305, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (CA1), the jackpot type counter C2 (CA2) and the variation type counter CS (CSA) in the first execution area RAE. In the subsequent step S306, the setting processing of the first pending command is executed. In this process, information that the winning to the first operation port 33 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game about the reservation information acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 33 this time A process of outputting information on times (information on game results, information on variable display time, etc.) to the effect control device 82 side is performed.

In the present embodiment, in a situation where the hold information is stored in the first execution area RAE, the hold information is not acquired even if the first operation opening 33 is won. Even if the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs, the output of the first pending command is not performed. In other words, when the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs, the hold information is acquired, and the first hold command is output, the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs and the first This is the case where the game round on the 1st special figure side can be started, and at the start of the game round on the 1st special figure side, a command for the game round (fluctuation command, type command) is output as will be described later. Therefore, the configuration may be such that the first pending command is not output in any situation. This also applies to the second pending command, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in either step S301 or step S303, or if the process of step S306 is executed, the process proceeds to step S307. In step S307, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second operation opening 34 whether or not the game ball has won the second operation opening 34 (start winning). When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation port 34, a prize ball command for paying out five game balls is set to the payout control device 77 in step S308. In the subsequent step S309, it is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the pending ball storage area 232 is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (0 or not). The second start pending memory number RbN is incremented by 1 when a lottery is held in the second execution area RBE based on the winning of the second operation opening 34, and the lottery does not correspond to the open/close execution mode. 1 is subtracted when the opening/closing execution mode based on the lottery results ends in the case of a loss result or in the case of a result corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode (big hit result, various special loss results).

If it is less than the maximum number, ie, 0, then in step S310, a process of adding 1 to the second start pending storage number RbN is executed. After that, in step S311, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (CB1), the jackpot type counter C2 (CB2), and the fluctuation type counter CS (CSB) in the second execution area RBE. In the subsequent step S312, a process of setting a second pending command is executed. In this process, information that the winning to the second operation port 34 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game about the reservation information acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 34 this time A process of outputting information on times (information on game results, information on variable display time, etc.) to the effect control device 82 side is performed. When a negative determination is made in either step S307 or step S309, or after the process of step S312 is executed, the prize winning process for this working opening ends.

Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in the above steps S302 and S308 are transmitted to the payout control device 77 in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later. In addition, the hold command set in step S306 and step S312 is also transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. These pending commands contain information as to which of the winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is based on the winning of the operating port, and in the effect control device 82 the suspension By receiving the command, the display control device 212 changes the display by each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 side, and the first special figure display area GA and the second special figure display area GB in the display screen G Make display settings.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S410 and S411 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external output process is executed in step S401. In the external output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 77 . In addition, when a production command such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command or a hold command is set, it is transmitted to the production control device 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S402, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204 .

In the subsequent step S403, a first game round control process for controlling a game based on the winning to the first operation opening 33 is executed. In this first game round control process, the jackpot determination on the side of the first special figure, the setting of the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display device 41, the display control of the first special figure display section AS, and the like are performed.

After executing the first game round control process of step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, and the second game round control process for controlling the game based on the winning to the second operation opening 34 is carried out. In this second game round control process, the big hit determination on the side of the second special figure, the setting of the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display device 41, the display control of the second special figure display section BS, and the like are performed.

After each game round control process is executed in steps S403 and S404, a game state transition process is executed in step S405. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode or the like.

In the subsequent step S306, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operation port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role product 34a is placed in the open state using numerical information obtained from the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role execution area RCE of the electric role holding area 235 of the RAM 204. An electric role open lottery is performed to determine whether or not, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed.

In the subsequent step S307, a V distribution setting process relating to drive control of the drive section 359 for the shutter in the second variable prize winning device 32B is executed. In this processing, based on the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (in this embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode based on various special failure results) in which drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 should be performed, the shutter drive unit 359 Drive control is performed to switch whether the game ball that has reached the branch position is distributed to the V winning area 356 or to the discharge area 357 .

The processing of steps S403 to S407 will be described later in detail.

In step S408, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 78. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the subsequent step S409, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204 . Further, in step S411, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

<First game round control process>
Next, the first game round control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 16 to 18. FIG.

In the first game round control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S503 to S507 and the game round progress process of steps S508 to S516 are not executed, and this game is executed. Terminate the turn control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, regardless of whether or not the winning to the first operation port 33 has occurred, the first special figure side game cycle is not started.

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the first special figure display portion AS is in the process of variable display. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not a first variable display flag (first variable display information) is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The flag during the first variable display is stored when the variable display is started for the first special figure display portion AS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the first special figure display unit AS is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S503 to S507. In the game turn start process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension memory number RaN is "0". When the first start pending memory number RaN is "0", it means that the winning to the first operation opening 33 has not occurred. Therefore, the first game round control process is terminated as it is. If the first start pending memory number RaN is not "0", it is determined in step S504 whether or not the second winning flag or the second special losing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204.

The second winning flag is a flag that is stored when a big win is won in the lottery on the second special figure side, and is erased at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the big win. In addition, the second special out flag is set at the start of the opening and closing execution mode executed based on any special out result in the lottery on the second special side (more specifically, in the special out result This is a flag that is stored at the end of a certain game round) and erased at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special loss result. When the second winning flag or the second special losing result flag is stored, the first game round control processing is terminated as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the lottery system on the first special figure side and the lottery system on the second special figure side can be executed in parallel, if one of the lottery systems results in a big hit, It is configured to limit the start of the other lottery system game round. By doing so, even though one of the lottery systems resulted in a big win, the player is too concerned about the result of the other lottery system and cannot concentrate on the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win. It becomes possible to avoid the event.

In addition, not only the big win in the other lottery system but also the special loss result is configured to limit the start of the game round of the other lottery system based on the result. In this way, it is possible to avoid such a phenomenon that the opening/closing execution mode is overlapped due to the start of a game round resulting in a big win in the other lottery system during execution of a game round resulting in a special loss. becomes possible.

However, if the game result of the other lottery system is a jackpot result, after the execution of the lottery that results in the jackpot result, that is, after the start of the other lottery game round that results in the jackpot If the start of the round is restricted and the game result of the other lottery system is a special loss result, after the start of the opening and closing execution mode based on the special loss result (after the end of the game round that is the special loss result) , the start of the other game cycle is restricted. In this way, one lottery result is not affected by the other lottery result, and at the same time, if one lottery result is a special losing result, the other lottery result can be a big win result. It is possible to leave.

As described above, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a plurality of lottery systems can be executed in parallel, and a result that can limit the other is set. In other words, there are cases where these multiple lottery systems are implemented in parallel, and there are cases where they are implemented independently. It is possible to highlight the lottery system on the side.

If the second winning flag or the second special loss flag is not stored in step S504, the first data setting process is executed in step S505. In the first data setting process, the reservation information stored in the first execution area RAE, that is, the jackpot random number counter CA1, the jackpot type counter CA2, and the variation type counter CSA are set as the hold information for the win/fail judgment. In the present embodiment, when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33, processing equivalent to the first data setting processing is performed, so this processing can be omitted.

In step S506, the first variation start processing for starting the variation display in the first special figure display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is executed. Then, in step S507, after setting the transmission of the variation command and the type command for starting the variation display, the first game round control processing is terminated. The command for variation and the type command are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. In the production control device 82, based on the received variation command and type command, the display control device 212 is controlled to display the variation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G and the variation display of the first special figure display area GA. perform processing to start the

Here, the first fluctuation start processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the first fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, the propriety table for the first special figure (FIG. 9A) is acquired, and in step S602, propriety determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1 stored in the first execution area RAE is set as the value set as the jackpot winning in the first special figure success/failure table, and as the advantage special losing result winning. value, and a value set as a disadvantageous special loss result winning.

After the process of step S602, in steps S603 to S617, the process for setting the game result of the current game round is executed, and the first special figure display unit AS is executed in the current game round. Executes processing for setting the stop result when ending the variable display. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

Specifically, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S602 is a big win. When the jackpot is won, in steps S604 to S610, the process for setting the game result and the stop result when the jackpot is won is executed.

In step S604, a process of storing the first winning flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. The first winning flag is a flag that is stored when a jackpot is won in the lottery on the first special figure side, and is erased at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot. By storing the first winning flag, processing for restricting the start of the game round on the second special figure side and stopping the variable display is performed.

In the following step S605, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first special figure display unit (FIG. 10(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter CA2 stored in the first execution area RAE is included in the numerical range of the 16R jackpot results or the numerical range of the 8R jackpot results.

In step S606, based on the processing result of step S605, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the 16R jackpot result. In the case of the 16R jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S607, and the fluctuation display of the first special figure display unit AS while the stop result that causes the 16R jackpot result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS Execute stop result setting processing for 16R jackpot to end. In step S608, the first side 16R flag, which is information indicating that the current game result is the 16R jackpot result of the lottery system on the first special figure side, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. .

A negative determination in step S606 means that the current jackpot result is the 8R jackpot result. In this case, in step S609, 8R for ending the variable display of the first special figure display unit AS while the stop result that causes the 8R jackpot result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS Execute stop result setting processing for jackpot. Also, in step S610, the first side 8R flag, which is information indicating that the current game result is the 8R jackpot result, is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG.

If it is determined in step S603 that the result is not a big win, the process advances to step S611 to determine whether or not the result of this time's loss is any special result of loss. If the result is any of the special losing results, the process proceeds to step S612 to determine whether or not the result is a special advantageous losing result. If it is the result of the special advantage, in step S613, the stop result that causes the result of the special advantage is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS, and the first special figure display unit AS A stop result setting process for the advantage/special loss for ending the variable display is executed. Also, in step S614, the first side advantageous opening flag, which is information for indicating that the opening/closing execution mode based on the game result of this time is based on the advantageous special loss result of the lottery system on the first special figure side, Stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 .

A negative determination in step S612 means that the current game result is a disadvantageous special loss result. In this case, in step S615, in a state in which the stop result resulting in the occurrence of the disadvantageous special out result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS, the variable display of the first special figure display unit AS is terminated. Execute stop result setting processing for disadvantageous special out. Further, in step S616, the first side disadvantageous opening flag, which is information for indicating that the opening/closing execution mode based on the current game result is based on the disadvantageous special loss result of the lottery system on the first special figure side, Stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 .

If it is determined in step S611 that the result is not a special failure result, it means that the current failure result is a normal failure result. In this case, in step S617, in a state in which the stop result that causes the normal deviation result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS, the normal for ending the variable display of the first special figure display unit AS Execute the stop result setting process for the deviation.

After executing any one of steps S608, S610, S614, S616 and S617, the process proceeds to step S618. In step S618, update processing of the first game counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is executed.

The first game round counter is a counter for grasping the number of times the first special figure side game round has been performed after a predetermined game result is obtained. More specifically, it is a counter for grasping the number of times the first special figure side game round has been performed after a big hit result in the first special figure side success or failure lottery. In step S618, a process of adding 1 to the first game counter is executed.

In the subsequent step S619, a first variable display time setting process is executed. The setting process of the first variable display time is a process for setting the variable display time of the first special figure side game round to be started this time. This setting process will be described later in detail. After that, in step S620, after starting the variable display in the first special figure display portion AS, the first variable start processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the first game round control process (FIG. 16), when it is determined in step S502 that the variable display of the first special figure display portion AS is being performed, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the variation display time has elapsed in the game round of the first special figure side being executed.

Here, in this embodiment, at the start of the first special figure side game round, numerical information corresponding to the length of the variable display time is input to the first elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. be. The first elapsed counter is updated so as to be decremented at predetermined intervals. Then, when the initial value (0) is reached, it is grasped that the variable display time of the game round on the side of the first special figure has ended. In step S508, if the first elapsed counter is not the initial value (0), it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed.

If it is determined in step S508 that the variable display time has not passed, it is determined in step S509 whether or not the RAM 204 stores the second winning flag or the second special losing flag. If the second winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S510, the variable display process is executed, and then the first game round control process is terminated. The variable display process is a process of performing variable display (light emission control of the light emitting part) in the first special figure display unit AS.

If it is determined in step S509 that the second winning flag or the second special loss flag is stored, the process for forced termination of steps S511 and S512 is performed.

In the forced termination process of step S511, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, in step S701, a process of rewriting the game result of the changing game round to the normal result is executed. Here, if the game result of the changing game round is any special loss result, the corresponding flag is stored as described above. Specifically, if the current forced termination process is the process of the first special figure side game round, the first side advantageous opening flag or the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored. In the rewriting process of step S701, by erasing the open flag, the game result of the current game round is processed to be the normal deviation result.

Then, in step S702, a process of clearing the variable display time of the game round that is changing, that is, a process of rewriting the first elapsed counter to the initial value (0) is executed, and this forced termination process is terminated.

In step S512, a forced end command is transmitted and set to make the effect control device 82 on the sub side grasp that an event for forcibly ending the first game round being executed has occurred. The forced termination command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 based on the received forced termination command, and executes processing for changing the contents of the variable display of the symbols on the display screen G.

As already explained, when the game round of the second special figure side, which is the other side, is being implemented at the start of the game round of the first special figure side, the lottery result of the game round of the second special figure side is the jackpot result. If there is, the game round on the side of the first special figure is not started. Further, even if the game round of the second special figure side is not implemented at the start of the game round of the first special figure side, if the opening and closing execution mode based on the game result of the second special figure side is implemented, the second The game round on the 1 special figure side is not started. As will be described later, this relationship is also applied at the start of the second special figure side game round, and when the second special figure side game round is started, the first special figure side game round is being executed If the result is a jackpot result, the second special figure side game round is not started, and even if the opening/closing execution mode based on the first special figure side game result is being carried out, the second special figure side game round is not carried out.

That is, when the first special figure side game round is started, the second special figure side game round is executed when neither the second special figure side game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is performed. Even if it is, it is either a special outlier or a normal outlier. Then, in step S509 it is determined that the second winning flag or the second special out flag is stored, and if the process for forced termination of steps S511 and S512 is performed, the first special figure side In the lottery system, after the start of a game round that does not result in a big hit, the game round on the second special figure side is started during the game round on the first special figure side, and the started game round is a jackpot result. Or, when the opening and closing execution mode is started after the game round which is the result of the special deviation on the second special figure side during the game round on the first special figure side is ended. In such a case, the game round on the side of the first special figure is forcibly terminated, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the game round on the second special figure side or the game round is preferentially executed.

When the variation display time has passed in step S508 and it is the end timing of the game round on the side of the first special figure, the process proceeds to step S513. In step S513, it is determined whether or not the first side advantageous opening flag or the first side unfavorable opening flag is stored. The case where these flags are stored is the case where the game result of the game round on the side of the first special figure that ends this time is the special advantageous losing result or the disadvantageous special losing result. In this case, in step S514, a process of storing the first special out flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is executed. As a result, the start of the game round on the side of the second special figure is restricted, or the game round on the side of the second special figure in execution is forcibly terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S513, or after the process of step S514 is executed, a process for ending fluctuation is executed in step S515. In such processing, the first special figure display unit AS is controlled so that the stop result set in the first fluctuation start processing is displayed. Then, after setting the fluctuation end command in step S516, the first game round control process is ended. The fluctuation end command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the performance control device 82, based on the reception of the variation end command, the variation display by each symbol row Z1 to Z3 being executed and the variation display of the first special figure display area GA are displayed as a stop result corresponding to the game result of this time. The display control device 212 is controlled so as to end as follows.

Here, if the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a special loss result, if the current game round ends after the forced end processing of step S511, and if the current game round ends after the fluctuation end processing of step S515 There is a case where the game round ends. In this case, when the forced termination process of step S511 is performed, the game result is overwritten to the normal result and terminated as described above, so the corresponding release flag (first side advantageous release flag or first side disadvantageous release flag) is erased and the first special out flag is not stored. On the other hand, when passing through the fluctuation end processing of step S515, the game result is ended without being rewritten, so the corresponding open flag is maintained and the first special out flag is stored. In other words, in the case of a special loss result in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the game round ends, the game round ends while the type of the special loss result of this time is stored and held, and the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the game round ends. When the mode is not implemented (the other lottery system open/close execution mode is implemented), the type of special loss result of this time is erased (the type of special loss result of the other lottery system is stored and held). . By doing so, it is possible to clearly grasp which lottery system is based on the open/close execution mode without increasing the types of flags in a configuration in which game rounds resulting in a special loss result overlap.

<Second game round control processing>
Next, the second game round control process of 404 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. Since the second game round control process is basically the same as the first game round control process, differences will be mainly described.

That is, in the second game round control process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, as in step S501. If it is the opening/closing execution mode, the second game round control process is terminated as it is. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display portion BS is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is not during the variable display, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the second special figure side hold information is stored with reference to the second start hold storage number RbN. If the reservation information on the second special figure side is stored, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag or the first special out flag is stored in step S804. If neither is stored, the second data setting process is executed in step S805, the second fluctuation start process is executed in step S806, and then the variation command and the type command are produced in step S807. After setting it as an object to be transmitted to the device 82, the second game round control process is terminated.

The second fluctuation start process in step S806 corresponds to the first fluctuation start process. That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, in steps S901 to S903, a process for determining the game result in the current second special figure side game round is executed. In this case, in step S901, unlike step S601, the second special figure propriety table (FIG. 9(b)) is acquired. As already explained, in the lottery system of the 1st special side and the 2nd special side, although the probability of a jackpot result is the same, the probability of a special advantageous result and the probability of a disadvantageous special result are different. The lottery system is different. More specifically, the second special side has a higher probability of being an advantageous special out result than the first special side, and the first special side is more disadvantageous special out than the second special side. There is a high probability that

After performing the success/failure determination process at step S902, at step S903, it is determined whether or not the game result of the second special figure side game round is a big hit result. If the result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S904, and a process of storing the second winning flag in the RAM 204 is executed. By this process, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S504 to limit the start of the first special figure side game round, or to make an affirmative determination in step S509 to forcibly end the first special figure side game round. It becomes possible.

In step S905, distribution determination processing is executed. In this process, unlike step S605, the distribution table for the second special figure (FIG. 10(b)) is acquired to determine the type of the current jackpot result. As already explained, the distribution table for the second special figure is set so as to be distributed to the 16R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result. And the probability that the second special figure side will result in a 16R jackpot is higher than the first special figure side.

In step S906, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is the 16R jackpot result. When the result is the 16R big win result, the process for the 16R big win result is performed in steps S907 and S908. The processing of steps S907 and S908 is generally the same as the processing of steps S607 and S608. However, in step S908, the second side 16R flag is stored in the RAM 204 instead of the first side 16R flag so that the MPU 202 can distinguish between the 16R jackpot result on the first special side and the 16R jackpot result on the second special side. Execute the process to store in

If it is determined in step S906 that the result is not the 16R jackpot result, it means that the current jackpot result is the 8R jackpot result. In this case, processing for the 8R jackpot result is performed in steps S909 and S910. Steps S909 and S910 are generally similar to the processing of steps S609 and S610. However, in step S610, the RAM 204 stores the second side 8R flag instead of the first side 8R flag so that the MPU 202 can distinguish between the first special figure side 8R jackpot result and the second special figure side 8R jackpot result. Execute the process to store in

If a negative determination is made in step S903, a process for failure is performed in steps S911 to S917. These processes are generally the same as the processes in steps S611 to S617. However, in step S914, the second side advantageous opening flag is stored instead of the first side advantageous opening flag, and in step S916 the second side disadvantageous opening flag is stored instead of the first side disadvantageous opening flag. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the advantageous special loss result on the first special figure side and the advantageous special loss result on the second special figure side, and the disadvantageous special loss result on the first special figure side and the second special figure Disadvantageous special omission results on the side can be distinguished.

After executing any one of steps S908, S910, S914, S916 and S917, the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, update processing of the second game counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is executed.

The second game counter corresponds to the first game counter, and is a counter for grasping the number of times the second special figure side game has been performed after a predetermined game result is achieved. More specifically, it is a counter for grasping the number of times the second special figure side game round has been performed after a big hit result in the second special figure side success or failure lottery. In step S918, a process of adding 1 to the second game counter is executed.

In the following step S919, a second variable display time setting process is executed. The setting process of the second variable display time is a process for setting the variable display time of the second special figure side game round to be started this time. This setting process will be described later in detail. After that, in step S920, the process for starting the variable display is executed, and then the second process for starting the variable display ends.

Returning to the description of the second game round control process (FIG. 19), when it is determined that the second special figure display unit BS is in the middle of the variable display in step S802, the second special figure being executed in step S808 It is determined whether or not the variable display time in the side game round has elapsed.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the start of the game round on the second special figure side, numerical information corresponding to the length of the variable display time is input to the second elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. be. The second elapsed counter is updated so as to be decremented at predetermined intervals. Then, when the initial value (0) is reached, it is grasped that the variation display time of the game round on the second special figure side has ended. In step S808, if the second elapsed counter is not the initial value (0), it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed.

If it is determined in step S808 that the variable display time has not elapsed, it is determined in step S809 whether or not the RAM 204 stores the first winning flag or the first special losing flag. This process corresponds to the process of step S509, and during the execution of the game round that results in the special loss result or the normal loss result on the side of the second special figure, a big hit occurs in the lottery on the side of the first special figure. It is a process for determining whether or not the opening and closing execution mode based on the special deviation result on the side of the first special figure has been started.

If it is determined that neither the first winning flag nor the first special out flag is stored in step S809, the second special figure display unit BS is displayed in step S810. After executing the process, the second game round control process is terminated. If it is determined in step S809 that the first winning flag or the first special loss flag is stored, forced termination processing is executed in step S811. This processing is generally the same processing as the processing in FIG. Then, in step S702, a process of clearing the variable display time is performed. However, in this case, in step S701, when the lottery result in the second special figure side game round being executed is a special loss result, the game result is rewritten to a normal loss result. More specifically, the second side advantageous opening flag or the second side unfavorable opening flag is erased to rewrite the result to the normal deviation. Then, in step S812, the forced end command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and the second game round control process is terminated.

When the variation display time has passed in step S808 and it is the end timing of the game round on the side of the second special figure, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, it is determined whether or not the second side advantageous opening flag or the second side unfavorable opening flag is stored. The case where these flags are stored is the case where the game result of the second special figure side game round to be finished this time is the special advantageous losing result or the disadvantageous special losing result. In this case, in step S814, a process of storing the second special out flag is executed. As a result, the start of the game round on the side of the first special figure is restricted, or the game round on the side of the first special figure in execution is forcibly terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, or after the process of step S814 is executed, a process for ending fluctuation is executed in step S815. In this process, the second special figure display section BS is controlled so that the stop result set in the second fluctuation start process is displayed. Then, after setting the fluctuation end command in step S816, the second game round control process is ended. The fluctuation end command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. In the performance control device 82, based on the reception of the variation end command, the variation display by each symbol row Z1 to Z3 being executed and the variation display of the first special figure display area GA are displayed as a stop result corresponding to the game result of this time. The display control device 212 is controlled so as to end as follows.

As in the case of the first game round control process, even in the second game round control process, if the game result of the game round on the side of the second special figure is a special loss result, this time through the forced termination process of step S811. There is a case where the game cycle ends, and a case where the current game cycle ends after the process for ending the fluctuation in step S815. In this case, when the forced termination process of step S811 is performed, the corresponding open flag (second side advantageous open flag or second side unfavorable open flag) is erased, and the second special out flag is not stored. On the other hand, when passing through the fluctuation end processing of step S815, the corresponding open flag is maintained and the second special out flag is stored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by the first game round control process and the second game round control process, the game rounds of the two lottery systems can be executed independently, and one lottery system can When a big win occurs, the start of the other lottery system game round is restricted, or the game round under execution is forcibly terminated. By doing so, even if a plurality of lottery systems are performed in parallel, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention paid to the result of the big win.

In addition, when a special losing result occurs in one of the lottery systems, the start of the other game round is not restricted while the game round resulting in the special losing result is being executed, but the game round resulting in the special losing result is not restricted. Based on the end (start of the opening/closing execution mode), the start of the other game round is restricted, and the other game round being executed is forcibly ended.

Therefore, in both lottery systems, there are cases in which game rounds that result in a special loss are executed in parallel. In this case, the opening/closing execution mode of the side whose game round has ended first is executed, and the other special loss result is rewritten to the normal loss result. For example, during execution of a game round that results in either an advantageous special loss result or a disadvantageous special loss result in the lottery system on the side of the first special figure, special loss in the lottery system on the side of the second special figure It is a configuration in which a game turn that results in either a special loss result or a special loss result that is disadvantageous can be executed. In this case, if the game round on the side of the first special figure ends first, the opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special loss on the side of the first special figure, and if the game round on the side of the second special figure ends first, the Opening and closing execution mode based on the special deviation result on the 2 special figure side will be implemented. In this way, in the configuration in which the special loss result overlaps in the game rounds of both lottery systems, the open/close execution mode to be executed differs depending on which game round ends first, so both lottery systems It is possible to draw a high degree of interest in not only the game result but also the progress of the game.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S405 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 21 to 23. FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1002, and the RAM 204 stores either the first winning flag or the second winning flag, the first special losing flag or the second special losing flag, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored. The V win flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the fact that the game ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 32B has passed through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special loss result. , and a new opening/closing execution mode is executed after the opening/closing execution mode based on the special loss result based on the storage of the V winning flag.

If none of the flags is stored in step S1002, the game state transition processing is terminated. If any flag is stored, the process advances to step S1003 to determine whether it is the end timing of the variation display of the corresponding game cycle or the end timing of the corresponding opening/closing execution mode. More specifically, when any of the winning flags or any of the special losing flags is stored, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the corresponding game round, and the V winning flag is stored. If so, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the corresponding open/close execution mode. If it is neither of the end timings, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it is either end timing, the process advances to step S1004 to execute opening/closing execution mode start processing. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) is set for waiting without starting the opening of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 . In this case, the waiting time information set according to the type of the opening/closing execution mode is different, and the waiting time information is set according to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the result of one of the jackpots. It is set so that the standby time is longer than in mode. For example, in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to any jackpot result, the count value of the waiting time information is set so that the waiting time is 1 second, and in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result, the waiting time is 0. The count value of the waiting time information is set to be 0.5 sec. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, as a result of the winning lottery, a special loss result is frequently obtained, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special loss result is executed almost every game round. Therefore, by setting a short wait time for the opening in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result as described above, it is possible to realize smooth progress of the game.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the standby|waiting time of opening according to the kind of special loss result. For example, a favorable special out result may have a longer waiting time for opening than an unfavorable special out result. By doing so, it is possible to inform the opening/closing execution mode which is more advantageous to the player before starting. In addition, during the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss, the key to the game is whether or not it is possible to pass through the V winning area 356. A long waiting time for opening of favorable extra-losing results is preferred. However, if the waiting time for the opening of the advantageous special losing result is lengthened, the waiting time should not overlap with the period in which the shutter 358 distributes to the V winning area 356, or may overlap. It is preferable that a non-overlapping time is generated even if there is, and that the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 32B during the non-overlapping time.

In the following step S1005, the presence or absence of a special off flag is checked in order to set the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. That is, it is determined whether or not any one of the first special out flag and the second special out flag is stored. If none of the special out flags is stored, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not any one of the first side 16R flag, second side 16R flag and V win flag is stored. If any of these flags are stored, the opening/closing execution mode this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the 16R jackpot result, or the opening/closing execution mode based on the special loss result. It means that it is an opening and closing execution mode that is executed after the inflow of game balls) occurs. In this case, in step S1007, the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is set to "16". The first round counter RC1 is for counting the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1006, the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the 8R jackpot result, and in this case, "8" is set to the first round counter RC1 in step S1008. Then, when it is determined in step S1005 that any special out flag is stored, "1" is set in the first round counter RC1 in step S1009.

After executing the process of step S1007, step S1008, or step S1009, an opening command is set in step S1010. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This opening command includes information on the type of game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time is performed. For example, if it is an opening/closing execution mode based on the result of a big hit, display control is performed on the symbol display device 41 so as to notify that effect and the number of rounds (16 or 8) in the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, even if the opening/closing execution mode is 16 rounds, it is not notified from the beginning, but is notified as if the opening/closing execution mode is 8 rounds, and is notified that it is 16 rounds in the middle. It is good also as composition which performs so-called promotion production. In addition, for example, if the opening/closing execution mode is based on any of the special loss results, it is notified to that effect, and it is notified that the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds will occur after the occurrence of the V prize. The display of the pattern display device 41 is controlled. Then, if the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning flag) is newly started based on the V winning, display control is performed on the pattern display device 41 so as to congratulate the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result, basically, V winning does not occur, and the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is a game characteristic that frequently occurs. A configuration may be adopted in which notification for the opening/closing execution mode is not performed based on the result of the special disadvantageous exclusion. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance caused by the frequent notification of the open/close execution mode in which no winning is possible.

In the following step S1011, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of various 16R flags and various 8R flags is stored in the RAM 204. The signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal is the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

Further, in the external signal setting process, if any special off flag is stored in the RAM 204, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special off signal provided on the external terminal plate 79 is changed to the special off signal output. state. As a result, when the output terminal for the special omission signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the special omission signal is output to the management control device, and the special omission signal is output to the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device It can be grasped that the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the disconnection has occurred.

It should be noted that whether or not to output a special failure signal may differ depending on the type of special failure result. For example, out of the special advantage loss result and the disadvantage special loss result, based on the advantage special loss result, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special loss signal provided on the external terminal plate 79 is changed to the special loss signal output state. A configuration may be adopted in which the special out signal is not output based on the special out result. In this way, in the management control device on the game hall side, while it is possible to grasp that the opening and closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result has occurred, the opening and closing execution mode based on the frequently occurring disadvantageous special loss result can be detected. There is no need to keep track of them, and it is possible to avoid the complexity of data management due to frequent signal output and the increase in processing load.

In the external signal setting process, when the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 204, the signal output state of the V winning signal output terminal provided on the external terminal plate 79 is set to the V winning signal output state. . As a result, when the output terminal for the V winning signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the V winning signal is output to the management control device, and the V winning signal is output to the management control device at the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. It can be grasped that the opening/closing execution mode based on winning has occurred.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S1013. Here, the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 321 or the sorting entrance 351 is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving states of the driving section 323 of the first variable winning device 32A and the driving section 353 of the second variable winning device 32B. When the big winning opening 321 and the sorting entrance 351 are not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" in step S1102, and various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 are determined in step S1103. determines whether or not the value of the first timer counter TC1 provided in is "0". The first timer counter TC1 is a counter for the MPU 202 to specify various control timings during the open/close execution mode, and is subtracted by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

When the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" or when the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1104, where any special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. determine whether or not there is If any special out flag is not stored, it means that the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize. In this case, in step S1105. A first open process is executed. In the first opening process, the drive unit 323 of the first variable winning device 32A is driven and controlled to open the big winning opening 321. FIG. Thereby, winning to the first variable winning device 32A is permitted.

After that, in step S1106, in order to set the period for maintaining the open state of the first variable prize winning device 32A, the first timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (equivalent to 30.0 sec) which is a long time mode. Execute the process. As a result, a round game is started in which the first variable prize winning device 32A is open for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if any special failure flag is stored in step S1104, it means that the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the special failure result. Execute release processing. In the second opening process, the drive section 353 of the second variable winning device 32B is drive-controlled to open the sorting entrance 351. FIG. Thereby, the winning to the second variable winning device 32B is allowed.

After that, in step S1108, it is determined whether or not the special loss result of this time is a special advantageous loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first side advantageous opening flag or the second side advantageous opening flag is stored. If the result is a special advantage loss, the process advances to step S1106 to execute the process of setting "15000", which is the long time mode, to the first timer counter TC1 as described above. As a result, a round game is started in which the second variable winning device 32B is open for a long period of time.

If it is determined in step S1108 that the result is a special disadvantageous loss rather than a special advantageous loss result, a process of setting "150" (equivalent to 0.3 sec), which is a short time mode, to the first timer counter TC1 in step S1109. to run. As a result, a round game is started in which the second variable winning device 32B is in an open state for a short period of time.

After executing the process of step S1106 or step S1109, "10" is set to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S1110. The winning counter PC is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B.

After that, in step S1111, after setting the opening command as an object to be output to the effect control device 82, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. The open command includes information as to which of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B should be in the open state. Based on the received opening command, the effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B to be opened, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. do.

In step S1101, when the big winning opening 321 or the sorting entrance 351 is open, the process proceeds to step S1112 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S1113 whether or not a prize has been awarded to either of the variable prize winning devices 32A, 32B. Specifically, it is determined whether or not passage of the game ball is detected by the detection state of the detection sensor 325 for the big winning opening or the detection sensor 361 for counting. If no prize has been won, the big prize opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter PC in step S1114.

In the following step S1115, it is determined whether or not the game ball has flowed into the V winning area 356 based on the detection state of the detection sensor 362 for V winning. When an inflow to the V winning area 356 occurs, a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is executed in step S1116. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to recognize that a V winning (inflow of game balls into the V winning area 356) has occurred in the opening/closing execution mode of this time.

If it is determined in step S1115 that V winning has not occurred, or if the process of step S1116 has been executed, it is determined in step S1117 whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If not, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0" at step S1112, or if the value of the winning counter PC is "0" at step S1117, it means that the conditions for closing the big winning opening are established. In such a case, in step S1118, the driving units 323 and 353 corresponding to closing the big winning opening 321 or the sorting entrance 351 are brought into a non-driving state.

In the following step S1119, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter RC1, and in step S1120, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0", the first timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (that is, 2 sec) in step S1121. After that, a close command is set in step S1122, and the main winning opening opening/closing process ends. This set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. A performance control device 82 determines the contents of performance corresponding to the closing of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

If it is determined in step S1120 that the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", ending processing is executed in step S1123. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 . The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S1124, after setting the ending command, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. A performance control device 82 determines the content of performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time is performed.

It should be noted that the waiting time for the ending set in step S1123 may be varied in length according to the timing of transition to the opening/closing execution mode that ends this time. For example, the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result may be set to be longer than the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special win. Also, the length of waiting time for the ending may be varied according to the type of special outlier result. For example, the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result may be set to be longer than the waiting time for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special disadvantageous loss result.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 21), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S1013, it is determined in step S1014 whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0". Also, in step S1015, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, in step S1016, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and step S1017. After executing the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode at , the game state transition processing is ended. In the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode, the effect control device 82 or the like is controlled so as to perform an effect for ending the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not any one of the first winning flag, the second winning flag and the V winning flag is stored. That is, it is grasped whether the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win or the opening/closing execution mode shifted after the passage of the V winning area 356 occurs during the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss. do. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, a process of resetting the first game counter and the second game counter to the initial value (0) is executed in step S1202. In the subsequent step S1203, a process of erasing the various winning flags ascertained in step S1201 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, or after the process of step S1203 is executed, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not the V winning flag is stored. That is, the opening/closing execution mode to be terminated this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss, and it is determined whether or not the V winning area 356 has been passed during the opening/closing execution mode. When the V winning flag is stored, the process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is executed in step S1205. As a result, it becomes possible to make an affirmative determination in step S1002 of the game state transition processing, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V prize is newly started following the end of the opening/closing execution mode this time.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204, or after the processing of step S1205 is performed, in step S1206, various special out flags (first special out flag, second special out flag) are erased. If the special flag is not stored, that state is maintained. In the subsequent step S1207, a process of erasing various opening flags (first side advantageous opening flag, first side unfavorable opening flag, second side advantageous opening flag, second side unfavorable opening flag) is executed. If the open flag is not stored, that state is maintained. Then, in step S1208, the erasing process of the big win game result flags (first side 16R flag, first side 8R flag, second side 16R flag, second side 8R flag) is executed. In addition, when the game result flag for big win is not stored, the state is maintained. After that, the transition processing at the time of this termination is terminated.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the electric support support process of step S406 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 24 and 25. FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supported flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a is set to the open state, and is erased when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state.

If the supported flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is "0". If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electronic support process is terminated.

When the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1304, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the pattern in the general pattern display section . If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, after setting the deviation display, the electronic support process is ended. By setting the out-of-order display, the changing display of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 38 is terminated while the out-of-order display is stopped.

If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, in step S1306, the value of the accessory pending storage number SN stored in the electric worker holding area 235 is "0". ” is determined. When the value of the number SN of the accessory reserved storage is "0", the electronic role support processing is terminated as it is. When the value of the accessory reserved storage number SN is greater than "0", an open lottery is performed in step S1307. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role execution area RCE is 0 to 249, the opening lottery is won. Simultaneously with the opening lottery, the second timer counter TC2 is set to "150" (that is, 0.3 sec). The second timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

In subsequent step S1308, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1307 is support winning. If it is not the support win, the electronic role support process is terminated without executing the process of step S1309. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1309, and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2 provided in the RAM 204, the electronic role support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the support winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", it means that the normal pattern display section 38 is in the process of changing the pattern display, and thus the electronic role support process is terminated. If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1311. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 38 is terminated while the winning display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1312, the supporting flag is stored, and after the support winning flag is erased, the electronic role supporting process is terminated.

If it is determined that the support flag is stored in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1313, and after executing the electric opening/closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessary 34a, the electric role support process is executed. finish. The electrical opening/closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving section 34b is in a driving state. When the electric accessory 34a is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", the electric switching process is terminated. When the value of the second timer counter TC2 is "0", the process advances to step S1403 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessary product 34a to the closed state.

After that, in step S1404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the value of the second round counter RC2 is "0". . The second round counter RC2 is a counter for specifying the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened in the support state. If the value of the second round counter RC2 is not "0", the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. is erased, the main electric switch opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the electric accessory 34a is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not the second timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the second timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. When the second timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1408, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. Then, in step S1409, the second timer counter TC2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec), and then the electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

<V distribution setting processing>
Next, the V apportionment setting process of step S407 of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the open/close execution mode. If it is the start timing, the third timer counter TC3 provided in the counter area 233 of the RAM 204 is set to "500" (ie, 1.0 sec) in step S1502. In the subsequent step S1503, a process of setting "1" to the distribution counter HC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 is executed. The third timer counter TC3 is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started. Also, the distribution counter HC is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the number of operations of the shutter 358 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or if the process of step S1503 has been executed, the process advances to step S1504. In step S1504, it is determined whether or not the shutter 358 is arranged at a position for distributing game balls to the V winning area 356 by grasping the drive state of the driving section 359 for the shutter. When the game ball is placed at the position to distribute the game ball to the ejection area 357 instead of the V winning area 356, the process proceeds to step S1505 to determine whether or not the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If it is "0", it is determined in step S1506 whether or not the distribution counter HC is "0". If the third timer counter TC3 is not "0" in step S1505, or if the distribution counter HC is "0" in step S1506, it is determined that the drive control timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is not reached. , the V distribution setting process is terminated.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1505 and the negative determination is made in step S1506, in step S1507, driving control of the drive unit 359 for the shutter is started and the shutter 358 is positioned to distribute the game ball to the V winning area 356. Perform processing to switch to Then, in step S1508, the third timer counter TC3 is set to "1500" (that is, 3.0 sec), and then the V apportionment setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S1504 that the shutter 358 is located at the position to distribute the game balls to the V winning area 356, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, it is determined whether or not the third timer counter TC3 is "0". If it is not "0", the V allocation setting process is terminated as it is. If it is "0", in step S1510, the drive control of the drive unit 359 for the shutter is finished, and the process for switching the shutter 358 to the position for distributing game balls to the discharge area 357 is performed. Then, in step S1511, processing for subtracting 1 from the distribution counter HC is performed, and then the V distribution setting processing ends.

As described above, in the V distribution setting process, control is performed to switch the position of the shutter 358 at uniform timing regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. In this case, after 1.0 sec from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode, it is switched to the V winning area 356 side, and after this state is maintained for 3.0 sec, it is switched to the discharge area 357 side. That is, when a game ball wins in the second variable prize winning device 32B between 1.0 sec and 4.0 sec after the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball is distributed to the V prize area 356 side. .

In this case, as already explained, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result and the disadvantageous special losing result, the waiting time for opening from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the opening of the second variable winning device 32B is 0.00. 5 sec is set. After the waiting time for the opening has passed, if the result is an advantageous special loss, the second variable winning device 32B is opened with the upper limit opening time of 30.0 sec, and if the result is a disadvantageous special loss, 0.3 sec. The second variable winning device 32B is kept open until the time elapses. In other words, if it is an advantageous special loss result, the period from 0.5 sec to 30.5 sec after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is set as a period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in an open state, and even if it is a disadvantageous special loss result. For example, the period from 0.5 sec to 0.8 sec after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is set as the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state.

In other words, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32B during the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result reaches the shutter 358 at the timing when the shutter 358 is arranged at the position to distribute to the V winning area 356 side. As a result, the game ball is distributed to the V winning area 356 side. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second variable prize winning device 32B during the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the disadvantageous special loss reaches the shutter 358 at the timing when the shutter 358 is arranged at the position to distribute to the discharge area 357 side. As a result, the game ball is distributed to the discharge area 357 side. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result, the period in which the open state is maintained is a period shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec). 32B wins are less likely to occur.

Then, the V winning flag is stored based on passing through the V winning area 356 during the opening and closing execution mode of one round based on the result of the special loss, and the V winning flag is then rewritten to the V winning flag. After the run mode, a new open and close run mode is started. In the new opening/closing execution mode, "16" is input to the first round counter RC1 in step S1006, and 16 round games are played on the first variable winning device 32A side, and a large number of game balls are played. It is possible to cause the first variable winning device 32A to win. On the other hand, if the V winning area 356 cannot be passed during the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss, the opening/closing execution mode is terminated as it is, and a new opening/closing execution mode is not started thereafter.

As described above, there is a large difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special disadvantage loss result. Therefore, it is considered that the player desires the execution of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result.

As already explained, in the right or wrong determination process on the first special figure side, the probability that the result will be a disadvantageous special deviation is set higher than the probability that the result will be an advantageous special deviation, and almost every time the judgment is disadvantageous The success/failure table is set so that the special loss result is established. In addition, in the right or wrong determination process on the second special figure side, the probability that the result will be an advantageous special deviation is set higher than the probability that the result will be a disadvantageous special deviation. The success/failure table is set so that Therefore, it can be said that the success/failure determination on the second special figure side is set to be more advantageous for the player than the success/failure determination on the first special figure side.

However, in order to perform the win-or-fail judgment on the second special figure side, it is necessary to win the game ball to the second operation opening 34, and the second operation opening 34 causes the winning to the first operation opening 33 Winning is permitted based on the winning through the different through gates 35 . In other words, in order to make the second working port 34 win, it is necessary to make the first working port 33 win, and if the first working port 33 does not win, the second working port 34 will not win. can't

In addition, in the electronic support process, the electric accessory 34a is set to be in an open state 0.3 sec after the through gate 35 is won. Then, the open state is set to be maintained for 1.5 seconds. In other words, the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs from 0.3 sec to 1.8 sec after the occurrence of a specific event that causes the winning of the through gate 35, that is, the winning of the first operating port 33. is set as a possible period. Then, as will be described later, the game round on the side of the first special figure based on the winning to the first operation port 33 is set so that the variable display time is longer than this 1.8 sec.

In other words, the timing at which the winning to the second operation port 34 can occur is the timing at which the first special figure side game round is being performed, and other than the first special figure side game round being executed, the second Winning to the second operation port 34 does not occur. As described above, in the right or wrong determination process on the first special figure side, almost every time, the unfavorable special out result is established, and the opening and closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special out result is executed. Winning to the second operation port 34 occurs during execution, and the winning/failure determination processing on the side of the second special figure is performed. And, as described above, in the propriety determination process on the side of the second special figure, the result of the special advantage is established almost every time.

Here, in the first game round control process and the second game round control process, when the special loss result is established in both lottery systems, the special loss result of the side whose fluctuation display time has passed first is given priority. It is configured to Therefore, if the game round on the first special figure side ends first, the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result that is established almost every time is implemented, and the game round on the second special figure side comes first. If it ends, the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result, which is established almost every time, will be executed. In other words, depending on the relationship between the variable display time set in the game round on the first special figure side and the variable display time set in the game round on the second special figure side, opening and closing based on the result of any lottery system It changes whether the run mode is enforced.

<Processing for setting variable display time>
Hereinafter, the variable display time setting process performed in the first game round control process and the second game round control process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. The first variable display time setting process (FIG. 27) performed in the first game round control process and the second variable display time setting process (FIG. 28) carried out in the second game round control process. Since the processing configurations are basically the same, these will be collectively described. Further, when explaining the process of setting each variation display time, the variation table time table shown in FIG. 29 will also be referred to.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in step S1601 (step S1701), a process of grasping the corresponding game counter is executed. That is, the first special figure side grasps the first game counter, and the second special figure side executes the process of grasping the second game counter. As already explained, the first game round counter is a counter that is incremented by one each time the first special figure side game round is executed (step S618), and the opening/closing execution mode (16R or 8R This is a counter that is reset at the end of the open/close execution mode). In addition, the second game round counter is a counter that is incremented by one each time the second special figure side game round is executed (step S918), and is a counter that is reset at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning flag. is.

After execution of step S1601 (step S1701), processing for acquiring the corresponding variable display time table is executed in step S1602 (step S1702). That is, the first special figure side acquires the first variable display time table, and the second special figure side acquires the second variable display time table. The first variable display time table and the second variable display time table are stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 .

As shown in FIG. 29, the first variable display time table and the second variable display time table include the value of the corresponding game round counter, the value of the variable type counter CS among the pending information about the game round to be started this time, The variable display time is defined based on

In the first variation display time table on the first special figure side, the variation display time of the game round on the first special figure side is the first short variation variation display time of 10.0 sec, and the first variation display time of 30.0 sec. A variable display time of long variation is set. That is, if the first long fluctuation fluctuation display time is selected, the game round on the first special figure side ends later than the first short fluctuation fluctuation display time is selected, and the second special Depending on the relationship with the game round on the figure side, the game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end first.

If the value of the first game round counter is in the range of 1 to 100, that is, after resetting the first game round counter, in the first to 100th game rounds on the side of the first special figure, the first short fluctuation is more likely to be selected than the first length variation, the value of the variation type counter CSA is assigned. Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CSA is 0 to 99 and 101 to 199, the first short variation is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CSA is 100, the first long variation is selected. That is, there is a 199/200 probability that the first short variation will be selected, and a 1/200 probability that the first long variation will be selected.

If the value of the first game round counter is in the range of 101 to 110, that is, after resetting the first game round counter, in the first special figure side game round of the 101st to 110th times, the above 1 to 100 The value of the variation type counter CSA is assigned so that the first length variation is more likely to be selected than in the case of the first length variation. Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CSA is 0 to 90 and 101 to 199, the first short variation is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CSA is 91 to 100, the first long variation is selected. be. That is, there is a 190/200 probability that the first short variation will be selected, and a 10/200 probability that the first long variation will be selected.

After that, when the value of the first game counter is in the range of 111 to 200, 211 to 300, 311 to 400, and 411 to 500, that is, after resetting the first game counter, the 111th time From the 200th, 211st to 300th, 311st to 400th, 411st to 500th game rounds on the 1st special figure side, the first short fluctuation and the first with the same probability as the 1st to 100th It is set so that long variation is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the first game counter is in the range of 201-210, 301-310, or 401-410, that is, after resetting the first game counter, the 201st to 210th and 301st From the 310th time, from the 401st time to the 410th game time of the first special figure side, the first short variation and the first long variation are set to be selected with the same probability as the 101st time to the 110th time. there is

Then, after the value of the first game round counter is 501, that is, after resetting the first game round counter, in the first special figure side game round after the 501st round, the first length fluctuation is displayed with a probability of 100%. Time is set to be selected.

That is, in the first fluctuation display time table on the first special figure side, the first short fluctuation is almost selected, and the first zone of the number of lotteries (1st to 100th, 111st to 200th, 211st to 300th, 311st to 400th, 411st to 500th), and a second zone (101st to 110th, 201st time to 210th time, 301st time to 310th time, 401st time to 410th time), a third zone is set in which the first length variation is more likely to be selected than the second zone. In other words, in the game round on the first special figure side, if it is the number of lotteries in the first zone, the fluctuation display time of the first short fluctuation is easily set, and the first in relation to the game round on the second special figure side The game round on the special figure side tends to end earlier. Also, in the game round of the first special figure side, if the number of lotteries of the second zone, the fluctuation display time of the first long fluctuation is more likely to be selected than the first zone, so the game of the second special figure side The game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end earlier than the first zone in relation to the round. Then, in the game round on the first special figure side, if the number of lotteries in the third zone is selected, the fluctuation display time of almost the first long fluctuation is selected, so in relation to the game round on the second special figure side The game round on the second special figure side tends to end earlier.

In the second fluctuation display time table on the second special diagram side, the fluctuation display time of the game round on the second special diagram side is the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time of 5.0 sec, and the second fluctuation display time of 20.0 sec. A variable display time of long variation is set. That is, if the second short fluctuation fluctuation display time is selected, the second special figure side game round ends earlier than the second long fluctuation fluctuation display time is selected, and the first special Depending on the relationship with the game round on the figure side, the game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end first.

If the value of the second game round counter is in the range of 1 to 100, that is, after resetting the second game round counter, in the first to 100th second special figure side game rounds, the second length variation is more likely to be selected than the second short fluctuation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CSB is assigned. Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CSB is 0 to 198, the second long variation is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CSB is 199, the second short variation is selected. That is, there is a 199/200 probability that the second long variation will be selected, and a 1/200 probability that the second short variation will be selected.

If the value of the second game round counter is in the range of 101 to 110, that is, after resetting the second game round counter, in the 101st to 110th second special figure side game rounds, the above 1 to 100 The value of the fluctuation type counter CSB is allocated so that the second short fluctuation is more likely to be selected than in the case of the case. Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CSB is 0-190, the second long variation is selected, and when the value of the variation type counter CSB is 191-199, the second short variation is selected. That is, there is a 190/200 probability that the second long variation will be selected, and a 10/200 probability that the second short variation will be selected.

After that, when the value of the second game counter is in the range of 111 to 200, 211 to 300, 311 to 400, and 411 to 500, that is, after resetting the second game counter, the 111th time From the 200th, 211st to 300th, 311st to 400th, 411st to 500th second special figure side game round, the second long fluctuation and the second with the same probability as the 1st to 100th It is set so that a short fluctuation is selected. On the other hand, when the value of the second game counter is in the range of 201 to 210, 301 to 310, and 401 to 410, that is, after resetting the second game counter, the 201st to 210th and 301st From the 310th time, from the 401st time to the 410th time, the second special figure side game time is set so that the second long variation and the second short variation are selected with the same probability as the 101st time to the 110th time. there is

Then, the value of the second game round counter is 501 or later, that is, after resetting the second game round counter, in the second special figure side game round after the 501st round, the second short fluctuation fluctuation display with a probability of 100% Time is set to be selected.

That is, in the second fluctuation display time table on the second special figure side, the second long fluctuation is almost selected, and the second short fluctuation is unlikely to be selected. 200th, 211st to 300th, 311st to 400th, 411st to 500th), and a second zone (101st to 110th, 201st time to 210th time, 301st time to 310th time, 401st time to 410th time), a third zone is set in which the second short fluctuation is more likely to be selected than the second zone. In other words, in the game round on the second special figure side, if it is the number of lotteries in the first zone, it is easy to set the fluctuation display time of the second long fluctuation, and the first in relation to the game round on the first special figure side The game round on the special figure side tends to end earlier. In addition, in the game round of the second special figure side, if the number of lotteries of the second zone, the fluctuation display time of the second short fluctuation is more likely to be selected than the first zone, so the game of the first special figure side The game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end earlier than the first zone in relation to the round. Then, in the game round on the second special figure side, if the number of lotteries in the third zone is selected, the fluctuation display time of the second short fluctuation is selected, so in relation to the game round on the first special figure side The game round on the second special figure side tends to end earlier.

In this embodiment, the first to third zones on the first special figure side and the first to third zones on the second special figure side are set to overlap, more specifically, The value of the first game counter set in the first to third zones on the first special figure side, and the second game counter set in the first to third zones on the second special figure side is set to be the same as the value of Therefore, in the first zone, the game round on the side of the first special figure tends to end first due to the variable display time of both special symbols, and in the second zone, the second due to the variable display time of both special symbols. The game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end earlier than the first zone, and in the third zone, the game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end earlier due to the fluctuation display time of both special figures. Become. By doing so, in the first zone, it becomes easier to implement the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result on the side of the first special figure, and in the second zone, compared with the first zone, the second special The opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result on the drawing side is easily implemented, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result on the second special figure side is easily implemented in the third zone.

Here, the first game counter is a counter for grasping the number of lotteries on the side of the first special figure, and the second game counter is a counter for grasping the number of times of lottery on the side of the second special figure. Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of lotteries on the side of the first special figure and the number of times of lottery on the side of the second special figure are configured to be grasped separately. By doing this, while ensuring the independence of multiple lottery systems, both lottery systems, such as when only the lottery on the side of the first special figure is implemented and the lottery on the side of the second special figure is not carried out, for example Even if there is a deviation in the number of times of lottery, it is possible to allow it.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, in order to receive the lottery of the second special figure side, it is a condition that the lottery of the first special figure side is performed, so the second game counter is added The case of being added means that the first game counter has been incremented slightly earlier. Therefore, basically, the second game counter and the first game counter have the same value.

On the other hand, in order to receive the lottery on the side of the first special symbol, there is no need to receive the lottery on the side of the second special symbol, and it is conceivable that a game in which only the lottery on the side of the first special symbol is performed is performed. However, as shown in the distribution table of FIG. 10, the distribution table on the side of the second special figure is more advantageous for the player than the distribution table on the side of the first special figure. Also, by opening the electric accessory 34a, it becomes possible to easily win a prize to the second operation port 34, and five prize balls are paid out based on the prize. Incidentally, when a game ball is shot aiming at the second operation opening 34 in a situation where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game ball enters the second operation opening 34 with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, when the electric accessary 34a is in the open state, it is better for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second operation opening 34 (about 3 more) without considering the winning lottery. Become. Therefore, it is conceivable that, normally, the player will make the lottery on the side of the second special figure to be carried out following the lottery on the side of the first special figure in order to receive the above-mentioned advantageous distribution. With such a configuration, even if the same value is assigned to the first to third zones in the variable display time tables of both lottery systems, no inconvenience will occur, and a special failure result as designed by the designer will occur. becomes possible.

<How the game progresses>
Next, how the game progresses in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. FIG. 30 shows an overview of the games mainly performed in the first zone, and FIGS. 31 and 32 show the games performed exceptionally in the first zone and the It shows an overview of games that are easier to implement.

At the timing of ta1, assuming that the through gate 35 has won a prize, the support lottery is carried out, and the fluctuation display (normal pattern fluctuation) on the normal pattern display unit 38 is started from the timing of ta1. As already explained, this variable display ends in a relatively short time of 0.3 sec, and the electric accessory 34a is opened at the timing of ta3. The open state is maintained for 1.5 seconds, and the electric accessory 34a is closed at the timing of ta5.

At the timing of ta2, which is immediately after winning the through gate 35 at the timing of ta1, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 enters the first operating port 33. Then, at the timing of ta2, the win/loss determination process on the side of the first special figure is executed, and the game turn on the side of the first special figure is started. The figure shows a case where the variable display time of the first short variation is selected as the variable display time of this game cycle.

It is assumed that the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs at the timing of ta4 when the first special figure side game round is being executed and the electric accessary 34a is in the open state. In this case, at the timing of ta4, the second special figure side success/failure determination process is performed, and the second special figure side game turn is started. The figure shows a case where the variable display time of the second long variation is selected as the variable display time of the game round.

In the situation where the game rounds of both special symbols are performed in parallel as described above, the first special symbol side has a short variation fluctuation display time, and the second special symbol side has a long fluctuation fluctuation display time. It is The first special figure side game round has a variable display time set to 0 at the timing of ta6, and the second special figure side game round has a variable display time set to 0 at the timing ta10 later than ta6. It is In this case, the variable display time on the first special figure side becomes 0 first, and at the timing of ta6, the game round on the first special figure side ends, and the game round on the second special figure side becomes the first special figure. Based on the end of the game cycle shown in the figure (based on the start of the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result), it is forcibly terminated at the same ta6 timing.

Assuming that the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result on the side of the first special figure is started at the timing of ta6, the second variable winning device 32B is opened from the timing of ta6 to the timing of ta7. Although the second variable winning device 32B is actually opened after the waiting time for the opening has elapsed from the timing of ta6, it is shown as the same timing for the convenience of the drawing.

The shutter 358 as a distribution member in the second variable winning device 32B moves to the V winning area 356 at the timing of ta8, which is after a predetermined period T (1.0 sec) has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes a mode of V distribution in which game balls are distributed. This V allocation mode is maintained until the timing of ta9. However, since the period from ta6 to ta7 in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the timing from ta8 to ta9 in which the shutter 358 is in the V allocation mode do not overlap, during the opening and closing execution mode In , passage through the V winning area 356 is unlikely to occur.

As described above, in the first zone, basically short variation is selected in the game round on the side of the first special figure, and long variation is selected in the game round on the side of the second special figure, The opening and closing execution mode is executed based on the disadvantageous special loss result which is established almost every time in the winning/failure determination on the side of the first special figure after the game round on the side of the first special figure ends first.

Here, also in the first zone, with a relatively low probability, a long variation is selected in the game round on the side of the first special figure, and a short variation is selected in the game round on the side of the second special figure.

In FIG. 31, from tb1 to tb4, there is shown a case where the through gate 35, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are won at the same timing as ta1 to ta4 in FIG. However, the game round on the side of the first special figure that starts at the timing of tb3 is the first short variation, and the game round on the side of the second special figure that starts at the timing of tb4 is the second short variation. is shown. In this case, the variable display time that becomes 0 at the timing of tb8 is set in the game round on the first special figure side, and the variable display time that becomes 0 at the timing of tb6 earlier than tb8 in the game round on the second special figure side set.

Then, the variable display time on the second special figure side becomes 0 first, and at the timing of tb6, the game round on the second special figure side ends, and the game round on the first special figure side becomes the second special figure. Based on the end of the game round on the side (based on the start of the opening and closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result), it is forcibly ended at the same timing tb6.

Assuming that the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result on the side of the second special figure is started at the timing of tb6, the second variable winning device 32B is opened from the timing of tb6 to the timing of tb10. It should be noted that the second variable winning device 32B is actually opened after the waiting time for the opening has elapsed from the timing of tb6, as in the case of FIG.

The shutter 358 as a distribution member in the second variable winning device 32B distributes the game ball to the V winning area 356 at the timing of tb7, which is after the predetermined period T has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes a mode of distribution. This V distribution mode is maintained until the timing of tb9. Since the period from tb6 to tb10 in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the timing from tb7 to tb9 in which the shutter 358 is in the V allocation mode overlap, V Passing through the winning area 356 is likely to occur. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is further executed for 16 rounds.

In FIG. 32, from tc1 to tc4, there is shown a case where the through gate 35, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are won at the same timing as ta1 to ta4 in FIG. However, the game round on the side of the first special figure started at the timing of tc3 is the first length fluctuation, and the game round on the side of the second special figure started at the timing of tc4 is the second length fluctuation. is shown. In this case, the variable display time that becomes 0 at the timing of tc9 is set in the game round on the first special figure side, and the variable display time that becomes 0 at the timing of tc6 earlier than tc9 in the game round on the second special figure side set.

Then, the variable display time on the second special figure side becomes 0 first, and at the timing of tc6, the game round on the second special figure side ends, and the game round on the first special figure side becomes the second special figure. Based on the end of the game round on the side (based on the start of the opening and closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result), it is forcibly ended at the same timing of tc6.

Assuming that the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result on the side of the second special figure is started at the timing of tc6, the second variable winning device 32B is opened from the timing of tc6 to the timing of tc10. It should be noted that the second variable winning device 32B is actually opened after the waiting time for opening has elapsed from the timing of tc6, as in the case of FIGS. 30 and 31.

The shutter 358 as a distribution member in the second variable winning device 32B distributes the game ball to the V winning area 356 at the timing of tc7, which is after the predetermined period T has elapsed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes a mode of allocation. This V distribution mode is maintained until the timing of tc8. Since the period from tc6 to tc10 in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the timing from tc7 to tc8 in which the shutter 358 is in the V allocation mode overlap, V Passing through the winning area 356 is likely to occur. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode is further executed for 16 rounds.

As described above, even in the first zone, if the first long variation is selected in the game round on the first special figure side, or if the second short variation is selected in the game round on the second special figure side , The game round on the second special figure side can end first. As such, an opening and closing execution mode based on the favorable extra loss result may be implemented. Therefore, even if it is the first zone, it is not impossible to expect the result of the special advantage loss, and it is possible to draw attention to the variable display time set for each game round in the first zone. Become.

Then, in the first zone, while waiting for the game round of the first long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation that occur with a relatively low probability as described above, when moving to the second zone, on the first special figure side The first long variation is likely to be selected, and the second short variation is likely to be selected on the second special figure side. In this case, when the first length variation is selected on the first special figure side (the second length variation is selected on the second special figure side), the situation shown in FIG. mode is implemented. Also, when the second short variation is selected on the second special figure side (the first short variation is selected on the first special figure side), the situation shown in FIG. The open/close execution mode based on the Even if the first long variation is selected on the first special figure side and the second short variation is selected on the second special figure side, the game round on the second special figure side ends first, An opening and closing execution mode is implemented based on the favorable extra loss result. This is also common in the third zone.

In particular, when it comes to the third zone, the first long variation is selected with a probability of 100% on the first special figure side, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 100% on the second special figure side. Therefore, if the lotteries of both lottery systems are passed up to the third zone, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage/special loss result is executed, and the third zone can function as a so-called ceiling.

As described above, the possibility of executing the advantageous special loss result changes in the first zone, the second zone, and the third zone. In this case, the probability of an advantage-special loss result in the success/failure determination process does not change, but only the selected variable display time changes. In this way, it is possible to change the state in which it is easy to give a privilege to a player and the state in which it is difficult to give a privilege to a player without changing the probability of the win-or-fail judgment processing, so that the degree of freedom of the game is improved and the novelty of the game. can be suitably realized.

Furthermore, in the right or wrong determination process on the first special figure side, although basically the disadvantageous special deviation result is established almost every time, the advantageous special deviation result is also established with a relatively low probability. In this case, even if it is a basic pattern in which the first special figure side game cycle ends first as described above, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special losing result is executed instead of the disadvantageous special losing result. . In addition, in the success/failure determination process on the first special figure side and the success/failure determination process on the second special figure side, if a big hit results, the player gets a privilege regardless of the result of the other success/failure determination process and the length of the variable display time. becomes possible. In this way, not only the length of the variable display time, but also the provision of various patterns of awarding, the game can be diversified, and the degree of attention to the game can be preferably maintained.

On the other hand, in the right or wrong determination process on the side of the second special figure, basically, although the advantageous special deviation result is established almost every time, the disadvantageous special deviation result is also established with a relatively low probability. In this case, even if the second special figure side game cycle ends first, the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is executed instead of the advantageous special loss result. Therefore, even if the game cycle on the second special figure side ends first, the privilege is not given uniformly, and this also contributes to guaranteeing the degree of attention to the game.

Combinations and probabilities of giving substantial benefits to the player will be described in relation to both variable display times.

The probability that the combination of the first short and second long fluctuation display times in the first zone is selected is the product of 199/200 and 199/200, which is 39601/40000 (approximately 99% ). On the other hand, the probability of selecting the combination of the first short and second short fluctuation display times and the combination of the first long and second long fluctuation display times in the first zone is 200/200. 199 multiplied by 1 in 200, each with a probability of 199 in 40000 (approximately 0.5%). Then, the probability that the combination of the first long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation display time is selected in the first zone is the product of 1/200 and 1/200, which is a probability of 1/40000. is. That is, in the first zone, about 99% of the first special figure side game round ends first, and about 1% of the second special figure side game round ends first. As already explained, the result of the hit or miss judgment on the side of the first special figure is almost a special disadvantageous result, and the result of the hit or miss judgment on the side of the second special figure is almost a special disadvantageous result. It can be said that the open/close execution mode is executed based on the result of the disconnection.

The probability that the combination of the first short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation display time in the second zone is selected is the product of 190/200 and 190/200, which is 36100/40000 (approximately 90% ). On the other hand, the probability of selecting the combination of the first short and second short fluctuation display times and the combination of the first long and second long fluctuation display times in the second zone is 200/200. 190 multiplied by 10 in 200, each with a probability of 1900 in 40000 (approximately 5%). Then, the probability that the combination of the first long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation display time is selected in the second zone is the product of 10/200 and 10/200, which is a probability of 100/40000. is. That is, in the second zone, about 90% of the first special figure side game rounds end first, and about 10% of the second special figure side game rounds end first. Then, compared with the first zone, the probability that the game round on the second special figure side ends first is about 10 times.

Here, in the present embodiment, the pattern of the variable display time in which the game round of the second special figure ends earlier than the game round of the first special figure is defined as the variable display time of the first special figure. A pattern in which the first long fluctuation is selected as a pattern and a pattern in which the second short fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side are provided. Therefore, as described above, even if the game round on the side of the second special figure ends first in the same way, the patterns of combinations are diversified.

Furthermore, as a result of the judgment on the side of the first special figure, although it is almost a disadvantageous special out result, there are cases where it becomes an advantageous special out result, a case where it becomes a jackpot result, and a case where it becomes a normal out result. Then, as in the first zone, even if the game round on the side of the first special figure ends first, if the result of the judgment on the side of the first special figure is the advantageous special outlier result The opening and closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special advantageous loss, and if the result is a normal loss, the game round on the side of the second special figure is forcibly terminated even if the game round on the side of the first special figure ends first. As a result, the opening and closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result on the side of the second special figure is executed. Further, if the game result on the side of the first special figure is a jackpot result, the game round on the side of the second special figure is not started even if the winning to the second operation port 34 occurs.

On the other hand, as a result of the judgment on the second special figure side, although it is almost an advantageous special out result, there are cases where it becomes a disadvantageous special out result, a case where it becomes a jackpot result, and a case where it becomes a normal out result. Then, even if the game round on the side of the second special figure ends earlier than the game round on the side of the first special figure, the result of the right or wrong judgment on the side of the second special figure is a disadvantageous special out. If it is a result, the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result will be implemented, and if it is a normal loss result, the game round on the first special figure side will not be forcibly terminated, and as a result, the second The opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special out result on the side of 1 special figure is implemented.

As described above, in this embodiment, by utilizing the relationship between the length of the variable display time between the first special figure side game round and the second special figure side game round, the game result of either game round is reflected. The length of the variable display time is determined according to the variable display time table and each game round without changing the probability of winning or losing each game round as the probability of awarding the privilege. Innovative playability such as changing with a counter is realized. Not only that, the result of the winning lottery is varied, and even if the game round ends first and the game result is reflected, there is a pattern in which no benefits are given, and a pattern in which the game round ends first. Even if the game results are not reflected in the game for some reason, it is possible to generate a pattern in which a privilege is awarded, thereby greatly diversifying the game.

<Variation display processing on the effect control device 82 side>
Next, the outline of the variable display process executed by the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display process is a process for performing variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. FIG. In addition, please refer description of other embodiment about the detailed structure by the side of the production|presentation control apparatus 82. FIG.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the first special figure side game round and the second special figure side game round are performed in an overlapping manner. Each game round is performed separately in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS in the main display unit 37, and the first special figure display area GA and the second special figure display area GA in the display screen G It is performed separately in the graphic display area GB. That is, the change display of the first special figure display area GA on the display screen G is linked (matched) with the change display of the first special figure display area AS in the main display section 37, and the change of the second special figure display area GB The display is linked (matched) with the variable display of the second special figure display section BS. On the other hand, the variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the timing of the variable display corresponding to the game round of the first special figure and the timing of the variable display of the second special figure side, respectively. is set to That is, the variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is a variable display corresponding to either the first special figure side game round or the second special figure side game round.

Then, in this variable display process, when the start information (variation command) of the game round on the side of the first special figure or the game round on the side of the second special figure (variation command) is received from the main control device 81 side, each symbol row When the variable display of Z1 to Z3 is started, and when start information of a new game cycle is received during execution of the variable display, the game cycle of the variable display being executed and the game cycle corresponding to the received start information are displayed. is compared to determine whether to continue the variable display being executed or to switch to the variable display of the game cycle corresponding to the received start information. Finally, control is performed so that the variable display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in time with the end timing of the game cycle on the main display section 37 of the main controller 81 side. Incidentally, the variable display in the first special figure display area GA and the variable display in the second special figure display area GB are processes that are started separately from this variable display process (processing for the first special figure display area GA and second special figure display area GB), control of the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS by the first game round control processing and the second game round control processing on the main control device 81 side Similar control is performed.

More specifically, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a command for variation has been received from the main controller 81 side. If the command for variation has not been received, it is assumed that it is not the start timing or switching timing of the variation display, and this processing for variation display ends. On the other hand, if the command for variation has been received, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the variation display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is being executed. If it is not being executed, then in step S1803 the processing for starting the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is executed, and then the variable display processing is terminated. In step S1803, the received variation command is analyzed and the type command received at the same time is analyzed, and display control is performed so that the variation display corresponding to the game result of the current game round and the variation display time is started. Control device 212 .

It should be noted that the variation command is received in step S1801, and the case of negative determination in step S1802 means that it is the start timing of the game round on the first special figure side, variation to start in step S1803 The display corresponds to the variable display of the game times on the side of the first special figure.

In step S1802, when the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is being executed, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the command for variation received this time corresponds to the big win result. It should be noted that if the affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the command for variation corresponding to the second special figure side game round is executed while executing the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 as the first special figure side game round. when received. As already explained, if it is a jackpot result in the first special figure side game round, the second special figure side game round is not started. This is the case where the second special figure side game round is started during execution of the resulting first special figure side game round.

When the negative determination is made in step S1804, that is, when the game round on the side of the first special figure and the game round on the side of the second special figure, which are the result of deviation, overlap, the fluctuation display time grasping process is executed in step S1805. . In step S1805, a process of grasping the remaining variation display time of the game round of the first special figure side under execution and the variation display time of the game round of the second special figure side received this time is performed. Then, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not the game round being executed will end first. That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining variation display time of the first special figure side game round is shorter than the variation display time of the second special figure side game round received this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, the variation display processing is terminated as it is without switching the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 according to the variation command received this time.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be a jackpot result in step S1804, or if it is determined that the game round on the second special figure side ends first in step S1806, fluctuation rewrite processing is executed in step S1807 , the variable display processing is terminated. In the variable rewriting process, the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 being executed are rewritten from those on the first special figure side to those on the second special figure side.

As already described, in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win is executed as a result of the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, odd symbols are placed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Stop the combination to end the variable display. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss is executed, the combination of the even-numbered symbols on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 is stopped, and the variable display is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a normal out result or a disadvantageous special out result, the variable display is terminated without stopping the combination of the same symbols. That is, in steps S1803 and S1807, a process of setting a stop result corresponding to the result of the game round to be started or rewritten as the final stop result is performed.

In steps S1803 and S1807, along with the stop result of the variable display to be started/rewritten, the effect pattern of the variable display is also determined.

Here, a detailed description will be given of the variable display mode of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, first, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern is displayed. After that, the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display that allows the player to recognize or easily recognize the displayed symbols. Then, when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Then, when the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display and the open/close execution mode occurs, the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are attached. is stop-displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended.

In the present embodiment, when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs and the electric accessory 34a is opened, and the open state is maintained, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are maintained in a state of high-speed fluctuation display. The variable display pattern is set as follows. That is, after the first operation opening 33 is won and the first special figure side game round is started, the electric accessary 34a is opened and the second operation opening 34 can be won. Under the circumstances, the fast-changing display of all symbol rows Z1-Z3 is maintained. As a result, when the second special figure side game turn is started while the first special figure side variation display is being executed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has already stopped. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience such as being unable to rewrite to the stop result corresponding to the game result on the second special figure side by staying.

More specifically, the period from the start of the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the stop of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is predetermined, and more specifically, the variable display. The upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped after about 3.0 seconds from the start of the game. In other words, after the first special figure side game round is started, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 at a timing later than the latest timing (1.8 sec later) at which the second special figure side game round can be started. is configured to stop. By doing so, after receiving the command for variation on the second special figure side, when changing the production pattern of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the case where the reach display occurs and the case where the reach display does not occur can be changed easily.

Regarding the relationship between the game result of each game round and the variable display process, a table showing the relationship between each game round and the opening/closing execution mode to be executed in FIG. will be described with reference to.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, for example, if the game result of the game round on the side of the first special figure is a disadvantageous special loss result, if the fluctuation display time is the first short fluctuation, basically the first special The game cycle shown in the drawing ends first, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is executed. Therefore, as the effect pattern of the game round to be started in the fluctuation start process of step S1803, the effect pattern corresponding to the non-occurrence of reach, in which the reach line is not formed by the upper and lower pattern rows Z1 and Z3, is set. In this case, the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), the game round on the second special figure side is not a big hit result, and if the fluctuation display time is the second long fluctuation, An affirmative determination is made in step S1806, and the same symbols are aligned in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and as a result of the stoppage resulting in a loose pattern that does not stop, the game round presentation ends. The effect continuation time of the game round implemented in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the display screen G is the same length as the fluctuation display time on the side of the first special figure, and is the fluctuation display time of the first short fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the game result of the game round of the first special figure side is a disadvantageous special loss result and the fluctuation display time is the first short fluctuation, the fluctuation display time of the game round of the second special figure side is the second short fluctuation, the game round on the side of the second special figure can end first, so the game result on the side of the second special figure can be reflected. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S1806, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is performed. If the game result on the side of the second special figure is an advantageous special loss result, in the fluctuation rewriting process, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 form a reach line of even numbered symbols, and the same symbol as that forming the same reach line. The performance pattern is rewritten so that the pattern is stopped on the ready-to-reach line of the middle pattern row Z2. On the other hand, if the game result on the side of the second special figure is a disadvantageous special loss result or a normal loss result, in the fluctuation rewriting process, the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 form a reach line with an even number of symbols, and the same reach line. The performance pattern is rewritten so that a pattern different from the pattern forming the . That is, the effect pattern is rewritten so that the ready-to-win display corresponding to the game result on the side of the second special figure is performed after receiving the command for variation on the side of the second special figure. However, if the game result on the second special figure side is a normal result, the game round on the second special figure side may end earlier, but the opening and closing execution mode based on the game round on the first special figure side is Since it will be implemented, the production pattern is rewritten so that the out reach display after receiving the variation command on the second special figure side ends at the end timing of the game round on the first special figure side. will be When the game round on the second special figure side is a jackpot result, in the fluctuation rewriting process of step S1807, the reach line is formed by the odd number pattern, and the same pattern as the pattern forming the same reach line is the reach of the medium pattern row Z2. The performance pattern is rewritten so as to stop at the line. When the opening and closing execution mode on the second special figure side is carried out, the duration of the game round performance carried out in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G is longer than the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side. Shorter, the total length of the time from the start timing of the game round on the first special figure side to the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side and the fluctuation display time of the second short fluctuation on the second special figure side It will be In other words, the effect duration time of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shorter than originally planned. If the game result on the side of the second special figure is the result of being out of normal, the effect duration of the game round executed in each pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G is the same as the variable display time on the side of the first special figure. length, which is the variation display time of the first short variation.

The relationship between the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure and the effect duration time of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the same below. ~Z3 effect duration time is the same length as the variable display time on the first special figure side, and when the effect rewriting process is carried out, from the start timing of the game round on the first special figure side to the second special figure side It is the total length of the time until the start timing of the game round and the fluctuation display time of the second short fluctuation on the second special figure side.

When the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a disadvantageous special loss result, and when the fluctuation display time is the first long fluctuation, regardless of the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side, The game round on the second special figure side can end earlier. Therefore, as the effect pattern of the game round to be started in the variation start process of step S1803, the effect pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the reach line in which the even-numbered symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 form the reach line is set. Here, it is set so that the symbols different from the symbols forming the reach lines stop on the reach lines of the medium symbol row Z2. Then, the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), and if the game round on the second special figure side is not a big hit result, step A negative determination is made in S1806, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is performed. If the game result on the side of the second special figure is the result of an advantage special loss, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2, and the performance pattern on the side of the second special figure is rewritten. If the game result is a disadvantageous special loss result or a normal loss result, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same pattern as the pattern forming the reach line is not stopped on the reach line of the middle pattern row Z2. In this case, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are selected in accordance with the performance duration.

When the game result of the first special figure side game round is a disadvantageous special loss result, and when the fluctuation display time is the first long fluctuation, when the second special figure side game round is a jackpot result , an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is performed. In this case, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the ready-to-win line is formed by not even-numbered symbols but by odd-numbered symbols, and the performance pattern is rewritten so that the odd-numbered symbols stop on the ready-to-win line of the middle symbol row Z2.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an advantageous special loss result, basically if the fluctuation display time is the first short fluctuation, the game round on the first special figure side ends first, The open/close execution mode based on the special advantage loss result is implemented. Therefore, as the effect pattern of the game cycle to be started in the fluctuation start process of step S1803, the effect pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the reach line formed by the even-numbered symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. Here, it is set so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the medium symbol row Z2. Then, the game round on the side of the second special figure is started (step S1802: YES), and if the game round on the side of the second special figure is not a big hit result, or if it is a second long fluctuation even if it is an off result In this case, since the variable rewriting process is not performed, the ready-to-win display by the even-numbered symbols is performed as it is. On the other hand, when the game round on the second special figure side is a jackpot result, the symbol forming the reach line is rewritten from the even numbered symbol to the odd numbered symbol by the variable rewriting process. Also, if the second special figure side game round is a result of being out and is the second short variation, the variation rewriting process rewrites the effect pattern according to the second special figure side game result. That is, if the second special figure side is an advantage special loss result, the end timing of the game round on the second special figure side so that the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped in accordance with the end timing of the game round on the second special figure side By forming a reach line in the upper and lower pattern rows Z1 and Z3 by the even-numbered symbols stopped in the middle pattern row Z2, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbols as the symbols forming the same reach line stop in the middle symbol row Z2. . In addition, if the second special symbol side is a disadvantageous special loss result, a pattern different from the symbol forming the reach line of the stop symbol of the medium symbol row Z2 stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. rewrite. Then, if the second special figure side is the normal deviation result, although the production pattern is rewritten, the production continuation time and stop result by each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are not changed, so that a predetermined character appears. Rewrite the performance pattern. That is, in this case, although the game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the first special figure side, the game result on the first special figure side is reflected, and This is the case where the stop result set at the start of the game turn on the first special figure side is used as it is.

When the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an advantageous special loss result, and when the fluctuation display time is the first long fluctuation, regardless of the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side, The game round on the second special figure side can end earlier. Therefore, as the effect pattern of the game cycle to be started in the fluctuation start process of step S1803, the effect pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the reach line formed by the even-numbered symbols of the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. Here, it is set so that the symbols different from the symbols forming the reach lines stop on the reach lines of the medium symbol row Z2. Then, the game round on the second special figure side is started (step S1802: YES), and if the game round on the second special figure side is not a big hit result, the second short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation step A negative determination is made in S1806, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is performed. If the game result on the side of the second special figure is the result of an advantageous special loss, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2, and the performance pattern on the side of the second special figure is rewritten. If the game result is a disadvantageous special loss result, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is not stopped on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are selected in accordance with the performance duration. Then, if the game result on the side of the second special figure is a normal failure result, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line stops on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2.

When the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is an advantageous special loss result, and when the variation display time is the first long variation, when the game round on the second special figure side is a jackpot result , an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, and the variable rewriting process in step S1807 is performed. In this case, the performance pattern is rewritten so that the ready-to-win line is formed by not even-numbered symbols but by odd-numbered symbols, and the performance pattern is rewritten so that the odd-numbered symbols stop on the ready-to-win line of the middle symbol row Z2.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a normal deviation result, basically the second special figure is started if the game round on the second special figure side is started regardless of the fluctuation display time An open/close execution mode is executed according to the game round on the side. Therefore, as the effect pattern of the game round to be started in the fluctuation start processing of step S1803, the effect pattern corresponding to the non-occurrence of the ready-to-win state where the ready-to-win line is not formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is set. Here, although no reach line is formed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a predetermined symbol combination (3, 4, 1) is set to stop on a predetermined effective line. If the second special figure side is a big hit result, it is rewritten to the performance pattern of the ready-to-win display by the odd number pattern in the variable rewriting process. When the second special figure side is not a jackpot result, if the variation display time is the second short variation, the variation rewriting process is performed regardless of the variation display time on the first special figure side, and the game result on the second special figure side The content can be rewritten according to the That is, if the second special symbol side is a disadvantageous special out result or a normal out result, the ready-to-win display is performed by the even numbered symbols, and the stopped symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 stop symbols different from the symbols forming the ready-to-win line. The production pattern is rewritten as follows. In addition, if the result is an advantageous special loss result, the ready-to-win display is performed by even numbered patterns, and the performance pattern is rewritten so that the stop pattern of the middle pattern row Z2 is the same as the pattern forming the ready-to-win line. When the variation display time on the second special figure side is the second long variation and the first special figure side is the first long variation, similar to the above, rewrite to the contents according to the game result on the second special figure side be done. On the other hand, if the second special figure side is the second long variation and the first special figure side is the first short variation, the effect rewriting process is not performed. Therefore, in this case, the effect of stopping the predetermined symbol combination (3, 4, 1) on the predetermined effective line is executed as it is. In other words, when a predetermined symbol combination stops on a predetermined effective line, the opening and closing execution mode of a high allocation mode may be implemented based on the result of the special advantage loss on the side of the second special figure, or the side of the second special figure. In some cases, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-distribution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is executed, and in other cases, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed.

If the game result of the game round on the first special figure side is a jackpot result, the performance pattern is not rewritten regardless of the variable display time. In this case, in step S1803, the effect pattern is set so that the reach line is formed by the odd symbols and the odd symbols stop on the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Depending on the length of the variable display time set in the game round on the side of the first special figure and the game round on the side of the second special figure, which game round ends first differs. Then, when the game round on the first special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is executed, and when the game round on the second special figure side ends first, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result. is carried out. In the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, it is possible to pass through the V winning area 356, and then a new opening/closing execution mode can be executed. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result, the V winning area 356 cannot be passed, and after that, the new opening/closing execution mode cannot be executed. That is, if the game round on the side of the first special figure ends first, the player cannot obtain the privilege, and if the game round on the side of the second special figure ends first, the player can acquire the privilege. . In this way, by making it possible to obtain benefits depending on factors such as the timing of execution of the success/failure judgment and the length of the variable display time, a game in which the ease of obtaining benefits changes according to the probability of the conventional success/failure judgment. It is possible to realize novel game characteristics that are completely different from nature.

In particular, the game characteristics such as which game round is likely to end first are realized by varying the length of the variable display time of each game round. Therefore, it is possible to change the easiness of obtaining a privilege by simply changing the length of the variable display time without changing the probability of success/failure determination, thereby greatly improving the degree of freedom in game design.

The relationship between the length of the variable display time is realized by a predetermined variable display time table, and the variation selected based on the number of executions of each game round (first game round counter, second game round counter) A variable display time table is used in which the length of the display time changes. By doing so, it is possible to determine the ease of obtaining the privilege, such as the number of times the privilege is easily obtained (zones 2 and 3) and the number of times the privilege is difficult to obtain (zone 1). It is possible to preset the number of executions of different game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to manage the game characteristics on the gaming machine side to some extent, and based on the above-mentioned game characteristics, it becomes possible for the player to select a game table on which to sit. .

Of the two game rounds that are carried out in parallel, if the game round on the first special figure side is likely to end first (first zone), and the game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than that case The relationship between the case where it is easier to play (second zone, third zone) is configured to involve the length of the variable display time of both game rounds. Therefore, for example, the pattern of change is more diversified than changing the ease of ending the game round on the second special figure side only by the length of the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the patterns in which the game cycle on the second special figure side ends first.

Zones 1, 2 and 3 were set to a common variable display time table. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a plurality of variable display time tables are stored.

The first game counter and the second game counter are used to change the setting mode of the variable display time in the common variable display time table. As a result, while using the common variable display time table, it is possible to change the setting mode of the variable display time for the first to third zones.

The first game counter and the second game counter are reset after 8 rounds or 16 rounds of opening/closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to link the first to third zones with the number of times the game is played after the substantial award is given. The external signal setting process (step S1011) is configured to output information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode of 8 rounds or 16 rounds will be performed. Therefore, in a configuration in which the output information is displayed on a data display machine or the like installed in a game hall, it can be used as a selection material when a player selects a game machine to sit on.

If the results of the opening and closing execution mode overlap with the validity determination processing on the first special figure side and the validity determination processing on the second special figure side, the case where the opening and closing execution mode on the first special figure side is performed, and the second There is a case where the opening and closing execution mode on the special figure side is implemented. Therefore, in a configuration in which a plurality of lottery systems are executed in parallel, a game can be played while predicting which open/close execution mode will be executed, and new game characteristics can be realized. .

In this case, since the open/close execution mode of the side that has completed the game round first is prioritized, the fairness of the game is ensured compared to the configuration in which the priority side is determined by the degree of advantage, for example. That is, for example, if the side that is advantageous to the player becomes the non-prioritized side, the player suffers a great disadvantage. If the side with the advantage is deliberately given no priority, it may create a sense of distrust. Therefore, as described above, if the side that finishes first is given priority, it is very easy for the player to understand, and it is easy for the player to feel a sense of fairness.

However, when the opening and closing execution modes overlap as described above, it is assumed that the so-called small hits overlap each other, such as the advantageous special loss result and the disadvantageous special loss result, both of which are performed in one round game. When the big win in which one round game is played overlaps with the small win, the big win is prioritized. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly disadvantaged.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variable display time table is switched after a predetermined open/close execution mode. FIG. 36(a) is a flow chart showing the variable display time table switching process in this embodiment. When the opening/closing execution mode ends, the variable display time table switching process is activated, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode end process (step S1017) in the game state transition process (FIG. 21). In addition, in this variable display time table switching process, since the trigger for switching to the current opening/closing execution mode is specified, the transition at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in which various flags indicating the game results that triggered the transition are erased. Before the processing (step S1016), the configuration for executing the end processing of the opening/closing execution mode and the change display time table switching processing itself are executed before the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S1016. , the opening/closing execution mode end processing (step S1017) may be performed after the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This also applies to other embodiments.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode to end this time was the 16-round opening/closing execution mode. That is, if the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the 16R jackpot or the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is completed, affirmative determination is made in step S1901. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the 8R jackpot or the result of the special loss, the normal table is set as the variable display time in step S1902, and the main switching process is performed. exit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, a special table is set as the variable display time table in step S1903, and this switching process ends.

In the normal table, as shown in FIG. 36(b), the first short variation/first long variation, the second long variation/second short variation, regardless of the first game counter and the second game counter, It is determined only by the variation type counter CS (CSA, CSB). That is, the probability that each variable display time is selected is constant regardless of the number of lotteries (the number of games played). Therefore, the game round that ends first in the game round on the side of the first special figure and the game round on the side of the second special figure is constant regardless of the number of lotteries (the number of times the game round is executed), and the result is an advantageous special loss. The possibility of executing the opening/closing execution mode based on the setting is also constant.

On the other hand, the special table, as shown in FIG. Fluctuation and second short fluctuation are relatively easy to select (pattern corresponding to the second zone in the first embodiment), and after the 101st time, the fluctuation type counter CS (CSA, CSB) (same as normal table). Therefore, after 16 rounds of opening and closing execution mode, in the 1st to 100th lottery, the game round on the side of the second special figure is first between the game round on the side of the first special figure and the game round on the side of the second special figure. It is easy to end, and there is a high possibility that the opening and closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result will be implemented.

As described above, if the variable display time table is switched based on a predetermined game result, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result is a mode in which it is easy to play in a row, a mode in which it is difficult to play in a row, or the like. It becomes possible to create intentionally without changing the probability. Therefore, it is possible to greatly contribute to the realization of new gameplay.

In this embodiment, after the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage/special loss result is easily executed until the predetermined number of times (100 times) lottery (game round) is executed. It is possible to improve the superiority of the execution of the opening and closing execution mode, and it is possible to increase the inflection of the game. Therefore, playability can be improved.

In particular, in the case of a big hit result in the winning lottery on the side of the first special figure based on the winning in the first operating opening 33, and in the winning lottery on the second special figure side based on the winning in the second working opening 34 The opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win result based on the winning to the second operating port 34 than in the case of a big win result. Therefore, it can be said that it is easier to shift to the so-called consecutive mode in which the above-mentioned special table is set by making the player win in the second operation port 34 . Even with such a configuration, after winning the first operation port 33, the game different from the design such that only the game round on the first special figure side is performed without winning the second operation port 34 can be made less likely to be selected.

As in the present embodiment, if the configuration for switching the variable display time table based on the game result is used, not only the switching between the easy-to-play mode and the difficult-to-play mode as in the present embodiment, but also the above-described first mode can be performed. It can be realized by a variable display time table that reproduces various game features such as the transition to the third zone (ceiling) shown in the embodiment. Specifically, for example, a variable display time table corresponding to the third zone is set, and a predetermined game result is set in the variable display time table corresponding to the third zone after 16 rounds of the open/close execution mode. do. In this way, immediately after 16 rounds of the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result is executed, and then 16 rounds of the opening/closing execution mode are executed. As a result, it is possible to substantially realize one-game consecutive games without changing the probability of the winning lottery. Alternatively, the variable display time table shown in the first embodiment may be used as the normal table. It may be configured to be set. In this way, it is possible to realize different game characteristics corresponding to the variable display time table, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the relationship between the first special figure side game round and the second special figure side game round is determined by the variable display time of the normal figure side based on the winning to the through gate 35 .

FIG. 37 shows a variable display time table in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 37(a), in this embodiment, the variation display time of the game round on the first special figure side is fixed at a predetermined time (10 sec) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CSA. ing. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the game times on the side of the second special figure is also fixed at a predetermined time (5 sec) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CSB. In addition, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time is set longer on the first special figure side than on the second special figure side.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), in the present embodiment, a variable display time table for normal charts is also defined. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning results are set as a result of the success/failure lottery (support lottery) for general-purpose drawing, and a first winning result and a second winning result are set. The first winning result is distributed with a probability of 248/250 according to the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4. The second winning result is distributed with a probability of 1/250 according to the value of the electric accessary product opening counter C4. In addition, non-election results are provided as the result of the winning lottery on the normal side, and the non-election results are distributed with a probability of 1/250 according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. In other words, the probability of winning either the first winning result or the second winning result in the winning lottery for the normal figure is 249/250, which is the same as the above embodiments.

In both the first winning result and the second winning result, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening duration (support duration) is 1.5 sec. In other words, the first winning result and the second winning result have a common opening mode of the electric accessory 34a, and the game ball can enter the second operation port 34 in either winning result. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the variable display time in the support lottery differs between the first winning result and the second winning result. Specifically, 6 sec is set as the long variation for the first winning result, and 2 seconds is set as the short variation shorter than the first winning result for the second winning result. In other words, in the case of the first winning result, it is possible to win the second operation opening 34 until 6 sec to 7.5 sec after the game ball enters the through gate 35, and in the case of the second winning result. 2 to 3.5 seconds after the game ball enters the through gate 35, it is possible for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34.

If the result of the success/failure lottery on the normal side is a non-winning result, the variable display time is set to 2 seconds, which is short like the second winning result. However, in the case of the result of non-winning, the electric accessory 34a is not opened, so no prize is awarded to the second operation port 34.

Next, the electric support processing of this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S2001 whether or not support is being provided, as in step S1301. If it is not being supported, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the support winning flag is stored, as in step S1302. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first winning result and the second winning result are set as the winning results for support winning, and the support winning flag is the first winning result and the second winning result. Stored based on

If the support winning flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the second timer counter TC2 is "0". do. If it is "0", it is determined in step S2004 whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 38. After setting, terminate the electronic support process. The processing of steps S2003 to S2005 is the same as the processing of steps S1303 to S1305.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, similarly to step S1306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number SN of the accessory reserved storage is greater than "0". When the value of the number SN of the accessory reserved storage is "0", the electronic role support processing is terminated as it is.

When the value of the number SN of accessory reserved storage is larger than "0", an open lottery is performed in step S2007. Then, in step S2008, based on the processing result of step S2007, it is determined whether or not the current result is the first winning result. In the case of the first winning result, in step S2009, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set to the second timer counter TC2 as the variable display time on the normal side. On the other hand, if it is not the first winning result, that is, if it is the second winning result or non-winning result, in step S2010, "1000" is set to the second timer counter TC2 as the current fluctuation display time on the side of the general pattern. (ie 2 sec).

After the processing in step S2009 or step S2010, it is determined in step S2011 whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S2007 is support winning (first winning result or second winning result). In the case of support winning, in step S2012, the support winning flag is set, and after setting "1" to the second round counter RC2, the electronic support processing is terminated. If it is determined in step S2011 that the result is non-winning, the electric support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the support winning flag is set, the same processing as in steps S1310 to S1312 is performed in steps S2013 to S2015. Also, if it is determined in step S2001 that support is being provided, in step S2016, the same processing as the electrical opening/closing processing in step S1313 is executed.

The game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG.

FIG. 39 shows the case where the result of the open lottery on the normal side is the first winning result. That is, if you win the through gate 35 at the timing of t1 and win the first operation port 33 at the timing of t2 immediately after that, the winning lottery on the side of the general pattern is the first winning result, so the general pattern The fluctuation display time on the side is set to 6 seconds as a long fluctuation, and this fluctuation display time elapses at the timing of t3. Also, as described above, the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side is uniformly set to 10 sec, and this fluctuation display time elapses at the timing of t5.

In this case, the electric accessory 34a is opened for 1.5 sec from the timing t3 when the fluctuation display time on the normal side set this time elapses, and is closed at the timing t4. In other words, it becomes possible to win a prize to the second operation port 34 from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. By the way, at the timing of t3 to t4, the variation display time of the game times on the side of the first special figure has not passed and is in the process of variation.

For example, when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 at the timing when the electric accessory 34a is opened at the timing of t3, the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side is uniformly set to 5 sec, and such fluctuation The display time is set so as to elapse at the timing of t6. In this case, the timing of t6 is the timing after the timing of t5 when the variation display time of the game round on the first special figure side passes. Then, of the two game rounds that fluctuate in parallel, the game round on the first special figure side ends first, so the opening and closing execution mode on the first special figure side (mostly opening and closing based on the disadvantageous special loss result execution mode) will be implemented. Then, when the game round on the first special figure side ends at the timing of t5, the game round on the second special figure side ends forcibly at the timing of t5, and the opening and closing execution mode on the second special figure side (often The opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result) will not be performed.

Also, when the electric accessory 34a is opened at the timing of t3, and the game ball enters the second operation opening 34 at the timing of t4, which is the latest timing at which the open state is maintained, the second special figure The variable display time on the side is set to 5 seconds, and the variable display time is set to elapse at the timing of t7. Even in this case, the timing of t7 is the timing after the timing of t5 when the variation display time of the game round on the side of the first special figure passes, and the opening and closing execution of the first special figure among the two special symbols mode is implemented, and the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the second special figure is not implemented.

That is, when the fluctuation display time on the normal side is set to 6 sec, which is a long fluctuation, regardless of the start timing of the game round on the second special side, that is, the winning timing to the second operation port 34, the second The game round on the 1st special figure side ends earlier than the game round on the 2nd special figure side. As a result, when the fluctuation display time on the normal side is long fluctuation, it is possible to give priority to the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the first special side of the two special marks.

FIG. 40 shows the case where the result of the open lottery on the normal side is the second winning result. That is, if you win the through gate 35 at the timing of t1 and win the first operation port 33 at the timing of t2 immediately after that, the winning lottery on the side of the general pattern is the second winning result, so the general pattern The fluctuation display time on the side is set to 2 sec as a short fluctuation, and this fluctuation display time elapses at the timing of t3. Further, as described above, the variable display time on the first special figure side is uniformly set to 10 sec, and the variable display time is set to elapse at the timing of t7.

As in the case of the first winning result, the electric accessary 34a is open for 1.5 sec from the timing t3 when the fluctuation display time for the general pattern side set this time elapses, and is closed at the timing t4. state. That is, in this case as well, it is possible to win a prize to the second operation opening 34 from timing t3 to timing t4. In addition, even in the case of the second winning result, at the timing of t3 to t4, the variation display time of the game round on the side of the first special figure has not passed and is in the process of variation.

For example, when the game ball enters the second operation port 34 at the timing when the electric accessory 34a is opened at the timing of t3, the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side is uniformly set to 5 sec, and such fluctuation The display time is set so as to elapse at the timing of t5. In this case, the timing of t5 is the timing before the timing of t7 when the variation display time of the game round on the first special figure side passes. Then, of the two game rounds that fluctuate in parallel, the game round on the second special figure side ends first, so the opening and closing execution mode on the second special figure side (mostly opening and closing based on the advantageous special loss result execution mode) will be implemented. Then, when the game round on the second special figure side ends at the timing of t5, the game round on the first special figure side ends forcibly at the timing of t5, and the opening and closing execution mode on the first special figure side (often The opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result) will not be executed.

Also, when the electric accessory 34a is opened at the timing of t3, and the game ball enters the second operation opening 34 at the timing of t4, which is the latest timing at which the open state is maintained, the second special figure The variable display time on the side is set to 5 sec, and the variable display time is set to elapse at the timing of t6. Even in this case, the timing of t6 is the timing before the timing of t7 when the variation display time of the game round of the first special figure passes, and the opening and closing execution of the second special figure of both special symbols mode is implemented, and the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the first special figure is not implemented.

That is, when the fluctuation display time on the normal side is set to 2 sec, which is a short fluctuation, regardless of the start timing of the game round on the second special side, that is, the winning timing to the second operation port 34, the second The game round on the side of the second special figure ends before the game round on the side of the first special figure. As a result, when the variation display time on the normal side is a short variation, it is possible to give priority to the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the second special symbol among the two special symbols.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the situation in which the opening/closing execution mode on the side of the first special figure and the opening/closing execution mode on the side of the second special figure compete with the information on the side of the general figure (electric accessory opening counter C4, Display time) can be used to set which opening/closing execution mode has priority. By doing so, compared to the configuration of setting the superiority using the information of both special figures (such as the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CSA, CSB), to use the determination information of another lottery system, It is possible to easily set which one to prioritize without requiring adjustment on the special figure side. Moreover, compared with the configuration in which the superiority and inferiority of the opening and closing execution modes of both special figures are preset, the superiority and inferiority can be set at random.

In particular, since it is configured to use the information of the variable display time as the information on the general map side, it is possible to set the superiority and inferiority of both special maps without changing the winning probability of the support lottery. Moreover, even if the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the first special figure is prioritized, and even if the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the second special figure is given priority, the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a is common. It is possible to set the superiority or inferiority only by the length of the variable display time. For example, if the probability that the opening and closing execution mode on the second special figure side is prioritized is changed from that of the above embodiment, the probability of the first winning result and the probability of the second winning result, that is, long fluctuation (6 sec) and the probability of short fluctuation (2 sec) need only be changed, and there is no need to change the support winning (total of the first winning result and the second winning result) itself, and the electric accessory 34a There is no need to change the opening mode. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to set the superiority or inferiority of the opening and closing execution mode of both special figures with a simple design change.

In terms of the relationship between the first special figure side game round and the second special figure side game round, after the first special figure side game round is started, the second special figure side game round is started. It can be said that the shorter the period until, the easier it is for the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result to end earlier than the second special figure side game round. In other words, after winning the first operation opening 33, the prize is easily granted by causing the second operation opening 34 to win the prize at an early stage. In this way, the first special figure side game round based on the winning to the first operation opening 33 and the second special figure side game round based on the winning to the second operation opening 34 are performed in parallel. In the implemented configuration, an element that can be adjusted by the player, that is, the timing of starting both game rounds, is involved in granting benefits, and by encouraging active participation in the game, the degree of attention to the game is preferably increased.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, switching of the variable display time table is not performed in the configuration in which which of the two special symbols is more likely to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode is changed by switching the variable display time table as in the second embodiment. Count the number of times an event has occurred.

FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the variable display time table switching process of this embodiment. As already described, the variable display time table switching process is a process started in the opening/closing execution mode end process (step S1017) in the game state transition process (FIG. 21).

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode to be terminated this time was the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds, or the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result. That is, in the second embodiment, the special table is set only after 16 rounds of the opening/closing execution mode, and it is determined in step S1901 whether or not the 16 rounds of the opening/closing execution mode have been completed. In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is other than the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special unfavorable loss.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of disadvantageous special loss results are set among the special loss results. More specifically, as the disadvantageous special loss result in the propriety determination table on the first special figure side, the disadvantageous special loss result A, the disadvantageous special loss result B, the disadvantageous special loss result C, the disadvantageous special loss result D, the disadvantageous special loss result E is set. All of these disadvantageous special loss results A to E are game results that shift to the opening/closing execution mode of the low apportionment mode in which V prizes are unlikely to occur, and the opening/closing mode is common in any of the opening/closing execution modes. Disadvantageous special out-of-results A to E have different distribution rates, disadvantageous special out-of-result A is the most easily distributed, disadvantageous special out-of-result B, unfavorable special out-of-result C, disadvantageous special out-of-result D, disadvantageous special out-of-result E It is set to make it difficult to sort in the order of

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the opening/closing execution mode to be terminated this time is the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special unfavorable loss, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, processing is executed to determine the value to be added to the switching counter provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in accordance with the type of disadvantageous special loss result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode to end this time. The switching counter is a counter used for switching the variable display time table, and unlike the first game round counter and the second game round counter, it is a counter that counts independently of the number of game rounds executed. In this embodiment, in the switching process of the variable display time table after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the variable display time table to be switched to is changed based on the value of the switching counter.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, a value to be added to the switching counter is set according to the type of the special disadvantageous loss result. Specifically, in the disadvantageous special outlier result A, which is the most likely to be selected, "1" is set as the additional value, B is "2", C is "5", D is "10", and E is "50". , a larger value is set for a disadvantageous special outlier result that is less likely to be selected.

In step S2102, the current addition value is grasped by referring to the table in FIG. Then, in step S2103, addition processing of the switching counter is executed based on the grasped addition value.

In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching counter has reached a predetermined value (“1000” in this embodiment) or more. If it is less than "1000", in step S2105, processing for setting the normal table as the variable display time table is executed. Unlike the normal table shown in the second embodiment (FIG. 36(b)), the normal table has the values of the first game counter and the second game counter as shown in FIG. 43(a). Until a predetermined value ("500" in this embodiment) is reached, a combination of the first short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation is likely to be selected as the fluctuation display time of each game round, and the second special figure side While the game round on the first special figure side tends to end first, after the values of the first game round counter and the second game round counter reach the predetermined values, the variable display time of each game round , The combination of the first long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation is likely to be selected, and the game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end earlier than on the side of the first special figure. In other words, the normal table is a table in which a variable display time is set so that a so-called ceiling function is exhibited when the value of the game round counter reaches a predetermined value (in the following description, the variable display time is set according to the number of game rounds executed). The ceiling function is also referred to as "first ceiling function").

If it is determined in step S2104 that the value of the switching counter is greater than or equal to "1000", then in step S2106 processing is executed to set the ceiling table as the variable display time table. As shown in FIG. 43(c), the ceiling table has a first long fluctuation and a second short fluctuation as the fluctuation display time of each game round regardless of the values of the first game round counter and the second game round counter. The table is set so that the combination is easily selected and the game round on the side of the second special figure is likely to end earlier than on the side of the first special figure. That is, the ceiling table is a table that is switched when the value of the switching counter reaches a predetermined value, and is also a table in which the variable display time is set so that the so-called ceiling function is exhibited (described below). Then, the ceiling function based on the value of the switching counter is also called a "second ceiling function").

As described above, in this embodiment, when the variable display time table is switched after the opening/closing execution mode, the destination of the variable display time table is changed depending on whether or not the value of the switching counter is "1000" or more. In this case, even if the value of the switching counter is less than "1000", the variable display time table is switched from the beginning. It does not cause switching.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the open/close execution mode is not based on the result of the unfavorable special loss, reset processing of the switching counter is executed in step S2107. Specifically, in step S2107, the value of the switching counter is set to "0". Then, in step S2108, processing for setting a special table as the variable display time table is executed. The special table is the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 36(c)), and as shown in FIG. 43(b), it is a variable display time table in which a so-called continuous zone is set. .

Even if this special table is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result, if a V win occurs during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result, the next normal In the process, 16 rounds of open/close execution mode are executed based on the V win flag. In other words, a new jackpot will not occur between the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result and the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds triggered by the V winning in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result. do not have. On the other hand, even in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result, it is conceivable that the V winning will not occur for some reason. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, even after the opening/closing execution mode, a special table with a continuous zone is set, so an early big win (opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss) can be expected. It is possible to rescue a player who has not been able to generate a V prize.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2105, S2106, and S2108, in step S2109, the information of the variable display time table set in these processes, the current addition value grasped in step S2102, and the After setting the command including the information of the total value of the switching counter added and processed in , as an object to be output to the effect control device 82, the variable display time table switching process is terminated. The command set here is output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. The effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and the like so as to execute effects based on such commands.

That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of ceiling functions are set, such as a first ceiling function based on the number of game rounds executed on the normal table and a second ceiling function by switching the variable display time table by the switching counter. It is The first ceiling function is set as a ceiling reached by the number of execution times of the game round itself, and the second ceiling function is set as a ceiling reached by a number different from the number of execution times of the game round. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting both the first ceiling function and the second ceiling function, and unprecedented game playability is realized.

Incidentally, the first ceiling function is activated when the game is played 500 times. On the other hand, the second ceiling function is not always activated even if the game is played 500 times. However, in the second ceiling function, the average value of the addition value of the switching counter based on each disadvantageous special loss result per game is 2.4, and the switching counter reaches 1000 in less than 500 games. It is expected that That is, normally, the second ceiling function is activated before the first ceiling function. is activated.

The effect contents of the double ceiling function will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), at one corner (upper left corner) of the display screen G, there is a game counter display area GG for displaying the value of the first game counter (second game counter). is provided. The game counter display area GG displays the current value of the first game round counter, that is, the number of game rounds executed since the open/close execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds was executed. In addition to the execution count, the ceiling count ("500" in this embodiment as described above, see FIG. 43(a)) is also displayed. It is possible to clearly grasp whether Also, the game counter display area GG is set so as not to overlap the variable display area of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or if it overlaps, it becomes the background of the variable display area. In particular, in the game counter display area GG, the display of the number of times the game is executed and the number of ceilings are set so as not to overlap with the variable display areas of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

The value of either the first game counter or the second game counter may be displayed in the game counter display area GG. Also, as described above, normally only one (only the first game counter) is displayed, but when the values of the first game counter and the second game counter are different, Both counters may be displayed.

On the display screen G, a chance counter display area GH for displaying the value of the switching counter is provided at a corner (upper right corner) different from the corner where the game counter display area GG is provided. The chance counter display area GH displays the current value of the switching counter and a predetermined value (1000) that triggers switching of the variable display time table based on the switching counter. As a result, it is possible to grasp how soon the variable display time table will be switched and the ceiling will be reached. However, as described above, the switching counter is not the same as the number of times the game is executed, and can be said to be more approximate than the display in the game counter display area GG. The chance counter display area GH is set so as not to overlap the variable display area of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or if it overlaps, it becomes the background of the variable display area. In particular, in the chance counter display area GH, the display of the switching counter value and the predetermined value that triggers the switching are set so as not to overlap with the variable display areas of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), when the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends, the game addition display GP, which is a display indicating that the number of times the game has been executed in the game counter display area GG is added, is displayed, for example. "+1" is displayed. Further, based on the game result of the current game round, the added value of the switching counter is grasped (step S2102), and the chance addition display HP, which is an indication that the value in the chance counter display area GH is added, is displayed in the current game round. For example, "+10" is displayed in association with the added value.

Here, as described above, the added value of the switching counter is determined by the type of disadvantageous special loss result on the side of the first special figure that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the stopping results of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are determined in advance with respect to the disadvantageous special out results B to E having an added value other than one. Specifically, the unfavorable special loss result B with an additional value of 2 is a stop result in which the same even-numbered symbols stop at two symbol rows Z1 to Z3 out of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. , and the additional value is set as 5, and the disadvantageous special loss result C is a stop where the same odd numbered symbols stop at two symbol rows Z1 to Z3 out of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. set as a result. Further, the unfavorable special loss result D with an added value of 10 is set as a stop result in which the same even-numbered symbols stop at all the symbol rows Z1-Z3 out of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 so as not to form a reach line. , and the unfavorable special loss result E with the added value of 50 is set as a stop result in which the same odd-numbered symbols stop at all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 out of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to form a reach line. It is Therefore, it is possible to predict which additional value will be obtained from the contents of the variable display of the game round, and even if it is possible to predict in advance that the big win will be lost without being notified by the variable display. , and the added value can be enjoyed.

It should be noted that the special unfavorable out-of-game result A with an added value of 1 is randomly set as a stop result different from any of the above-mentioned unfavorable special out-of-game results B to E.

As shown in FIG. 45(c), the value of the game counter display area GG and the value of the chance counter display area GH are updated based on the game addition display GP and the chance addition display HP. is highlighted (for example, the value blinks) for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds after updating).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, a ceiling function based on the value of the switching counter is provided separately from the ceiling function based on the number of times the game is executed as in the first embodiment. It becomes possible to realize great playability. The first game round counter and the second game round counter are counters that are incremented by one each time a game round is executed, and are completely linked to the number of game rounds executed. On the other hand, the switching counter is a counter that is incremented for each event that causes switching of the variable display time table in the variable display time table switching process, and is not necessarily linked to the number of times the game is executed. do not have. For example, in a game round resulting in a normal failure, the first game round counter and the second game round counter are incremented, but the switching counter is not incremented, and the incremented value of the switching counter is determined according to the switching counter addition table (FIG. 42). is defined, and a value other than 1 may be added. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention not only to the game in which the ceiling is reached by repeating the game round, but also to the content of the repeated game round (type of unfavorable special loss result, addition value), and the process of reaching the ceiling. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Here, by making it possible to switch the variable display time table by means of a counter that is not directly linked to the number of times the game is played, as described above, the probability of winning the winning lottery and the benefits given after winning (opening/closing execution mode) can be changed. The possibility of diversification will be dramatically enhanced in diversifying the game without having to do it. On the other hand, if the variable display time table can be switched without limit, it becomes difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. Therefore, by changing the switching destination of the variable display time table in an event that causes the switching by using a counter that is updated for each event that causes the switching of the variable display time table, a new event that causes the switching is created. , it is possible to set a certain limit on the switching of the variable display time table. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games while ensuring the fairness of the games.

Since the current value of the switching counter is displayed in the chance counter display area GH and the added value to the switching counter is displayed as the chance addition display HP, the game is played while expecting the ceiling function of the switching counter. , can be suitably realized.

<First Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
The fourth embodiment may be modified as follows. FIG. 45(a) is a flow chart showing the variable display time table switching process of this modified example.

In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the switching counter reaches a predetermined value (1000), the variable display time table is switched to activate the second ceiling function. In this modified example, the value (predetermined value, ceiling value) of the switching counter that activates the second ceiling function is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. That is, similar to step S2101, the type of opening/closing execution mode is determined in step S2201, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2207. Step S2207 is the same as the processing in step S2107, and performs processing for resetting the switching counter. In the subsequent step S2208, a switching counter setting process is executed.

In the process of setting the switching counter, the table shown in FIG. 45(b) is referred to, and a value corresponding to the type of opening/closing execution mode to be terminated this time is set in the switching counter. For example, at the end of the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds on the first special figure side, "2000" or "1000" is set as the ceiling value of the switching counter. Which one is set may be determined by lottery or the like. For example, "2000" is set with a probability of 30%, and "1000" is set with a probability of 70%. At the end of the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds on the second special figure side, "2000", "1000" or "500" is set as the ceiling value of the switching counter. This may also be determined by lottery or the like. For example, "2000" is set with a probability of 10%, "1000" is set with a probability of 80%, and "500" is set with a probability of 10%. At the end of the opening/closing execution mode of 8 rounds, "1000" is set in the case of the opening/closing execution mode of the first special figure side, and "500" is set in the case of the opening/closing execution mode of the second special figure side. ”. The lower the set ceiling value of the switching counter, the earlier the second ceiling function is activated, so the ceiling value and distribution probability illustrated above are more advantageous for the second special figure side than the first special figure side. It can be said that it is set as

In addition, regarding the switching counter set after the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantageous loss, a predetermined value (for example, 10) is set regardless of whether it is based on the first special figure side or the second special figure side. set. After the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, the opening/closing execution mode of 16R is basically started in the next normal processing, so the setting of the ceiling value of the switching counter is omitted. good too. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, it is not always the case that a V prize will be won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the same processing as in steps S2102 to S2106 is executed in steps S2202 to S2206. However, in the determination processing in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the value of the switching counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value set in step S2208. The processing of step S2210 is the same as the processing of step S2110.

Incidentally, the command set in step S2210 includes information on the ceiling value of the switching counter set in step S2208. Based on this command, the effect control device 82 controls the display control device 212 so as to display the chance counter display area GH.

In this way, by setting the value for activating the second ceiling function after each opening/closing execution mode from a plurality of values, the game can be enhanced. That is, the smaller the value is set as the ceiling value of the switching counter, the more advantageous it is for the player, and the larger the value is set, the more disadvantageous the player is. In this way, it can be used as a material for determining whether or not to continue the game, for example, and can also be used as a material for selection when the player selects a gaming table on which to play.

In particular, since it is easier to set a smaller value on the second special figure side than on the first special figure side, it is more advantageous for the player after the opening and closing execution mode on the second special figure side. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win the second operation port 34 after winning the first operation port 33, and only the first special figure side without causing the second operation port 34 to win It is also possible to make it difficult to play games that are different from assumptions, such as executing

<Second Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, the ceiling value of the switching counter is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the predetermined disadvantageous special loss result, not after the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the variable display time table switching process in this modified example.

In step S2301, similar to step S2101, the type of opening/closing execution mode is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is based on the special unfavorable loss result E. If it is based on the disadvantageous special loss result E, a switching counter setting process is executed in step S2303. In step S2303, one value is selected by lottery or the like from among "1000", "500" and "100" as the ceiling value of the switching counter, and the selected value is set as the ceiling value.

Although it is arbitrary which ceiling value is selected, it is advantageous for the player to select, for example, "1000" with a probability of 80%, "500" with a probability of 15%, and "100" with a probability of 5%. A ceiling value (lower ceiling value) may be less likely to be selected, or the opposite relationship may be adopted. Further, a plurality of kinds of triggers for setting the ceiling value other than the unfavorable special outlier result E may be provided, and the game result and the set ceiling value may be associated with each other as in the first modification.

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, or if the process of step S2303 has been executed, the process advances to step S2304. In step S2304, the process of grasping the addition value of the switching counter is executed as in the process of step S2102, and in the following step S2305, the addition process of the switching counter is executed in the same manner as in the process of step S2103. Then, in step S2306, it is determined whether or not the ceiling value of the switching counter has been set.If the ceiling value has been set, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the value of the switching counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value. conduct. If the ceiling price has not been set in step S2306, or if the ceiling price has been set in step S2307 but is still less than the ceiling price, the normal table is set as the variable display time table in step S2308. Execute the processing to be performed. If it is determined in step S2307 that the ceiling value of the switching counter has been set and the value of the switching counter is greater than or equal to the ceiling value, processing for switching the variable display time table to the ceiling table is performed in step S2309. Run.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process for the multi-family zone similar to steps S2107 and S2108 is executed in steps S2310 and S2311. Step S2308, step S2309 and step S2311 after executing any of the processing, in step S2312 a command including information on whether the table, counter information and ceiling value are set to the effect control device 82 set as the output target of After that, the variable display time table switching process is ended.

That is, in this modified example, regardless of whether or not the ceiling value of the switching counter is set, the switching counter is added with the progress of each game cycle (switching of the variable display time table at the end of the opening/closing execution mode). Triggered by the termination of the opening/closing execution mode of the unfavorable special deviation result E, which is relatively difficult to select, the ceiling value is set. An outline of such a game will be described together with an example of display effects in FIG.

In the situation where the ceiling value of the switching counter is not set, as shown in FIG. , a display (“???” in the figure) indicating that the ceiling value of the switching counter has not been set is performed. On the other hand, in the game counter display area GG, the number of times the current game is played and the number of times the first ceiling function is activated (500) are displayed.

In this case, the player can recognize how soon the first ceiling function will be activated from the display of the game counter display area GG. When the number of games played is far from the ceiling, it is thought that the player refrains from playing the game (selects another game machine). On the other hand, from the display contents of the chance counter display area GH, it is not possible to recognize how soon the second ceiling function will be activated.

In the situation where the opening and closing execution mode on the first special figure side is implemented (first short fluctuation / second long fluctuation), if the game result on the first special figure side is a disadvantageous special loss result E, the first special An open/close execution mode based on the disadvantageous special out-of-range result E shown in the drawing is executed. In that case, the variable display time table switching process is activated, and the ceiling value of the switching counter is set in this process. For example, when the ceiling price of this time is set to "500", a command including the fact that the ceiling price has been set and the information of the ceiling price is output to the effect control device 82 . Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b), a counter image CP for notifying that the ceiling price has been set and information on the ceiling price is displayed ("counter 500" in the figure). As a result, the player can grasp that the ceiling value of the second ceiling function has been set and the current ceiling value information. Further, addition processing of the additional value (50) corresponding to the disadvantageous special loss result E is executed in the switching counter, and the information of the additional value is also output to the effect control device 82 . Then, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the chance addition display HP is displayed as "+50".

After that, in the chance counter display area GH, a highlighted display (blinking display) is performed to indicate that the switching counter has been incremented and updated (“353”→“403”). Also, corresponding to the setting of the ceiling value of the switching counter, the display of "???" is changed to "500", and the numerical value of "500" is highlighted (blinking display). In this case, the player can recognize that the second ceiling function will be activated in 97 minutes.

As already explained, the switching counter increases by 2.4 on average each time the game is played. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 47, it can be expected that the second ceiling function will be activated after 41 game rounds. In other words, it can be expected to be activated earlier than the first ceiling function to be activated after 379 game rounds. In the above example, if "1000" is set as the current ceiling value, the second ceiling function will be activated at 597 minutes. In this case, it takes about 250 games to activate the second ceiling function, and even in this case, it can be expected that the second ceiling function will be activated earlier than the first ceiling function. On the other hand, if "2000" is set as the current ceiling value, the second ceiling function will be activated at 1597 minutes. As a result, 600 or more games may be required before the activation of the second ceiling function, and the first ceiling function is activated first. In this way, depending on the set ceiling value, enjoyment is added such as which ceiling function will be activated first. It can be used as a selection material for making a decision to continue playing or selecting a game machine.

Incidentally, in the above configuration, it is conceivable that the switching counter is 500 or more or 1000 or more (2000 or more) before setting the ceiling value. For example, when the value of the switching counter is 600, which is 500 or more, and the ceiling value is set to 500, the table is switched to the ceiling table at that point. In this way, the activation timing of the ceiling function can differ depending not only on the set ceiling value, but also on the balance with the current value of the switching counter, making it possible to make the game more interesting.

<Third Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modification, as in the second modification, the ceiling value of the switching counter is set with the opening/closing execution mode of the disadvantageous special loss result E as a trigger, and when the ceiling value is reached, the value of the switching counter at that time The difference from the ceiling price can be carried over to the next time.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, the variable display time table switching process of this modification is substantially the same as that of the second modification. The difference is that in step S2407, it is determined whether or not the switching counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value in the same manner as in step S2307, and if the determination is affirmative, the ceiling table is set (step S2410, step (similar to S2309), the processing of step S2409 is performed before step S2401, and if affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the special table is set in step S2411 without resetting the switching counter in step S2310. is.

In step S2409, a process of subtracting the ceiling value from the current switching counter value is performed, and a process of updating the switching counter value with the subtracted value is performed. Since the switching counter is not reset after the opening/closing execution mode, the difference between the switching counter that exceeds the ceiling value and the ceiling value is carried over to the ceiling by the next switching counter. Become.

For example, assume that the ceiling value is set when the switching counter reaches 800, and the ceiling value is 500. Then, the difference between the switching counter and the ceiling value is 300, and after the opening/closing execution mode by the ceiling function, the value of the switching counter starts from 300, and early reaching the ceiling (waiting for the setting of the ceiling value) can be expected.

By doing the above, if the ceiling value is set when the value of the switching counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the difference will be carried over without being reset. It is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has lost money by making the player lose.

Further, in the above configuration, the switching counter is not reset when a privilege is given by the first ceiling function activated by the number of times the game is played. Therefore, even if the first ceiling function is activated near the second ceiling function, it is possible to activate the second ceiling function at an early stage thereafter. By doing so, it is possible to greatly improve the game playability using the double ceiling function.

<Fourth Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
In this modified example, in the configuration in which the difference between the switching counter and the ceiling value is carried over in the third modified example, whether or not to carry over the difference is determined by lottery.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, when the process of step S2507 (similar to step S2407) makes an affirmative determination, carryover lottery processing is executed in step S2508. The probability of winning in the carryover lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured to win the carryover lottery with a probability of 50%, or the probability of winning varies according to the set ceiling value (for example, if it is "500" 50%, 80% for "1000", 100% for "2000", etc.).

In step S2510, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S2509 was a winning result. If it is determined that the difference is not carried over instead of the winning result, reset processing of the switching counter is executed in step S2511. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S2310 and the like. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2510 that the winning result was obtained, in step S2512, a process of updating the value of the switching counter with the value of the difference is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2409.

After executing the process of step S2511 or step S2512, the process of setting a ceiling table is executed in step S2513. In addition, the processes of steps S2501 to S2508 and steps S2514 to S2515 are the same as the processes of steps S2401 to S2412.

By doing so, when the second ceiling function is activated, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to whether the difference is carried over or reset. As already explained, if the difference is carried over, the second ceiling function can be activated even earlier, which is advantageous for the player, and if the difference is reset, it is difficult to activate the second ceiling function early. It is disadvantageous compared to the case where it is carried over. Therefore, it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the setting of the difference at the ceiling.

Further, by adjusting the winning probability of the carry-over lottery, it is possible to change the player's advantage and playability in relation to the ceiling value in the second ceiling function. Specifically, in a situation where a deep ceiling (a ceiling value with a large value) was set, if the configuration was such that the difference was more likely to be carried over, the deep ceiling was reached (the deep ceiling was not won). It is possible to use the ceiling function from the viewpoint of relief to the player, and conversely, if the ceiling is deeper, the difference is less likely to be carried over. The range of increase and decrease of is increased, and it is possible to improve the game playability.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, after the opening and closing execution mode based on the predetermined game result, the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss is difficult to be executed until the predetermined number of games (the game round on the first special figure side ends first). easy) is switched to a variable display time table. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the variable display time table switching process in this embodiment.

First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the currently set variable display time table is the specific period table.

Here, the variable display time table in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, as the variable display time table, in addition to the normal table of FIG. 51(a) and the ceiling table of FIG. 51(c), the specific period table of FIG. 51(b) is set.

The normal table is the same as the normal table (FIG. 36(b)) in the second embodiment, and regardless of the values of the first game counter and the second game counter, A set of fluctuations is easy to set, and a set of first long fluctuation and second short fluctuation is difficult to set. That is, it is a variable display time table in which the game round on the side of the first special figure tends to end earlier than the game round on the side of the second special figure, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is likely to be executed.

The ceiling table is the same as the ceiling table (FIG. 43(c)) in the fourth embodiment. A set of fluctuations is easy to set, and a set of first short fluctuation and second long fluctuation is difficult to set. That is, it is a variable display time table in which the game round on the side of the second special figure tends to end earlier than the game round on the side of the first special figure, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss is likely to be executed.

In the specific period table, a set of first short fluctuation and second long fluctuation is set until the number of games reaches a predetermined number (50 times) based on the values of the first game counter and the second game counter. , the set of the first long variation and the second short variation is not set, and after reaching a predetermined number of times, the set of the first long variation and the second short variation is likely to be set. That is, until the number of games reaches a predetermined number of times, basically, the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is executed. . In the following description, the period for which the specific period table is set is also referred to as the specific period.

The specific period table is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss results B to D. On the other hand, the ceiling table is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when switching the variable display time table after the opening/closing execution mode, and is also set when the specific period ends. The normal table is set when the variable display time table is switched other than when the specific period table and ceiling table are set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that a variable display time table different from the specific period table is set, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not the current variable display time table is the ceiling table. A negative determination in step S2602 means that the current variable display time table is the normal table. In this case, in step S2603, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is based on the game result that triggers the setting of the specific period table. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined result among the disadvantageous special out results.

Also in this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of special disadvantageous loss results are set as the special disadvantageous loss results on the side of the first special figure. However, since the distribution rate is different from that of the fourth embodiment, the distribution table in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, as the special disadvantageous loss result on the side of the first special figure, a special disadvantageous loss result A, a special disadvantageous loss result B, a special disadvantageous loss result C, and a special disadvantageous loss result D are provided. . Which result will be a disadvantageous special outlier is sorted by the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. %, the special unfavorable out-of-range result A is most likely to be sorted, and the special unfavorable out-of-range result B, the special unfavorable out-of-range result C, and the special unfavorable out-of-range result D are set to have lower sorting rates in this order. Especially in the present embodiment, most of the unfavorable special outlier results are set to be distributed to the disadvantageous special outlier result A, and the disadvantageous special outlier results B to D are set to be distributed with relatively low frequency. It is It should be noted that these distribution rates are only examples, and the distribution rates for the respective disadvantageous special loss results A to D may be different from those described above.

Returning to the description of the variable display time table switching process, in step S2603, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggers the setting of the specific period table is one of the unfavorable special loss results B to D. If the result is one of the disadvantageous special loss results B to D, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, a process of setting a specific period table as a switching destination of the variable display time of this time is executed.

In the subsequent step S2605, a process of starting the counting of the first game counter and the second game counter is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the measurement of the first game round counter and the second game round counter (the updating process in step S618 and step S918) in each game round is carried out under the condition that the specific period table is set. be. In a situation where the specific period table is not set (a situation where the normal table or the ceiling table is set), the first game counter and the second game counter are not measured.

After executing the start processing of step S2605, the values of the loop counters provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 are set in steps S2606 to S2610. The loop counter corresponds to the switching counter in the fourth embodiment, and is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the number of switching times of the variable display time table under predetermined conditions.

That is, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is based on the special unfavorable loss result B. If it is based on the disadvantageous special loss result B, in step S2607, a process of inputting "0" to the loop counter is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2606, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time was based on the disadvantageous special loss result C. If it is based on the disadvantageous special loss result C, a process of inputting "1" to the loop counter is executed in step S2609. A negative determination in step S2608 means that the opening/closing execution mode of this time was based on the disadvantageous special deviation result D. In this case, in step S2710, a process of inputting "3" to the loop counter is executed.

After executing any of the processing of step S2607, step S2609 and step S2610, after setting the specific period command as an output target to the effect control device 82 in step S2611, this switching processing is terminated. The specific period command includes information about setting in the specific period table and information about the value of the loop counter. The processing of the effect control device 82 that has received the specific period command will be described later in detail.

By being set in the specific period table, each variable display time is basically the second until the values of the first game counter and the second game counter reach a predetermined value ("50" in this embodiment). A set of 1 short variation and 2nd long variation is set, and the game round on the side of the first special figure ends first. Therefore, the opening/closing execution mode is basically executed based on the disadvantageous special loss results A to D (mostly the disadvantageous special loss result A), except for cases such as a jackpot result with a low probability. On the other hand, when the values of the first game counter and the second game counter become "50" or more, the fluctuation display time of the first long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation is set, and the second special figure side game Round will end first. In other words, it can be said that, by being set in the specific period table, it is possible to transition to a state in which a privilege is likely to be given by playing the game a predetermined number of times (50 times).

If it is determined in step S2601 that the current variation display time table is the specific period table, that is, if the processes after step S2604 have been executed prior to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, the process proceeds to step S2612.

In step S2612, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result. As already explained, in the situation where the variable display time table of the specific period table is set, the variable display time of the first short variation and the second long variation is set until the number of games reaches the predetermined number of times. Since the fluctuation display time of the first long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation is set after that, the opening and closing execution mode on the side of the first special figure is implemented until the number of games reaches the predetermined number, and after the predetermined number of times, the second special The open/close execution mode shown in the drawing is executed. Therefore, in a situation where the specific period table is set, the case where the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the advantageous special loss is implemented is relatively low as a result of the lottery on the side of the first special figure before reaching the predetermined number of times. It is either an advantageous special out of probability result or an advantageous special out result as a result of the winning lottery on the second special figure side after reaching a predetermined number of times. In this embodiment, in any of these cases, the specific period is to end, and if the determination in step S2612 is affirmative, in step S2613, the ceiling table is set as the switching destination of the current variable display time table. Execute the processing to be performed. Then, in step S2614, after executing the process of ending the measurement of the first game counter and the second game counter, this switching process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2612 that the opening/closing execution mode of this time is not based on the advantage/special loss result, the process advances to step S2615 to set the specific period table as the switching destination of the variable display time table of this time. to run. Then, in step S2616, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time is based on any one of the disadvantageous special deviation results B to D. If the result is none of the disadvantageous special loss results B to D (in most cases, the disadvantageous special loss result is A), this switching process is terminated as it is. In this case, all that is required is to reset the variable display time table to the specific period table.

If any one of the unfavorable and special outlier results B to D is determined in step S2516, addition processing of the loop counter is executed in steps S2517 to S2622. Specifically, in step S2617, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is based on the special unfavorable loss result B. If it is based on the disadvantageous special loss result B, in step S2618, a process of adding "2" to the loop counter is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2617, it is determined in step S2619 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode of this time was based on the disadvantageous special loss result C. If it is based on the disadvantageous special loss result C, in step S2620, a process of adding "4" to the loop counter is executed. A negative determination in step S2619 means that the opening/closing execution mode of this time was based on the disadvantageous special deviation result D. In this case, in step S2621, a process of adding "6" to the loop counter is executed.

After executing any of the processes of step S2618, step S2620 and step S2621, the addition information command is set as an output target to the effect control device 82 in step S2622. The addition information command is a command output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process, and contains the information of the numerical value added to the loop counter. Processing on the effect control device 82 side based on the reception of the addition information command will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the current variation display time table is the ceiling table, that is, if the process of step S2613 has been performed prior to the opening/closing execution mode of this time, the process proceeds to step S2623.

In step S2623, it is determined whether or not the loop counter is "0". If the loop counter is not "0", a process of subtracting 1 from the loop counter is executed in step S2624. Then, in step S2625, the ceiling table is set as the switching destination of the variable display time table this time, and then this switching process ends. If it is determined in step S2623 that the loop counter is "0", then in step S2626 the normal table is set as the switching destination of the variable display time table this time, and this switching process ends.

As described above, the variable display time table is set in the specific period table and becomes the specific period by executing the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss results B to D. Also, a value corresponding to the game result is input to the loop counter. The specific period ends with an open/close execution mode based on the special advantage loss result. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special out-of-range results B to D is executed during the specific period, addition processing of the loop counter is performed. When the specific period ends, the ceiling table is set until the loop counter reaches "0", and when the loop counter reaches "0", the normal table is set.

In other words, it becomes difficult to implement the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V win during the opening/closing execution mode until the 50th game, but after 50 games, the advantageous special loss result. and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning, and depending on the value of the loop counter, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning after a specific period is performed multiple times.

As described above, in the opening and closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result that triggers the end of the specific period, it is expected that a V prize will occur, and the V winning will continue to cause the opening and closing execution mode (16 rounds) based on the V winning. open/close execution mode) is implemented. In this case, although the ceiling table is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed regardless of the variable display time table. On the other hand, if the ceiling table is set after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning, the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss is implemented by the first long variation and the second short variation, and after the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning. If the ceiling table is not set (the normal table is set), the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage/special loss result is less likely to be executed.

In other words, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning that is implemented after the specific period is implemented via the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss. The opening/closing execution mode based on the result and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V win are repeated. Since a plurality of open/close execution modes are looped as a set in this way, the loop counter does not equal the number of times the opening/closing execution mode is executed based on the V winning, and a plurality of loop counter values are set for each of the execution times. are distributed. Specifically, when the value of the loop counter is "0" or "1", the open/close execution mode based on the V winning after the specific period is performed once, and the value of the loop counter is "2" or "3". , the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning after the specific period is performed twice, and when the value of the loop counter is "4" or "5", the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning after the specific period is performed three times. It is implemented several times.

<Production processing for a specific period on the production control device 82 side>
Next, an outline will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53 for the specific period effect processing executed on the effect control device 82 side. The specified period effect process is a process executed when the variable display time table is set to the specified period table in the process on the main control device 81 side. It should be noted that the following description will be made together with the display effect examples of FIGS.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the opening/closing execution mode. If it is not the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode, but if the change display time table switching process has not been executed on the main control device 81 side, the main effect process is ended as it is. If it is the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the current variable display time table is the specific period table and is in the specific period. If it is not a specific period, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not a specific period command has been received. As already explained, the specific period command is a command output when setting the specific period in the variable display time table switching process.

When the specific period command is received, at step S2704, the process of setting the production mode to the production mode for the specific period is executed. Also, in step S2705, a process of setting a specific period generation effect for notifying that the specific period has been set is executed. Then, in step S2706, the effect loop counter setting process is executed, and the present effect process ends. The performance loop counter corresponds to the loop counter on the main controller 81 side, and is set based on the loop counter information included in the specific period command. In step S2706, the number of times the open/close execution mode based on the V win is executed after the specified period is specified from the loop counter value (one of "0", "1", and "3") included in the specified period command. , a process of inputting a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value corresponding to the number of times to the performance loop counter is executed. Specifically, if the value of the loop counter included in the specific period command is "0", the open/close execution mode based on V winning is executed once, so "0" is input to the performance loop counter, and the loop counter If the value of is "1", the open/close execution mode based on V winning is executed twice, so input "1" to the performance loop counter, and if the value of the loop counter is "3", it is based on V winning. Since the opening/closing execution mode is executed three times, "2" is input to the performance loop counter. Also, if it is determined in step S2703 that the specific period command has not been received, the present effect processing is terminated as it is.

As the specific period occurrence rendering, as shown in FIG. 54(a), for example, "Chance time!" is displayed on the display screen G to indicate that the specific period will occur. Note that when the specific period table is set, the opening and closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss results B to D is executed, and the specific period occurrence effect is replaced with the ending effect etc. at the end of the opening and closing execution mode. It is possible to implement In other words, it is possible to perform such specific period generation effect in a situation where the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not performed, and effect using the entire display screen G can be performed.

The variable display time table switching process on the main controller 81 side is configured to be performed when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the opening/closing execution mode), and a specific period command is output when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. Then, not only the ending effect, but also the period during which other effects (opening effect, round effect, etc.) are performed in the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss results B to D are used to execute the specific period occurrence effect. can be configured. As a result, it is possible to ensure a long execution time of the specific period generation effect.

As an effect mode for a specific period, as shown in FIG. 54(b), a specific In the period display area GS, as a notification that it is during the specific period, "chance time is in progress" is displayed, and the number of remaining game rounds until the game round at which the variable display time set in the specific period is switched is displayed as "remaining". 50 times”. Also, the number of times the open/close execution mode based on the V winning is executed after the end of the specific period is displayed by the number of stock images SP. In this embodiment, at the start of the specific period, one stock image SP is displayed regardless of the value of the performance loop counter (see FIG. 54(b)). That is, at the start of the specific period, the player can understand that the open/close execution mode based on the V win can be performed once due to the elapse of the specific period.

Returning to the description of the effect processing for the specific period, if it is determined in step S2702 that it is during the specific period, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not an addition information command has been received. As already explained, the addition information command is a command that is output when the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special out results B to D is executed during a specific period, and includes information on the value to be added to the loop counter. ing. If it is determined in step S2707 that the addition information command has been received, then in step S2708 processing for adding the addition information to the performance loop counter is executed. Specifically, when the addition value of the loop counter is "2" as the addition information, "1" is added to the effect loop counter, and when the addition value of the loop counter is "4", the effect loop counter is set to " 2" is added, and when the added value of the loop counter is "6", "3" is added to the performance loop counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S2707, or if the process of step S2708 is finished, the process advances to step S2709. In step S2709, it is determined whether or not the value of the performance loop counter is "0". If it is "0", the present effect processing is terminated as it is.

If the value of the effect loop counter is not "0", a stock effect generation lottery is executed in step S2710. In the stock effect generation lottery, the fact that the value of the loop counter for effect is not '0' and that there is an unreported opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning executed after the elapse of the specified period is notified before the elapse of the specified period. It is a lottery whether or not to execute the stock effect for. The winning probability of the lottery is, for example, if the value of the performance loop counter is "1", the winning probability is 5%, if the value is "2", the winning probability is 10%, and if the value is "3", the winning probability is 10%. It may be set so that the higher the value of the production loop counter, the higher the winning probability, such as a 20% chance of winning. Also, the probability of winning the lottery may be changed according to the number of times the game is played or the number of remaining times during the specific period. For example, from the 1st to 10th times set in a specific period, the probability of winning is 5%, the probability of winning from the 11th to 30th time is 10%, and the probability of winning is 20% from the 31st time to the 49th time. , and the 50th time may be elected with a probability of 100%. Furthermore, the probability of winning the lottery may be changed according to the result of the game that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. For example, the configuration may be such that the player wins with a probability of 1% in the disadvantageous special losing result A, and wins with a probability of 100% in the disadvantageous special losing results B to D. Moreover, it is good also as winning probability which combined these. Furthermore, when there are a plurality of uninformed opening/closing execution modes, a lottery may be used to determine how many times to inform based on one win.

In step S2711, it is determined whether or not the stock effect is won based on the processing result of step S2710. In the case of non-winning, the present effect processing is terminated as it is. In the case of winning, a process of setting the stock effect is executed in step S2712, and a process of subtracting the number of opening/closing execution modes notified in the stock effect from the effect loop counter is executed in step S2713. After that, the present effect processing is terminated.

As the stock effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(c), after the variable display of the pattern in each game cycle is completed and the opening/closing execution mode is performed, the opening/closing execution based on the V winning that can be performed after a specific period of time. A stock increase image SC ("+1" in the figure) with a number corresponding to the increase in the number of modes is displayed. For example, in the case of a configuration in which opening and closing execution modes are notified a plurality of times in one stock effect, the number displayed in the stock increase image SC may be the numerical value for the plurality of times. The increased stock image SC moves to the area where the stock image SP is displayed while swaying, and by moving to the area where the stock image SP is displayed, the increased stock image SC is converted into the stock image SP for the attached number and displayed. (See FIG. 55(a)).

For example, if the winning probability of the stock effect is different depending on the game result, the stop result of the symbol corresponding to the game result may be the stop result suggesting the occurrence of the stock effect, or the stop result of the symbol and the stock effect It may be configured to perform a suggestive effect that suggests the occurrence of. In the case of a structure that suggests the occurrence of a stock effect depending on the result of stopping a symbol, for example, the winning probability and the stopping result are associated, and the higher the winning probability, the easier it is for the main symbol with a specific number (for example, 3) to stop. Alternatively, the more the number of open/close execution modes notified when winning, the easier it is for the main symbol with a specific numerical value (for example, 7) to stop. Further, as a suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. 54(c), "Cha" is displayed alongside the stop symbols of the upper symbol row Z1, and "Cha" is displayed alongside the stop symbols of the middle symbol row Z2. Every time each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops, part of the suggestive effect is performed such that "S" is displayed side by side with the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3. However, it may be configured such that the suggestion performance is completed as a series of performances by stopping all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. According to these configurations, it is conceivable that the player who expects the stock effect to occur during the specific period will pay great attention to the stoppage of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

In the configuration in which the occurrence of the stock effect is suggested by the result of stopping each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the variable display processing (FIG. 33) for setting the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 includes the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In the processing (step S1803) at the start of fluctuation of Z3, it is preferable to set the stop result and the like based on the occurrence probability of the stock effect. In addition, in the variable display processing, according to the number of times the game is played during the specified period, the configuration for updating the display of the specific period display area GS (specifically, the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 The display of the number of remaining games in the specific period is decremented by 1 and updated every time the is started).

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the specific period has passed and the number of remaining games becomes "0", the open/close execution mode is executed based on the result of the special advantage loss, and the variable display time table is switched to the ceiling table. The display of "during chance time" in the specific period display area GS is a display (e.g., "during V release mode", etc.) to notify that the open/close execution mode in which V winning is achieved by switching to the ceiling table is performed. display). By switching the variable display time table to the ceiling table, the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the advantage special loss on the side of the second special figure and the opening and closing execution mode of 16 rounds based on the V winning (V winning) in the opening and closing execution mode and are repeated for the number of times corresponding to the performance-side loop counter.

In the present embodiment, the performance control device 82 can specify the number of loops of the opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning by the performance loop counter, and the number of times of opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning is determined by the opening and closing execution mode. The number of times of execution can be stored so that it can be specified at the time of termination. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(c), at the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning executed in the situation where the performance loop counter becomes "0" (at the ending), the current specific period A number-of-times informing performance is executed for informing the number of opening/closing execution modes based on the V winning executed later. Further, for example, if the number of times is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times (three times), a display (“I did it!!” in the figure) as if congratulating the number of times is performed. By doing so, the player can clearly grasp that the specific period has ended, and it is also possible to grasp the number of opening and closing execution modes of 16 rounds performed during the specific period. , the player can be immersed in the afterglow of Renzhuang.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the variable display time is such that the game round on the first special figure side ends earlier than the second special figure side until the game round of the predetermined number of times is performed, and after the predetermined number of times By using a specific period table with a variable display time in which the game round on the second special figure side ends earlier than that on the first special figure side, by being set in the specific period table, the player can play a predetermined number of times If the game round is executed, it is possible to grasp that the opening and closing execution mode on the second special figure side, that is, the privilege of the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss will be obtained before the predetermined number of times. By doing so, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game. Moreover, unlike the so-called pre-reading notification related to the granting of the privilege of the game round related to the acquired win-or-fail determination information (such as the jackpot random number counter C1), before the win-fail determination information related to the game round after the predetermined number of times is acquired In addition, it is possible to grasp that the privilege is given based on the game round after the predetermined number of times (that the opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed), so that it is possible to realize novel gameplay different from the conventional one. It becomes possible to

Then, in such a specific period table, it is configured to be set not by the opening/closing execution mode in which a privilege such as an advantageous special loss result is substantially given, but by a part of the disadvantageous special loss result to which the benefit is not substantially given. did. By doing so, it is possible to make the player interested even in the result that no privilege is actually given as a game result of each game round, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Disadvantageous special loss results B to D are provided as game results set in the specific period table, and the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing execution mode of the disadvantageous special loss results B to D is also set in the special disadvantageous loss result A not set in the specific period table. It was made common, including By doing so, the player cannot recognize that the table is set for a specific period from the opening/closing mode in the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the performance. becomes.

After a specific period, the ceiling table is set so that the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss and the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning can be looped multiple times. As a result, the degree of advantage after the specific period has elapsed can be greatly varied, and the thrill of the game during the specific period can be made intense.

In this case, the number of loops is changed according to the type of disadvantageous special loss result. By doing so, the game result is associated with the number of rewards given (the number of rewards given), which makes it easier to adjust the throwing rate and prevents the phenomenon that the throwing rate differs significantly from the designed value. The occurrence can be suppressed.

The number of loops of the opening/closing execution mode based on the V win is increased by the game results of the game rounds performed during the specific period being the disadvantageous special loss results B to D. By doing this, the impression that the specific period is a waiting time until the opening and closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result is implemented is diluted, and conversely, how the disadvantageous special loss results B to D are determined during the specific period It is possible to set the game property such as whether the game result is drawn, and it is possible to greatly improve the game property during the specific period. From this point of view, the number of open/close execution modes based on the V win added by the disadvantageous special loss results B to D during the specific period may be larger than the number of times other than during the specific period. Conversely, if the number of times added during the specific period is made smaller than the number of times other than during the specific period, it is possible to provide game characteristics in which the increase in the ball put-out rate is suppressed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the switching conditions for switching the variable display time table from the normal table to the special table are different from those in the first embodiment. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 74. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, when the second condition is established under the condition that the first condition is established, the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure is switched from the normal table to the special table. there is For this reason, as shown in FIG. 56, a conditional random number counter CC is provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 as a counter for determining whether each condition of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. .

The conditional random number counter CC is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 39, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 39). The conditional random number counter CC is periodically updated (for example, updated at the same timing as the jackpot random number counter C1), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation hole 33, the reserved ball storage area 232 (first execution area RAE) of the RAM 204 ). The conditional random number counter CC is a dedicated random number for the first operating port 33, and even if a game ball wins the second operating port 34, it is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 (second execution area RBE) of the RAM 204. .

Determination of whether or not the first condition is established is performed using the conditional random number counter CC and the first condition table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 . In the table for the first condition, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the first condition is met when the value of the conditional random number counter CC is 7, and the first condition is not met when the value is other than 7. is set to That is, the first condition is set as a condition that is satisfied with a probability of 1/40.

The establishment determination of the first condition is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first operation opening 33, and specifically, the result of the win or failure determination when the game ball has won to the first operation opening 33 is special. This is done on the basis of being an outlier. That is, the establishment determination of the first condition is performed only when the winning result to the first operation port 33 is a special loss result, and when the result is a jackpot result or a normal loss result. is not performed.

Determination of whether or not the second condition is established is performed using the conditional random number counter CC and the second condition table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 . In the second condition table, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the second condition is satisfied when the value of the conditional random number counter CC is 7 or 17, and the second condition is satisfied when the value is other than 7 or 17. It is set so that the condition is not satisfied. That is, the second condition is set as a condition that is satisfied with a probability of 1/20.

The establishment determination of the second condition is, specifically, when the game ball enters the first operation port 33 under the condition that the first condition is established, the game ball enters the first operation port 33. This is done when the result of winning or not winning is a special loss result. In other words, the establishment determination of the second condition is not performed in a situation where the first condition is not established or when the success/failure determination result is a jackpot result or a normal failure result.

Next, the normal table and special table of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. (a) of FIG. 58 shows the normal table, and (b) shows the special table.

As shown in FIG. 58, the normal table and the special table show the relationship between the variation type counter CSA and the variation display time of the first special figure game round, and the variation type counter CSB and the variation display of the second special figure game round. It defines the relationship with time. These normal table and special table are stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 . Note that, unlike the variable display time table (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment, these two tables do not define the relationship with the game counter (the number of times the game is executed).

As shown in FIG. 58(a), the normal table is provided for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In the normal table for the first special figure, the first short variation (10.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 199/200, and the first long variation (30 .0 sec) is selected. On the other hand, in the normal table for the second special figure, the second long fluctuation (20.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 199/200 according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CSB, and the second short fluctuation with a probability of 1/200 (5.0 sec) is configured to be selected.

That is, in a situation where the normal table is used as the variable display time table, the first short variation is mostly selected as the variable display time of the game round of the first special symbol, and the variable display time of the game round of the second special symbol is selected. , most of which are configured to select the second length variation. In this case, as described in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the game round of the second special figure is started with a delay of 1.0 sec from the start of the game round of the first special figure, the second special figure The fluctuation display time for the first special figure tends to pass from the start of the first special figure faster than the variation display time for the second special figure from the start of the first special figure.

For this reason, when the winning lottery results of the first special figure and the second special figure are both special outlier results (see FIG. 9), the winning lottery result of the first special figure is easily validated. Since most of the special loss results of the first special figure are disadvantageous special loss results, the second variable winning device 32B is easily driven in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 356 (Fig. 30). reference). In other words, the state in which the normal table is used is a gaming state in which it is extremely difficult to establish the V prize, which is the condition for awarding the V jackpot. It should be noted that, as already explained, when the V prize is established, the V jackpot is awarded as a benefit.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the special table is provided for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In the special table for the first special figure, the first short variation is selected with a probability of 190/200 and the first long variation is selected with a probability of 10/200 (1/20) according to the value of the variation type counter CSA. configured to be On the other hand, in the special table for the second special figure, the second long variation is selected with a probability of 190/200 according to the value of the variation type counter CSB, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 10/200 (1/20). is configured to be selected.

That is, in the situation where the special table is used as the variable display time table, the first long variation is more likely to be selected as the variable display time for the game round of the first special figure than in the case of the normal table, and the second special figure is displayed. The second short variation is likely to be selected as the variation display time of the game round. In this case, compared to the case of the normal table, the second special figure is displayed from the start of the second special figure faster than the fluctuation display time for the first special figure from the start of the first special figure. A specific state of elapse of the variable display time for illustration is more likely to occur. And when a specific state occurs, the result of the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure is activated, and most of the special loss results of the second special figure are advantageous special loss results, so it is almost certain that the second The variable winning device 32B is driven in a manner that facilitates V winning (see FIG. 31). In other words, when the special table is used as the variable display time table, V winning is more likely to occur than when the normal table is used, which is advantageous for the player.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state 601, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball wins in the first operating port 33 and the result of winning/failure determination corresponding to the winning becomes a big hit result (the result of the winning/failure lottery of the first special figure or the second special figure is the big winning result), opening and closing The game state after the end of the execution mode is set to the advantageous state 603 . The advantageous state 603 is a state in which the special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this embodiment, the advantageous state 603 corresponds to the "second gaming state".

Also, in the normal state 601, when a game ball wins in the first operation port 33 and the result of the win/loss determination corresponding to the win becomes a special loss result, it is determined whether the first condition is met. When the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601 , the state shifts to the precursor state 602 .

In the precursor state 602, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. That is, when the normal state 601 shifts to the portent state 602, the variable display time table is not switched, and the selection state of the normal table is maintained as it is. In the sign state 602, when the result of the winning lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit result, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends is set to the advantageous state 603 as in the case of the normal state 601. be done. In this embodiment, the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602 correspond to the "first game state".

In the portent state 602, when a game ball wins in the first operation hole 33 and the win/loss determination result corresponding to the win becomes a special loss result, it is determined whether the second condition is met. When the second condition is met in the precursor state 602 , the state transitions to the advantageous state 603 . That is, when the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, it is also possible to transition to the advantageous state 603 via the precursor state 602. FIG.

That is, in the state in which the first condition is not satisfied, the transition route to the advantageous state 603 is limited to the case where the winning lottery result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit result, but the first condition is After establishment, there are two cases, that is, the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit result, and the case where the second condition is established after the first condition is established.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first condition is met, the number of transition routes increases, making it easier to transition to the advantageous state 603 than when the first condition is not met. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting the first condition to be established while aiming for the big winning result of the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Here, the portent state 602 is configured to end when the number of executions of the first special figure game cycle from its start reaches 20 times (upper limit number). Therefore, if the second condition is established before the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure reaches the 21st time after the transition to the portent state 602, the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, but the second condition is not established and the 20th first special figure game cycle ends, the establishment state of the first condition is cancelled, and the state returns to the normal state 601.例文帳に追加Therefore, after the first condition is satisfied, the player plays the game with the aim of satisfying the second condition before the number of executions of the game round of the first special symbol reaches 20 times.

The advantageous state 603 is configured to end when the number of executions of the second special figure game cycle from its start reaches 10 times (upper limit number). In the advantageous state 603, the second variable winning device 32B is easily driven in a V winning mode, and when the game ball passes through the V winning area 356, it becomes a V jackpot, and the opening/closing execution mode for the V jackpot is executed. be. When the 10th game round of the second special figure ends without the V prize being established, the game state shifts to the normal state 601 and the advantageous state 603 ends. Also, when the V jackpot is won, the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is set to the normal state 601.例文帳に追加

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the following description, the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

<First game round control process>
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the first game round control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment. In FIG. 60, the processes of steps S3001 and S3002 are different from the first game round control process of FIG. 16 according to the first embodiment.

In the first game round control process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, after executing the process of step S505 in the same manner as the first game round control process of the first embodiment, the first game round control process is executed in step S3001. 1 Tokuzu for fluctuation start processing (processing for the first fluctuation start) is executed.

In the first fluctuation start process, as shown in FIG. 61, the propriety determination process for the first special figure is executed in steps S601 to S603. If the result of the success/failure determination is a jackpot, the jackpot type distribution processing (16R jackpot, 8R jackpot) is performed in steps S604 and S605, and then the stop result is set according to the distribution results in steps S606 to S610. Perform processing and flag setting.

In step S603, if the result of the win/loss determination is not a big hit, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the result of the win/deny determination is a special loss result. If the result is a special failure, in step S3101, condition satisfaction determination processing for determining whether or not the first and second conditions are satisfied is executed.

<Condition Satisfaction Judgment Processing>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the condition satisfaction determination process in step S3101.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the condition establishment determination process, the establishment status of the first condition and the second condition at that point in time is confirmed in steps S3201 and S3202. If the first condition has already been met, it is determined in steps S3205 and S3206 that the second condition is met.

Specifically, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The second establishment flag indicates that the second condition has already been established, in other words, that the game state has shifted to the advantageous state 603 . This second establishment flag is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result) executed after the game round of the first special figure ends.

If the second establishment flag is not stored, that is, if the game state is the normal state 601 or the precursor state 602, in step S3202, whether the first establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. determine whether or not The first fulfillment flag indicates that the first condition has already been fulfilled, in other words, that the state has transitioned to the precursor state 602 . This first establishment flag is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result) executed after the end of the game round of the first special figure in which the first condition is established.

If the first establishment flag is not stored, that is, if the game state is the normal state 601, in step S3203, the first condition table (FIG. 57(a)) of the ROM 203 is acquired, and the first condition is established (first condition establishment judgment processing). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the conditional random number counter CC stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set to satisfy the first condition.

If the first condition is satisfied, a first flag indicating that the first condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S3204. After execution of step S3204 or when a negative determination is made in step S3203 (when the first condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag is stored in step S3202, that is, if the game state is the precursor state 602, in step S3205, the second condition table (FIG. 57(b)) of the ROM 203 is changed. Then, a process of determining whether or not the second condition is satisfied (second condition satisfaction determination process) is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the conditional random number counter CC stored in the first execution area RAE matches the value set to satisfy the second condition.

If the second condition is satisfied, a second flag indicating that the second condition is satisfied is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S3206. After execution of step S3206 or when a negative determination is made in step S3205 (when the second condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 204, the condition establishment determination processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S3202. . In other words, when the gaming state is the advantageous state 603, the first and second condition determination processing is not executed. As a result, the first condition is satisfied during the transition to the advantageous state 603 and the transition to the premonitory state 602 occurs, and the second condition is satisfied during the advantageous state 603 and the specified number of times is reset to 10 times. inconvenience is avoided.

Returning to the description of FIG. 61, after executing the condition establishment determination process of step S3101, in step S612, it is determined whether or not the special loss result is an advantage special loss result, and then in steps S613 to S616. Stop result setting processing and flag setting are performed according to the distribution result. If a negative determination is made in step S611, a stop result setting process for normal deviation is executed in step S617. After execution of steps S608, S610, S614, S616, and S617, in step S3102, setting processing of the variation display time (first variation display time) of the game round of the first special figure is performed.

<Processing for setting the first variable display time>
FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the variable display time setting process in step S3102.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the setting process of the first variable display time, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. If the second establishment flag is not stored, in step S3302, the normal table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 as the variable display time table for the first special figure (Fig. ). In the following step S3303, the normal table is referred to, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is acquired, and set as the variable display time for the game round of the first special figure. do.

On the other hand, when the second establishment flag is stored in step S3301, the special table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is stored as the variable display time table for the first special figure in step S3304. Select (FIG. 58(b)). Then, in step S3303, with reference to the special table, the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is acquired, and the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure is acquired. set as

After executing the process of step S3303, the process of starting the variable display of step S620 of FIG. 61 is executed, and the first process for starting the fluctuation is completed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 60, after executing the forced end command setting processing in step S512 or the variable end command setting processing in step S516, in step S3002, a command for transitioning from the precursor state 602 to the normal state 601 is executed. Execute the condition cancellation process.

<Condition Cancellation Process>
FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the condition canceling process in step S3002.

The condition cancellation process is a process for returning to the normal state 601 when the end condition is satisfied in the precursor state 602 . As shown in FIG. 64, in the condition canceling process, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the first establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . If the first satisfaction flag is not stored, that is, if the first condition is not satisfied and the precursor state 602 is not set, the condition canceling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag is stored in step S3401, the game counter area CG1 is decremented by 1 in step S3402. The game round counter area CG1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the game round of the first special figure is executed after the precursor state 602 is started. In this embodiment, when the first establishment flag is stored, 20 is set in the game round counter area CG1, and this is decremented by 1 according to the end of the game round of the first special figure. The process of setting 20 in the game counter area CG1 will be described later.

After executing the processing of step S3402, in step S3403, it is determined whether or not the value of the game round counter area CG1 is 0, that is, whether or not the number of times the game round of the first special figure has been executed has reached 20 times. determine whether When the value of the game counter area CG1 is 0, the first establishment flag stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S3404.

When the first establishment flag is erased in this way, a negative judgment is made in step S3202 of the condition establishment judgment processing (FIG. 62) when executing the first fluctuation start processing next time, and it is judged that the second condition is established. is no longer performed. In other words, by erasing the first satisfaction flag, the satisfaction state of the first condition is cancelled, and the precursor state 602 ends.

In the following step S3405, a first condition end command is set. In this process, the process of outputting the information that the portent state 602 has ended to the effect control device 82 is performed. The first condition end command set in step S3405 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15). After execution of step S3405 or when a negative determination is made in step S3403, the condition canceling process is terminated.

<Second game round control process>
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the second game round control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment. In FIG. 65, the processes of steps S3501 and S3502 are different from the second game round control process of FIG. 19 according to the first embodiment.

In the second game round control process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, after the process of step S805 is executed in the same manner as the second game round control process of the first embodiment, the second game round control process is executed in step S3501. 2 Execute the fluctuation start process.

In the second fluctuation start process, as shown in FIG. 66, after executing the processes of steps S908, S910, S914, and S916, in step S3601, the fluctuation display time of the game round of the second special figure (the second fluctuation display time) is set. As shown in FIG. 67, the process for setting the second variable display time is similar to the process for setting the first variable display time in FIG. That is, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the normal table (FIG. 58(a)) is referred to. The variable display time of the game round of the 2nd special figure is set (steps S3702, S3703), and if it is stored, the variable display time of the game round of the 2nd special figure is referred to the special table (FIG. 58(b)). is set (steps S3704 and S3703).

Returning to the description of FIG. 65, after executing the forced end command setting process in step S812 or the variable end command setting process in step S816, in step S3502, the table for transitioning from the advantageous state 603 to the normal state 601 Execute return processing.

<Table return processing>
FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing table recovery processing in step S3502.

The table return processing is processing for returning from the advantageous state 603 to the normal state 601 when the termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603 . As shown in FIG. 68, in the table return processing, first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. If the second satisfaction flag is not stored, that is, if the second condition is not satisfied and the advantageous state 603 has not been reached, the table return processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the second establishment flag is stored in step S3801, the game counter area CG2 is decremented by 1 in step S3802. The game round counter area CG2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed after the advantageous state 603 is started. In this embodiment, when the second establishment flag is stored, 10 is set in the game round counter area CG2, and this is decremented by 1 according to the end of the game round of the second special figure. The process of setting 10 in the game counter area CG2 will be described later.

After execution of step S3802, in step S3803, it is determined whether or not the value of the game round counter area CG2 is 0, that is, whether or not the number of times the game round of the second special figure has been executed has reached 10 times. do. When the value of the game counter area CG2 is 0, the second establishment flag stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S3804. As a result, the state in which the second condition is established is cancelled, and the advantageous state 603 ends.

In the following step S3805, a table return command is set. In this process, the process of outputting the information that the advantageous state 603 has ended to the effect control device 82 is performed. The table return command set in step S3805 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15). After execution of step S3805 or when a negative determination is made in step S3803, the table return processing is terminated.

<Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode>
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment. This transition process is the step S1016 of the game state transition process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, that is, the result of the determination of whether the first special figure and the second special figure is a jackpot result or a special loss result. It is executed at the end of the corresponding open/close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, table switching processing is executed in step S3901. The table switching process is a process for switching the reference table when setting the variable display time of each game round of the first special figure and the second special figure.

<Table switching processing>
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing table switching processing in step S3901.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the table switching process, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The first winning flag is stored when the winning judgment result of the first special figure is a jackpot result (see step S604 in FIG. 17), and the second winning flag is the winning judgment result of the second special figure. is the jackpot result (see step S904 in FIG. 20).

If neither the first winning flag nor the second winning flag is stored, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4102. The V winning flag is stored when the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B passes through the V winning area 356 (see step S1205 in FIG. 23).

If the V winning flag is stored, the table switching process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not stored, the first side advantageous opening flag or the second It is determined whether or not the 1 side unfavorable opening flag is stored. The first side advantageous open flag and the first side unfavorable open flag are stored when the result of the determination of whether the first special figure is a special off result (see steps S614 and S616 in FIG. 17). That is, step S4103 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special loss result of the first special figure.

In addition, when the game round of the second special figure is validated (the game round of the first special figure is invalidated) and the opening and closing execution mode corresponds to the special loss result of the second special figure, the first In the forced termination process (step S511) of the first game round control process (FIG. 16) for controlling the special figure game round, the release flag of the first special figure is erased. Therefore, even if the first side advantageous opening flag or the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored in the storage area 234 at the start of fluctuation of the first special figure, at the time of determination in step S4103, those opening flags is not stored in the storage area 234 . In other words, the affirmative determination in step S4103 is limited to the case where the result of the judgment of the first special figure is a special out-of-match result and the game turn of the first special figure corresponding to the judgment of the success or failure is activated.

If the first side advantageous opening flag or the first side unfavorable opening flag is stored, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the first flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The first flag is stored based on the establishment of the first condition (see steps S3203 and S3204 in FIG. 62). That is, step S4104 is for determining whether or not the first condition has been established in the success/failure determination (game round) of the first special figure that triggered the opening/closing execution mode.

If the first flag is stored, it means that the first condition is satisfied. Further, in step S4105, processing for erasing the first flag stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In this way, by performing table switching setting processing at the end of the open/close execution mode, the normal state 601 is maintained in the game round in which the first condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the precursor state 602 from the next game round.

Next, in step S4106, 20 is set to the value of the game counter area CG1 for the first special figure. As already explained, the game round counter area CG1 is for counting the number of times the game round of the first special figure is executed after transitioning to the precursor state 602 .

In subsequent step S4107, a first establishment command is set. In this process, the process of outputting the information that the portent state 602 is started to the effect control device 82 is performed. The first establishment command set in step S4107 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15).

On the other hand, if the first flag is not stored in step S4104, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the second flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The second flag is stored based on the establishment of the second condition (see steps S3205 and S3206 in FIG. 62). That is, step S4108 is for determining whether or not the second condition has been established in the win/loss determination (game round) of the first special figure that triggered the opening/closing execution mode.

If the second flag is stored, it means that the second condition is satisfied. In this case, the first satisfaction flag stored in RAM 204 is erased in step S4109, and the A second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 . Also, in step S4110, if the RAM 204 second flag is stored, processing for erasing it is also performed. By performing the table switching setting process at the end of the open/close execution mode in this way, the premonitory state 602 is maintained in the game round in which the second condition is satisfied, and transitions to the advantageous state 603 from the next game round.

Next, in step S4111, 10 is set to the value of the game counter area CG2 for the second special figure. As already explained, the game round counter area CG2 is for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed after shifting to the advantageous state 603 .

In subsequent step S4112, a second establishment command is set. In this process, the process of outputting the information that the advantageous state 603 is started to the effect control device 82 is performed. The second establishment command set in step S4112 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 15). After execution of step S4112 or when a negative determination is made in step S4108, the table switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4103, that is, if the first side advantageous opening flag or the first side unfavorable opening flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, the processing from step S4104 is executed. Without doing so, the table switching process ends. As already explained, when the game round of the first special figure is invalidated by the game round of the second special figure, the negative determination is made in step S4103, so the first condition at the start of the fluctuation of the first special figure and the second condition are met, the transition to the precursor state 602 and the transition to the advantageous state 603 (table switching processing) are not executed, and the satisfaction of each condition is cancelled. For this reason, the presence or absence of transition to the portent state 602 or the advantageous state 603 can be determined not only by the selection of the variable display time of the game rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but also by the winning of the game ball to the second operation port 34. It can also be associated with the presence or absence of the prize, the winning timing, and the like. In other words, even if the lottery result based on the winning to the first operating port 33 is the result corresponding to the state transition or table switching, the processing performed based on the winning or winning to the second operating port 34 It can also be said that it is possible to provide a case where state transition etc. is permitted and a case where it is restricted. You can do it, and it will increase your interest.

In addition, in step S4101, when the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the RAM 204, it means that the result of the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit result. In this case, the process advances to step S4110 to store the second establishment flag in the RAM 204 . As a result, the state transitions to the advantageous state 603 without going through the precursor state 602 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the production control device 82>
Next, the configuration for performing various effects will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated. In addition, it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 242, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, as commands related to the game times of the first special figure and the second special figure, the variation command for the first special figure and the second special figure, the type command, the forced end command, the variation end command, etc. receive. Also, as commands related to the opening/closing execution mode, an opening command, opening command, closing command, ending command, etc. are received. Further, as commands related to the first condition and the second condition, a first satisfied command (first condition satisfied information), a second satisfied command (second condition satisfied information), a first condition end command (first condition cancel information), table return command (cancellation information for second condition), etc.

Various table storage areas 245 are set in the ROM 243 to store various tables used in executing various control processes received from the main controller 81 . The RAM 244 also includes various flag storage areas 247 used for executing various control processes, a command storage area 248 for temporarily storing commands received from the main control unit 81, and a command storage area 248 for executing various control processes. Various counter areas 249 are set for use in doing so. The command storage area 248 is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can read out from the previously stored commands.

As shown in FIG. 71, the output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 65 provided on the front door frame 14 as already described, and the display control device 212 is also connected. ing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 212>
The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which are mounted an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257. there is

The MPU 252 receives commands for displaying various effects from the effect control device 82 . Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 255).

The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252 . These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254 .

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 255 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 252 and the video RAM 257 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 256 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 256 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 256 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 .

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

<Special effect processing>
Next, the special effect processing executed on the effect control device 82 side will be described. In the special effect processing, the display control device 212 is controlled so that the special effect display is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 when the first and second conditions are met. Here, the contents of the special effect display will be described with reference to FIG. 72 prior to the explanation of the special effect processing.

A special effect display A shown in FIG. 72(b) and a special effect display B shown in FIG. 72(c) are set as the special effect display. FIG. 72(a) shows the normal effect display, and the normal effect display is the same as that described with reference to FIG.

The special effect display A suggests to the player that the first condition has been met and the state has shifted to the portent state 602 , that is, that the state is likely to shift to the advantageous state 603 . As the special effect display A, for example, a character display 611 such as a telop display of the characters "in chance mode" is performed on the upper and lower parts of the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, or the background color of the display screen G is changed to normal. A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color different from the effect display (FIG. 72(a)) is conceivable. Further, in the special display effect A, since the portent state 602 is a state of cutting the number of times, a remaining number of times display 612 indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the portent state 602 ends is also performed at the corner of the display screen G.

The special display effect B suggests to the player that the second condition has been established, that is, that the premonitory state 602 has shifted to the advantageous state 603 . As the special effect display B, for example, instead of the character display 611 of the special effect display A, a character display 613 such as a telop display of the characters "Intense heat mode" is performed, or the background color of the display screen G is changed to a normal effect. A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color different from both the display and the special display effect A can be considered. Furthermore, in the special display effect B, since the advantageous state 603 is the state of cutting the number of times, a remaining number of times display 614 indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the advantageous state 603 ends is also performed in the upper left part of the display screen G.

<Processing for starting special effects>
Next, a special effect process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. First, the special effect start processing for starting the special effect display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the special effect start process is activated at predetermined intervals (2 msec).

In the special effect start processing, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the command for variation of the first special figure transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. When the command for variation of the first special figure is not received, the processing for starting the special effect is terminated.

On the other hand, if the variation command of the first special figure is received, it is determined whether or not the first establishment command from the main control device 81 is received in step S4202. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first established command is stored in the command storage area 248 of the RAM 244 .

In addition, while the command for the variation of the first special figure is transmitted at the start of the variation of the first special figure, the first establishment command is transmitted at the end of the opening and closing execution mode (see FIGS. 60, 70, and 15) , the first establishment command to be determined in step S4202 is the one transmitted in the opening/closing execution mode executed immediately before the game cycle in which the variation command in step S1101 was transmitted.

If the first establishment command has been received in step S4202, it means that a transition to the precursor state 602 is made. In this case, in step S4203, the first special effect start processing for displaying the special effect display A (FIG. 72(b)) is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, and then the special effect is started. end the processing.

In the first special effect start process of step S4203, a command including information on the content of the special effect display A is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special effect display A from the character ROM 256 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

As a result, the special effect display A is displayed in synchronism with the start of the variable display (see FIG. 6) in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. It should be noted that the special effect display A does not necessarily have to be displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and may be displayed at a timing before the start of the fluctuation or after the start of the fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the first establishment command has not been received in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the second establishment command from main controller 81 has been received in step S4204. If the second establishment command is received in step S4204, it means that the state is shifted to the advantageous state 603. FIG. In this case, in step S4205, the second special effect start processing is executed for displaying the special effect display B (FIG. 72(c)) on the display screen G, and then the special effect start processing is terminated. .

In the second special effect start process of step S4205, a command including information on the content of the special effect display B is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the special effect display B from the character ROM 256 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

As a result, the special effect display B is displayed in synchronization with the start of the variable display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Note that the special effect display B does not necessarily have to be displayed at the start timing of the fluctuation, and may be displayed before the start of the fluctuation or after the start of the fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the second establishment command has not been received in step S4204, that is, if neither the first or second establishment command has been received, in step S4206 the special effect display A is displayed on the display screen G. A display lottery process for displaying is executed. This display lottery process is performed using a display lottery determination table stored in the various table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 and a display lottery random number counter stored in the various counter area 249 of the RAM 244 . The random number counter for the display lottery is updated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec), and the winning probability of the display lottery is set to 1/100, for example.

In subsequent step S4207, it is determined whether or not the display lottery is won based on the lottery result of step S4206. If the display lottery is won, the process advances to step S4208 to execute a third special effect start process for displaying the special effect display A on the display screen G. The processing of step S4208 is the same as that of step S4203, so that the special display effect A is displayed on the display screen G even when the first condition is not met.

As a result, the establishment of the first condition cannot be uniquely determined from the execution of the special performance display A, and when the special performance display A is displayed, it is estimated whether the first condition is established as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加It is possible to add enjoyment and the thrill of proceeding with the game without it being clear whether the first condition is satisfied.

In particular, in the present embodiment, determination of whether the first condition is satisfied is performed based on a conditional random number counter CC different from the jackpot random number counter C1, and is stopped and displayed in the first special figure display portion AS of the main display portion 37. It is not possible to grasp the establishment of the first condition from the pattern (set in step S616 of FIG. 61, the stop result corresponding to the fact that the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol is a disadvantage special loss result). That is, it is impossible to specify whether the first condition is satisfied, and it is possible to effectively increase the enjoyment of guessing whether the first condition is satisfied and the thrill of not knowing whether the first condition is satisfied. .

It should be noted that it is also possible to determine whether the first condition is established based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In this configuration, the first special figure display portion AS of the main display portion 37 is displayed depending on whether the jackpot random number counter C1 has a value corresponding to the establishment of the first condition or a value not corresponding to the establishment of the first condition. It is preferable to use the same pattern as the pattern stopped and displayed at . As a result, it becomes impossible to grasp the establishment of the first condition from the type of the picture that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above.

After the processing of step S4208 is executed, 20 is set in the game round counter area SCG1 provided in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244 in step S4209. The game round counter area SCG1 is for counting the game rounds of the first special figure on the effect control device 82 side. By executing the process of step S4209, the display period of the special effect display A is set to the period during which the game round of the first special figure is executed 20 times. The reason why the special effect display A is terminated when the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure reaches 20 corresponds to the establishment state of the first condition (transition period of the precursor state 602). . Note that the display period of the special effect display A does not necessarily have to be the same as the period during which the first condition is established, and may be shorter or longer than the period during which the first condition is established. After execution of step S4208 or when a negative determination is made in step S4207, the special effect start processing is terminated.

<Processing for ending special effects>
Next, the special effect ending process for ending the special effect process will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that the processing for ending the special effect is also activated at predetermined intervals (2 msec).

In the special effect start process, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the first special figure fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. When the fluctuation end command of the first special figure is not received, the special effect end processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation end command of the first special figure is received, in step S4302, during execution of the first special effect, that is, whether the special effect display A is being displayed based on the establishment of the first condition determine whether or not If the first special effect is being executed, it is determined in step S4303 whether or not the first condition end command from the main controller 81 has been received. The first end condition command is a command indicating the end of the satisfied state of the first condition (precursor state 602).

If the first end condition command has been received, that is, if the first condition has been met, in step S4304, a first special effect end process for ending the display of the special effect display A is performed. . After execution of step S4304 or when the first end condition command is not received in step S4303, the special effect end processing is ended. Note that the display period of the special effect display A does not necessarily have to be the same as the period during which the first condition is established, and may be shorter or longer than the period during which the first condition is established.

On the other hand, if the first special effect is not being executed in step S4302, the process advances to step S4305 to determine whether the second special effect is being executed, that is, whether the special effect display B is being displayed based on the establishment of the second condition. determine whether If the second special effect is being executed, it is determined in step S4306 whether or not a table return command from the main controller 81 has been received. The table return command is a command indicating the end of the state in which the second condition is satisfied (advantageous state 603).

If the table return command has been received, that is, if the second condition has been satisfied, then in step S4307, a second special effect end process for ending the display of the special effect display B is performed. Note that the display period of the special effect display B does not necessarily have to be the same as the transition period of the advantageous state 603, and may be shorter or longer than the transition period. After execution of step S4307 or when the second end condition command is not received, the special effect end processing is ended.

Further, if the second special effect is not being executed in step S4305, it is determined whether the third special effect is being executed, that is, whether the special effect display A is being displayed under the condition that the first condition is not satisfied. judge. When the third special effect is being executed, after the value of the game counter area SCG1 is decremented by 1 in step S4309, it is determined whether or not the value of the game counter area SCG1 is 0 in step S4310. do. When the value of the game time counter area SCG1 is 0, in step S4311, a first special effect ending process for ending the display of the special effect display A is performed. After execution of step S4311, if negative determinations are made in steps S4308 and S4310, the special effect end processing is terminated.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the number of transition routes is increased, and the transition to the advantageous state 603 is facilitated.

For example, if the transition difficulty to the advantageous state 603 is made uniform, when the state in which the transition to the advantageous state 603 is not possible continues, the expectation corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state 603 gradually becomes less likely to be felt, and the game progresses. It may lead to a decrease in motivation. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, since the degree of difficulty in transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is eased when the first condition is satisfied, even if a situation occurs in which the state of not transitioning to the advantageous state 603 continues, there is a sense of anticipation. It can be aroused, and it becomes possible to maintain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add the fun of making it easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 according to the game situation, thereby improving the amusement.

After the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the game state is shifted to the advantageous state 603 when the second condition is satisfied.

In the conventional pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability state where the result of the winning lottery is likely to be a winning result, etc.) in units of one winning to the operation hole. It is assumed that the player can enjoy the game only for each win as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous game state. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made by establishing the first and second conditions step by step. If the second condition is not satisfied in subsequent winnings, the game does not shift to the second game state. As a result, the player can enjoy whether or not the game transitions to the advantageous state 603 over a plurality of game rounds, thereby improving the amusement.

After establishment of the first condition, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state 603 based on the establishment of the second condition before the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and further, When the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure reaches a predetermined number while the second condition is not established, the establishment of the first condition is cancelled.

If a configuration is adopted in which the establishment of the second condition is permitted indefinitely after the establishment of the first condition, the game must be continued after the establishment of the first condition until the second condition is established. If so, it is possible to preferably avoid this and improve playability. Further, by canceling the establishment of the first condition, it becomes possible to face the game with a certain sense of tension after the establishment of the first condition, which improves the amusement.

After the special performance display A is displayed when the first condition is satisfied, the special display performance A is displayed by lottery even when the first condition is not satisfied.

While indicating to the player that the first condition may be satisfied, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the establishment of the first condition cannot be uniquely determined from the special display effect A.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of guessing whether the first condition is satisfied and the thrill of proceeding with the game without it being clear whether the first condition is satisfied.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the switching conditions for switching the variable display time table from the normal table to the special table are different from those in the sixth embodiment. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to the said 6th Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, the conditional random number counter CC of the sixth embodiment is not provided, and based on the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1, the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure is changed from the normal table to the special It is configured to switch to a table. Specifically, the variable display time table is switched based on the type of special outlier result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of disadvantageous special loss results are set in the first special figure win/loss table. 75 are added for convenience, and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the right/wrong table for the first special figure, six types of disadvantageous special losing results A to F are set as types of disadvantageous special losing results. These disadvantageous special loss results A to F are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1. In the suitability judgment for the first special figure, the probability of becoming a special disadvantageous result A and the probability of becoming a disadvantageous special result B are both set to 1/40, and the probability of becoming a disadvantageous special result C is 1/ It is set to 30. In addition, the probability of the unfavorable special outlier result D is set to 1/10, the probability of the unfavorable special outright result E is set to 475/600, and the probability of the unfavorable special unsuccessful result F is set to 1/50. is set to In other words, when the result is a disadvantageous special outage result in the judgment for the first special figure, it is configured to be a disadvantageous special outage result E, and occasionally other disadvantageous special outage results A to D, F. there is It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the above-described disadvantageous special losing results A to F are merely examples, and are not limited to the above.

By the way, if the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the success/failure determination for the first special figure, the driving mode of the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 regardless of whether the type is any of the disadvantageous special loss results A to F are set to be the same. That is, the ease with which a game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B and the ease with which a game ball passes through the V winning area 356 are common in the disadvantageous special loss results A to F. Specifically, in any of the disadvantageous special loss results A to F, the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 are arranged in such a manner that passage through the V winning area 356 in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment is unlikely to occur. Drive controlled.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76 and 77 are state transition diagrams showing internal state transitions of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the normal state 601, the normal table (FIG. 58(a)) is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball wins in the first operating port 33, determination of establishment of the first condition A and determination of establishment of the first condition B are performed.

The first condition A is that the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the suitability determination of the first special figure, and the type is the disadvantageous special loss result A. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above. On the other hand, the first condition B is that the special unfavorable out-of-out result is obtained in the suitability determination of the first special figure, and the type is the special unfavorable out-of-order result B. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

When the first condition A or the first condition B is satisfied in the normal state 601 , the state shifts to the precursor state 602 . In the following, in order to distinguish between the portent state 602 shifted due to the establishment of the first condition A and the portent state 602 shifted due to the establishment of the first condition B, the former will be referred to as a first portent state 602a, and the latter will be referred to as a first portent state 602a. Referred to as a second precursor state 602b.

In the first precursor state 602a, when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, establishment determination of the second condition A is performed, and in the second precursor state 602b, when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, the second It is determined whether 2 conditions B are established.

The second condition A is that, in the first precursor state 602a, the judgment of whether or not the first special symbol is appropriate results in a disadvantageous special loss result, and the type is a disadvantageous special loss result C. This probability is set to 1/30 as described above. On the other hand, the second condition B is that, in the second precursor state 602b, the judgment of whether the first special figure is appropriate results in a disadvantageous special loss result, and the type is a disadvantageous special loss result D. This probability is set to 1/10, which is higher than the second condition A. Incidentally, in the normal state 601, the second condition A is not satisfied even if the result of the determination of whether the first special figure is right or wrong is the unfavorable special loss result C. Similarly, in the normal state 601, the second condition B is not established even if the result of the determination of whether the first special figure is a disadvantage special loss result D.

In the first precursor state 602a and the second precursor state 602b, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. That is, when the normal state 601 shifts to the first precursor state 602a or the second precursor state 602b, the variable display time table is not switched, and the selection state of the normal table is maintained as it is. Therefore, in this embodiment, the normal state 601, the first precursor state 602a and the second precursor state 602b correspond to the "first game state".

When the second condition A or the second condition B is satisfied in the portent states 602a and 602b, the variable display time tables for the first special figure and the second special figure are switched, and the special table (Fig. 58(b) )) is selected. In this embodiment, the advantageous state 603 corresponds to the "second gaming state".

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is better to go through the second precursor state 602b based on the establishment of the first condition B than to go through the first precursor state 602a based on the establishment of the first condition A. The configuration is such that it is easy to shift to

Therefore, the player will be more pleased with the second precursor state 602b than the first precursor state 602a, and will play the game with priority given to the transition to the second precursor state 602b. However, as the route to transition to the advantageous state 603, two routes are set: a first route passing through the first precursor state 602a and a second route passing through the second precursor state 602b. Even if the establishment of B is missed, the game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of the first condition A.

Incidentally, in the first precursor state 602a, even if the suitability determination result of the first special symbol becomes the disadvantageous special out-of-result D, the transition to the advantageous state 603 does not occur, and in the second precursory state 602b, the suitability determination result of the first special symbol is Even if it becomes disadvantageous special loss result C, it does not shift to advantageous state 603 . Also, in the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, if the result of the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit result, the opening and closing execution is performed in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment. The game state after the mode ends is an advantageous state 603 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, after the transition to the precursor state 602, mutual transition between the first precursor state 602a and the second precursor state 602b is possible.

Specifically, when the upgrade condition is satisfied in the first precursor state 602a, the first precursor state 602a is shifted to the second precursor state 602b. The promotion condition is that the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the first special figure determination in the first precursor state 602a, and the type is the disadvantageous special loss result B. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

In this way, since it is possible to upgrade from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b, it is possible to aim to satisfy the promotion condition even if the second condition A fails to be satisfied. In other words, in addition to the fun of satisfying the second condition A, it is possible to provide the fun of satisfying the promotion condition.

Further, when the demotion condition is satisfied in the second precursor state 602b, the second precursor state 602b is changed to the first precursor state 602a. The demotion condition is that the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the right or wrong determination of the first special symbol in the second precursor state 602b, and the type is the disadvantageous special loss result A. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

In this way, since it is possible to demote from the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a, even if the state shifts to the second precursor state 602b, it is not possible to feel relieved, and the state shifts to the first precursor state 602a. It becomes possible to play a game with a sense of danger of being demoted. In other words, in addition to the fun of satisfying the second condition B, it is possible to provide the fun of avoiding the satisfaction of the demotion condition.

In this embodiment, the promotion condition is the same as the first condition B, but the promotion condition may be different from the first condition B, and the content of the promotion condition is not limited to the above. . In addition, although the demotion condition is the same as the first condition A, the demotion condition may be different from the first condition A, and the content of the demotion condition is not limited to the above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the precursor state 602 is terminated based on the fall condition (termination condition) being established after transition to the precursor state 602 . Specifically, in the precursor state 602, if the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the judgment of the first special figure, and the type becomes the disadvantageous special loss result F, the establishment state of the first conditions A and B is canceled, and the normal state Go to 601. This probability is set to 1/50 as described above.

Therefore, if the player can satisfy the second condition after transitioning to the precursor state 602 and before the fall condition is satisfied (the second condition A in the case of the first precursor state 602a, is the second condition B), the game state can be stepped up from the premonitory state 602 to the advantageous state 603 . Conversely, if the fall condition is met before the second condition is met, the normal state 601 is restored.

It should be noted that the probability of establishment of the second condition is 1/30 or 1/10, whereas the probability of establishment of the falling condition is 1/50. It is easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 than to go back.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the following description, the description will focus on the parts that are different from the sixth embodiment.

<Condition Satisfaction Judgment Processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the condition satisfaction determination process of this embodiment.

The condition satisfaction determination process of this embodiment is executed in step S3101 of the first fluctuation start process of FIG. 61 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 78, in the condition satisfaction determination process of this embodiment, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the second satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The second fulfillment flag indicates that the second condition A or the second condition B has been fulfilled, in other words, that the game state has shifted to the advantageous state 603 . This second establishment flag is set at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result) that is executed after the game round of the first special figure in which the second condition A or the second condition B is established. set.

If the second establishment flag is not stored, that is, if the gaming state is the normal state 601, the first precursor state 602a or the second precursor state 602b, the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 are stored in step S4402. It is determined whether or not the 1 establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored. The first establishment flag A indicates that the first condition A has been established, in other words, that the state has shifted to the first precursor state 602a. On the other hand, the first establishment flag B indicates that the first condition B has been established, in other words, the transition to the second precursor state 602b. These first establishment flags A and B are the opening and closing execution mode (opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result) executed after the game round of the first special figure in which the first condition A or the first condition B is established. Set at end.

If neither the first establishment flag A nor the first establishment flag B is stored, that is, if the game state is the normal state 601, in step S4403, the result of the determination of the first special figure is disadvantageous special It is determined whether or not the winning result A is won, that is, whether or not the first condition A is satisfied. If the first condition A is satisfied, a first flag A indicating that the first condition A is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4404.

After execution of step S4404 or when a negative determination is made in step S4403 (if the first condition A is not satisfied), in step S4405, the result of the judgment of the first special figure is the disadvantage special outlier result B. , that is, whether or not the first condition B is satisfied. If the first condition B is satisfied, the first flag B indicating that the first condition B is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4406. After execution of step S4406 or when a negative determination is made in step S4405 (when the first condition B is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored in step S4402, that is, if the game state is one of the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, the process proceeds to step S4407. Then, it is determined whether or not the first establishment flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . When the first establishment flag A is stored, that is, when the game state is the first precursor state 602a, in step S4408, the result of the determination of the first special figure wins the disadvantageous special loss result C. It is determined whether or not the second condition A is satisfied. If the second condition A is satisfied, a second flag indicating that the second condition is satisfied is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4409.

After execution of step S4409 or when a negative determination is made in step S4408 (when the second condition B is not satisfied), in step S4410, the result of the judgment of the first special figure is the disadvantage special outlier result B. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the promotion condition is satisfied. If the promotion condition is satisfied, the first flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4411. After execution of step S4411 or when a negative determination is made in step S4410 (when the promotion condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the first satisfaction flag A is not stored in step S4407, the first satisfaction flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, that is, the state in which the first condition B is satisfied (the first 2 precursor state 602b). In this case, in step S4412, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the first special figure wins the disadvantageous special loss result D, that is, whether or not the second condition B is established. If the second condition B is satisfied, a second flag indicating that the second condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4413. Note that the second flag in this step is the same as the second flag in step S4409.

After the execution of step S4413 or when a negative determination is made in step S4412 (when the second condition B is not satisfied), in step S4414, the result of the judgment of the first special figure is the disadvantage special outlier result A. , that is, whether or not the demotion condition is satisfied. If the demotion condition is satisfied, the first flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4415. After execution of step S4415 or when a negative determination is made in step S4414 (when the demotion condition is not satisfied), the condition satisfaction determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4401, that is, if the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 204, the condition establishment determination processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S4402. . In other words, when the gaming state is the advantageous state 603, the processing for judging whether the first condition A, the first condition B, the second condition A, the second condition B, the promotion condition, and the demotion condition are satisfied is not executed. . As a result, during the transition to the advantageous state 603, the first condition A or B is satisfied and the portent state 602 is entered. Inconvenience such as resetting is avoided.

<Condition Cancellation Process>
FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the condition canceling process of this embodiment.

The condition canceling process of this embodiment is a process for returning to the normal state 601 when the end condition is satisfied in the first precursor state 602a or the second precursor state 602b. This processing is executed in step S3002 of the first game round control processing in FIG. 60 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the condition canceling process of this embodiment, first, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. judge. If neither the first satisfaction flag A nor the first satisfaction flag B is stored, that is, if the first condition is not satisfied and the precursor state 602 is not set, the condition canceling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if either the first establishment flag A or the first establishment flag B is stored, in step S4502, the result of the determination of the suitability of the first special figure wins the disadvantageous special outlier result F. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the fall condition (end condition) is satisfied. If the falling condition is satisfied, in step S4503, the first satisfaction flags A and B stored in the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204 are erased. In continuing step S4504, the 1st condition end command is set as a transmission object to production control device 82. After execution of step S4504 or when a negative determination is made in step S4502, the condition canceling process is terminated.

<Table switching processing>
FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the table switching process of this embodiment.

The table switching process of this embodiment is based on the satisfaction of various conditions including first conditions A and B, promotion conditions, demotion conditions, and second conditions A and B. It is for transitioning between two precursor states 602 b and favorable states 603 . This processing is executed in step S3901 of transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 69 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the table switching process of this embodiment, first, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. . The first winning flag is stored when the winning judgment result of the first special figure is a jackpot result (see step S604 in FIG. 61), and the second winning flag is the winning judgment result of the second special figure. is a jackpot result (see step S904 in FIG. 66).

If neither the first winning flag nor the second winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The V winning flag is stored when the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B passes through the V winning area 356 (see step S1205 in FIG. 23).

If the V winning flag is stored, the table switching process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not stored, the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4603. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the opening and closing execution mode corresponds to the disadvantageous special deviation result of the first special figure.

In addition, when the game round of the second special figure is validated (the game round of the first special figure is invalidated) and the opening and closing execution mode corresponds to the special loss result of the second special figure, the first In the forced termination process (step S511) of the first game round control process (FIG. 16) for controlling the special figure game round, the release flag of the first special figure is erased. Therefore, even if the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored in the storage area 234 at the start of fluctuation of the first special figure, the first side disadvantageous opening flag is set in the storage area 234 at the time of determination in step S4603. is not stored in In other words, the affirmative determination in step S4603 is limited to the case where the winning judgment result of the first special figure is a disadvantageous special loss result and the game round of the first special figure corresponding to the winning judgment is activated. .

If the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not the first flag A is stored in the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The first flag A indicates that the first condition A or the demotion condition has been met.

If the first flag A is stored, the first establishment flag A is stored in the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4605. Further, in step S4605, processing for erasing the first flag A stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the subsequent step S4606, it is determined whether or not the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. If the first true flag B is stored, in step S4607, the first true flag B is stored in order to demote the second predictive state 602b to the first predictive state 602a (to avoid duplication of the first true flags A and B). A process for erasing the establishment flag B is executed.

After execution of step S4607 or when a negative determination is made in step S4606, in step S4608, the first establishment command A is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the table switching process is terminated.

The 1st establishment command A set in step S4608 is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 82 by the external output process of step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 outputs to the display control device 212 a command including information on the content of the special effect display A1 shown in FIG. 81(b). As a result, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display A1 is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round which is performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The special effect display A1 is the same as the special effect display A (FIG. 72(b)) in the sixth embodiment.

On the other hand, if the first flag A is not stored in step S4604, it is determined whether the first flag B is stored in the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204 or not. The first flag B indicates that the first condition B or promotion condition has been met.

When the first flag B is stored, the first establishment flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4610. Further, in step S4610, processing for erasing the first flag B stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the subsequent step S4611, it is determined whether or not the first establishment flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. If the first true flag A is stored, then in step S4612, in order to upgrade the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b (to avoid duplication of the first true flags A and B), the first A process for erasing the establishment flag A is executed.

After execution of step S4612 or when a negative determination is made in step S4611, the first establishment command B is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S4613.

Upon receiving the first effect command B, the effect control device 82 outputs to the display control device 212 a command including information on the content of the special effect display A2 shown in FIG. 81(c). The special effect display A2 suggests to the player that the transition to the advantageous state 603 is easier than the first precursor state 602a (chance mode). As the special effect display A2, for example, a character display 621 such as a telop display of the characters "In great chance mode" is performed on the upper and lower parts of the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, or the background color of the display screen G is changed. A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color different from the normal effect display (FIG. 81(a)), the special effect display A1 (FIG. 81(b)) and the special effect display B (FIG. 81(d)) can be considered.

By executing the process of step S4613, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display A2 is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round which is performed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the special effect display A2 does not necessarily have to be displayed at the timing of starting the fluctuation, and may be displayed at a timing before the start of the fluctuation or after the start of the fluctuation. After execution of step S4613, the table switching process ends.

On the other hand, if the first flag B is not stored in step S4609, it is determined in step S4614 whether or not the second flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The second flag indicates that the second condition A or the second condition B is satisfied.

When the second flag is stored, the first establishment flags A and B stored in the RAM 204 are erased in step S4615. In subsequent step S 4616 , the second establishment flag is stored in various flag storage area 234 of RAM 204 . Also, in step S4616, if the second flag is stored in the RAM 204, processing for erasing it is also performed.

Next, in step S4617, 10 is set to the value of the game counter area CG2 for the second special figure. The game round counter area CG2 is for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed after shifting to the advantageous state 603 . In continuing step S4618, a 2nd establishment command is set as a command of transmission object to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. FIG. As a result, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display B shown in FIG. Note that the special effect display B is the same as the special effect display B (FIG. 72(c)) in the sixth embodiment. After execution of step S4618 or when a negative determination is made in step S4614, the table switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4603, that is, if the first side disadvantageous opening flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, the table switching process is performed without executing the processes after step S4604. exit. As already explained, when the game round of the first special figure is invalidated by the game round of the second special figure, the negative determination is made in step S4603, so the lifting conditions and the Even if the demotion condition is satisfied, the table switching process is not executed, and the promotion and the like are invalidated. For this reason, the presence or absence of promotion, etc. is associated not only with the selection of the variable display time of the game round of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but also with the presence or absence of winning of the game ball to the second operation opening 34, winning timing, etc. This makes it possible to complicate the execution conditions for promotion, etc., compared to a configuration in which promotion, etc., is performed based only on the lottery results. In other words, even if the result of the lottery based on the winning to the first working opening 33 is the result corresponding to the promotion etc., the promotion etc. is decided based on the winning to the second working opening 34 or the processing performed based on the winning. It can be said that it is possible to provide a case where it is permitted and a case where it is restricted, and especially in a configuration with a demotion function, it is possible to provide a game feature that can invalidate the demotion condition after it is satisfied. .

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When a predetermined change condition (e.g. winning the unfavorable outcome B in the first precursor state 602a) is established, change the condition for transition to the advantageous state 603 (change from second condition A to second condition B, etc.) It was configured to

For example, if the transition condition to the advantageous state 603 is fixed, there is concern that the transition route will be unified and the game will tend to become monotonous. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, since the transition condition can be changed when the change condition is satisfied, the transition route to the advantageous state 603 can be diversified, and the game becomes monotonous. Suppressed.

By making the easiness of establishment of the second condition A and the easiness of establishment of the second condition B different, the easiness of establishment of the transition condition changes according to the change of the condition of transition to the advantageous state 603 .

In this case, the degree of difficulty in establishing the transition condition can be changed according to whether or not the change condition is established, and the ease of establishment can be enhanced. As a result, compared to a game that is limited only to whether or not the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, it is easier to create an ups and downs in the expectation that the game state will shift to the advantageous state 603, and the interest is improved.

The change condition for changing the transition condition and the easiness of establishment of the transition condition can be established while the player is playing the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the transition condition and the ease with which the transition condition is established during the game. In this case, while the player has a strong interest in whether the transition to the advantageous state 603 can be made, the transition condition and the ease with which the transition condition is established will be changed. In other words, while aiming to transition to the advantageous state 603, it is possible to change the achievement items and the degree of achievement difficulty, thereby making it possible to diversify the game.

Based on the satisfaction of the promotion conditions, the conditions for transition to the advantageous state 603 are changed from the second condition A with a high difficulty of satisfaction (1/30 probability of establishment) to the second condition B with a low difficulty of establishment (1/10 probability of establishment). ). Further, the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is changed from the second condition B to the second condition A based on the satisfaction of the demotion condition.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 to one that facilitates transition to the advantageous state 603 by establishing the promotion condition. Therefore, in addition to the enjoyment of satisfying the transition condition, the enjoyment of satisfying the promotion condition can be added, and the amusement is improved. Furthermore, the existence of the demotion condition makes it possible to provide the enjoyment of avoiding the establishment of the demotion condition.

Based on the propriety determination result of the first special figure, the first and second conditions are established. Specifically, when the result of the determination of the suitability of the first special figure is a disadvantageous special outlier result, and the type is a predetermined specific type, each condition of the first and second conditions is established. did.

Since the game round of the first special scheme mainly functions to cancel (invalidate) the game round of the second special scheme in the normal state 601, the player tends to have a negative image of the first special scheme. However, with the above configuration, the determination result of the first special figure leads to the transition to the advantageous state 603, and can contribute to wiping out the negative image.

In this embodiment, the configuration includes both the promotion from the first precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b and the demotion from the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a. It is good also as a structure provided with only.

<Eighth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in the configuration for ending the advantageous state 603 . This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 87. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to the said 6th Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this embodiment, the number of game times up to the upper limit number based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 under the configuration of ending the advantageous state 603 based on the number of execution times of the game times of the second special figure reaching the upper limit number It is configured to change the remaining number of times.

First, the right/wrong table for the first special figure of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the right/wrong table for the first special figure, two types of disadvantageous special losing results A and B are set as types of disadvantageous special losing results. These disadvantageous special loss results A and B are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1. Specifically, 15 values from 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 of the jackpot random number counter CA1 are assigned to the disadvantageous special loss result A, and 17 to 17 of the jackpot random number counter CA1 are assigned to the disadvantageous special loss result B. 581 values up to 572 are assigned.

Therefore, the probability of the unfavorable special failure result A is 1/40, and the probability of the disadvantageous special failure result B is 572/600. That is, when the result is disadvantageous special out in the propriety determination for the first special figure, it is configured to be disadvantageous special out result B in most cases, and occasionally to be unfavorable special out result A. In addition, each winning probability of each disadvantageous special loss result A and B described above is only an example, and is not limited to the above.

By the way, if the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the success/failure determination for the first special figure, the driving mode of the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 regardless of whether the type is the disadvantageous special loss result A or B. are set to be the same. That is, the ease of winning the game ball into the second variable winning device 32B and the ease of passing the game ball through the V winning area 356 are common in the disadvantageous special losing results A and B. Specifically, in both of the disadvantageous special loss results A and B, the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 are arranged in such a manner that passage through the V winning area 356 in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment is unlikely to occur. Drive controlled.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state 601, the normal table (FIG. 58(a)) is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball wins in the first operation port 33 and the result of the win/loss determination corresponding to the win becomes a special loss result, it is determined whether the first condition is satisfied.

When the first condition is satisfied in the normal state 601 , the state shifts to the precursor state 602 . In the portent state 602, when a game ball wins in the first operation hole 33 and the win/loss determination result corresponding to the win becomes a special loss result, it is determined whether the second condition is established. When the second condition is satisfied in the portent state 602, the variable display time tables for the first special figure and the second special figure are switched, and the special table (FIG. 58(b)) is selected, shifting to an advantageous state 603. In this embodiment, the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602 correspond to the "first game state", and the advantageous state 603 corresponds to the "second game state".

Advantageous state 603 is a game state with a number cut, and is configured to end when the number of executions of the second special figure game round from its start reaches a specified number (upper limit number). The specified number of times at the transition to the advantageous state 603, ie, the initial specified number of times, is set to five.

In this embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the first long variation (30 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the first special figure, and the second long variation is selected as the variation display time of the second special figure. When the variation (20 sec) is selected, the first long variation (30 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the first special figure, and the second short variation (5 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the second special figure. and when the first short fluctuation (10 sec) is selected as the fluctuation display time of the first special figure and the second short fluctuation (5 sec) is selected as the fluctuation display time of the second special figure. Then, a specific state occurs in which the variation display time for the second special figure passes earlier than the variation display time for the first special figure from the start of each game round of the first and second special figures, The success or failure lottery result on the second special figure side is validated. Since most of the special loss results of the second special figure are regarded as advantageous special loss results (see FIG. 9 (b)), if the winning lottery result on the second special figure side is activated, it is almost certain V jackpot can be obtained.

In the advantageous state 603, the above three patterns are more likely to be established in the selection of the variable display time of the first and second special symbols than in the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602, and the success or failure lottery result on the second special symbol side is easily activated. It's becoming Then, in the advantageous state 603, the probability that the result of the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure will be activated, that is, the probability that the selection mode of the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure will be one of the above three patterns. is about 1/10. In other words, the advantageous state 603 has a game characteristic of drawing about 1/10 within the restriction that the prescribed number of times is five.

Under such game characteristics, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, an extra lottery for determining whether or not to add a specified number of times is performed in an advantageous state 603 . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the addition condition is satisfied based on the winning of the game ball in the first operation port 33 . The additional condition is that in the advantageous state 603, it becomes a disadvantageous special out result in the right or wrong judgment of the first special figure, and the type becomes the disadvantageous special outage result A. This probability is set to 1/40 as described above.

Then, when the addition condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of times (five times) is added to the specified number of times (remaining number of times up to the upper limit). That is, by winning the additional lottery, the specified number of times increases, and the transition period (game period) of the advantageous state 603 is extended.

By being configured in this way, when the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, the player can confirm that the winning or losing lottery result on the second special figure side becomes effective (substantially becomes a V jackpot) about 1 While receiving a /10 lottery, it is possible to receive a 1/40 lottery that adds the specified number of times. Therefore, even if the player loses the lottery of about 1/10, by winning the additional lottery of 1/40, the chance of obtaining the V jackpot by the end of the advantageous state 603 can be greatly improved.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the following description, the description will focus on the parts that are different from the sixth embodiment.

<Additional judgment processing>
FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing processing for addition determination according to the present embodiment.

The addition determination process of this embodiment is executed in step S5001 of the first fluctuation start process in FIG. The first fluctuation start process in FIG. 84 is the same as the first fluctuation start process in FIG. 61 in the sixth embodiment except that the process of step S5001 is included.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the addition determination process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the second establishment flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The second establishment flag indicates that the second condition has already been established, in other words, that the game state has shifted to the advantageous state 603 .

If the second establishment flag is stored, that is, if the gaming state is in the advantageous state 603, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the additional condition is established. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the right or wrong determination of the first special figure is the disadvantage special outlier result A.

If the add-on condition is satisfied, the add-on flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S5103. The add flag indicates that the add condition is satisfied. After execution of step S5103, or when a negative determination is made in steps S5101 and S5102, the addition determination processing ends.

<Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode>
FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of this embodiment.

In the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode of this embodiment, first, in step S3901, table switching processing is executed. This processing is similar to the table switching processing of FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. However, in the process of step S4111, 5 is set to the value of the game counter area CG2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM204. The game round counter area CG2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed after the advantageous state 603 is started. clemented. 68 is executed at the end of the game round of the second special figure (see step S3502 in FIG. 65), and the game round counter area CG2 is the second special figure game round. is counted down each time is executed.

After execution of step S3901, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. If the addition flag is stored, 5 is added to the value of the game counter area CG2 provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S5102. As a result, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state 603 is increased by five. In continuing step S5103, an addition command is set as a command of transmission object to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. FIG. The addition command set in step S5103 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Upon receiving the addition command, the effect control device 82 outputs to the display control device 212 a command including information on the content of the effect display for addition shown in FIG. 87 . The additional effect display notifies or suggests to the player that the number of remaining games in the advantageous state 603 has increased. As an additional effect display, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), "+5 times!!" After performing the character display 631 such as, as shown in FIG. , etc., can be considered.

By executing the process of step S5103, the pattern is displayed so that the additional effect display is displayed on the display screen G from the time of the end of the opening/closing execution mode or from the next game cycle performed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Device 41 is controlled. It should be noted that the additional effect display does not necessarily have to be displayed at the timing of starting the variation, and may be displayed at a timing before the start of the variation, or may be displayed after the start of the variation. After execution of step S5103 or when a negative determination is made in step S5101, the processing after step S1201 is executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

It is configured such that the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 is increased based on the establishment of the additional condition in the advantageous state 603 .

For example, in a configuration in which the number of times the game is executed in an advantageous state is fixed, when the remaining number of times in an advantageous state decreases, it becomes difficult to have a sense of expectation for awarding a privilege (V jackpot in this embodiment), and the end of the advantageous state. It is feared that the higher the number, the more the desire to play will decrease. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the number of remaining times can be increased during the advantageous state 603, the player can continue to have a sense of anticipation for the provision of the privilege, and can maintain the desire to play. Moreover, since the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 can increase in the middle, it becomes difficult to predict how long the advantageous state 603 will continue, and the interest is improved.

A normal table and a special table are provided as variable display time tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and by switching the selection state of these tables, game states with different degrees of advantage are constructed. As a result, it is possible to realize a transition to an advantageous game state without relying on the conventional change in the probability of winning or losing a lottery, and to provide novel game characteristics. In addition, in the present embodiment, the specified number of times (remaining number of times) corresponding to the selection period of the special table is increased during the game in the advantageous state 603 in which the special table is selected. As a result, it is possible to extend the advantageous state 603 in a practically preferable manner, and it is possible to effectively increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this embodiment, instead of or in addition to the configuration for increasing the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603, a configuration may be employed in which the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 is decreased based on the establishment of a predetermined reduction condition.

In this case, the transition period to the advantageous state 603 can be shortened. As a result, the enjoyment of avoiding the fulfillment of the reduction condition in the advantageous state 603 is added, and the amusement is improved. In this case, the reduction condition may be the same as the additional condition (for example, when the second additional condition is satisfied, the number of remaining advantageous states 603 is reduced, etc.), or may be different from the additional condition. It may be a condition (for example, the type of disadvantageous special out result of the first special figure is to be other than the disadvantageous special out result A).

In addition, in this embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment, a first precursor state 602a and a second precursor state 602b are provided, and the first precursor state 602a transitions to the second precursor state 602b when the promotion condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the second precursor state 602b may transition to the first precursor state 602a when the demotion condition is satisfied.

<Ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the sixth embodiment in that a plurality of game states are provided as the advantageous state 603 . This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to the said 6th Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the right/wrong table for the first special figure of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 are added for convenience, and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the right/wrong table for the first special figure, three types of disadvantageous special losing results A to C are set as types of disadvantageous special losing results. These disadvantageous special loss results A to C are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CA1. In the success/failure determination for the first special figure, the probability of a disadvantageous special outage result A is set to 1/100, the probability of a disadvantageous special outage result B is set to 1/200, and the unfavorable special outage result The probability of getting C is set to 588/600. That is, when the result is a disadvantageous special deviation in the suitability determination for the first special figure, it is configured to be a disadvantageous special deviation result C, and occasionally to become a disadvantageous special deviation result A or B. It should be noted that each winning probability of each disadvantageous special losing result A to C is only an example, and is not limited to the above.

By the way, if the result is a disadvantageous special loss result in the success/failure determination for the first special figure, the driving mode of the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 regardless of whether the type is any of the disadvantageous special loss results A to C are set to be the same. That is, the ease of winning the game ball into the second variable winning device 32B and the ease of passing the game ball through the V winning area 356 are common in the disadvantageous special loss results AC. Specifically, in any of the disadvantageous special loss results A to C, the second variable winning device 32B and the shutter 358 are arranged in such a manner that passage through the V winning area 356 in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment is unlikely to occur. Drive controlled.

Next, the special table of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89 are added for convenience and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. FIG. Further, the normal table in FIG. 34(a) is similar to the normal table in FIG. 58(a), so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 89, the special tables are provided with a special table A (FIG. 89(b)) and a special table B (FIG. 89(c)). Of these, the special table A is the same as the special table in FIG. 58(b), so its explanation is omitted.

The special table B shown in FIG. 89(c) is provided for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In the special table B for the first special figure, the first short variation (10.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 180/200, and the first long variation (10.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 20/200, according to the value of the variation type counter CSA. 30.0 sec) is selected. On the other hand, in the special table B for the second special figure, the second long variation (20.0 sec) is selected with a probability of 180/200 according to the value of the variation type counter CSB, and the second short variation is selected with a probability of 20/200. Variation (5.0 sec) is configured to be selected.

Comparing special table A and special table B, the probability of selecting the first long variation and the second short variation is higher for special table B than for special table A, and the selection probability for the first short variation and second long variation is higher for special table B than for special table A. Probability is low. Therefore, when the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, the game cycle of the first special figure is started more than when the special table A is selected. A specific state that the fluctuation display time for the second special figure elapses from the start of the game round of the second special figure is likely to occur earlier than the fluctuation display time for the first special figure elapses. In other words, when the special table B is selected as the variable display time table, V wins are more likely to occur than when the special table A is used, and the game state is very advantageous for the player.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a state transition diagram showing internal state transitions of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, a normal state 601, a first advantageous state 603a and a second advantageous state 603b are provided as game states. It should be noted that the precursor state 602 (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment is not provided in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the normal state 601 corresponds to the "first game state", and the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b correspond to the "second game state".

In the normal state 601, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when a game ball wins in the first operating port 33 and the result of winning/failure determination corresponding to the winning becomes a big hit result (the result of the winning/failure lottery of the first special figure or the second special figure is the big winning result), opening and closing The game state after the end of the run mode is set to the second advantageous state 603b.

Also, in the normal state 601, when a game ball wins in the first operation port 33 and the result of the win/loss determination corresponding to the win becomes a special loss result, it is determined whether the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established. The first transition condition is that the suitability determination result of the first special figure becomes the disadvantageous special outlier result A, and the probability is set to 1/100 as described above (see FIG. 88). On the other hand, the second transition condition is that the result of the judgment result of the first special figure becomes the disadvantageous special outlier result B, and the probability is set to 1/200, which is lower than the probability of establishment of the first transition condition ( See Figure 88).

When the first transition condition is established in the normal state 601, the state transitions to the first advantageous state 603a. The first advantageous state 603a is a state in which the special table A is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In this embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the first long variation (30 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the first special figure, and the second long variation is selected as the variation display time of the second special figure. When the variation (20 sec) is selected, the first long variation (30 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the first special figure and the second short variation (5 sec) is selected as the variation display time of the second special figure case, and when the first short fluctuation (10 sec) is selected as the fluctuation display time of the first special figure and the second short fluctuation (5 sec) is selected as the fluctuation display time of the second special figure, the three patterns described above A specific state occurs, and the winning or losing lottery result on the second special figure side is validated. And since most of the special loss results of the second special figure are advantageous special loss results (see FIG. 9(b)), when the winning lottery result on the second special figure side is validated, almost The V jackpot can be obtained with certainty. In the advantageous state 603, the probability that the success or failure lottery result on the side of the second special figure is activated, that is, the probability that the selection mode of the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure will be one of the above three patterns, It is about 1/10.

On the other hand, when the second transition condition is satisfied in the normal state 601, the state shifts to the second advantageous state 603b. The second advantageous state 603b is a state in which the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the second advantageous state 603b, the probability that the selection mode of the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure is one of the above three patterns is about 1/5. That is, in the second advantageous state 603b, the success or failure lottery results on the second special figure side are validated with a higher probability than the first advantageous state 603a, and most of them lead to the V jackpot.

Both the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b are set to a game state of cutting the number of times, and are configured to end when the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed from the start reaches a specified number (upper limit number). ing. The prescribed number of times for both states 603a and 103b is the same number, and specifically is set to 10 times.

Therefore, when shifting to the first advantageous state 603a, it becomes a game in which about 1/10 is drawn in the restriction of the prescribed number of times of 10 times, and when shifting to the second advantageous state 603b, the restriction of the prescribed number of times is 10 times. It becomes a game to draw about 1/5 in. In other words, transitioning to the second advantageous state 603b makes it easier for the player to obtain a V jackpot by the end of the advantageous state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the following description, the description will focus on the parts that are different from the sixth embodiment.

<Determination processing for state transition>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing state transition determination processing according to the present embodiment.

The state transition determination process of the present embodiment is executed in place of the condition establishment determination process in step S3101 of the first fluctuation start process of FIG. 61 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the state transition determination process, first, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the advantageous table flag A or the advantageous table flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 . The advantageous table flag A indicates that the special table A is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. On the other hand, the advantageous table flag B indicates that the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure.

If neither of the advantageous table flags A and B is stored, in step S5202, whether or not the result of the determination of whether the first special figure wins the disadvantage special loss result A, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the transition condition is met. If the first transition condition is satisfied, the advantage flag A indicating that the first transition condition is satisfied is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S5203. After execution of step S5203 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, the determination process for state transition ends.

On the other hand, in step S5202, the result of the determination of the first special figure is not the one that wins the disadvantageous special loss result A, and if the first transition state is not established, in step S5204, the first special figure It is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination is to win the disadvantageous special loss result B, that is, whether or not the second transition condition is established. If the second transition condition is satisfied, the advantage flag B indicating that the second transition condition is satisfied is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S5205. After execution of step S5205 or when a negative determination is made in step S5205, the determination processing for state transition ends.

<Processing for setting the first variable display time>
FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the process of setting the first variable display time according to this embodiment.

The first variable display time setting process of this embodiment is executed in step S3102 of the first variable start process in FIG. 61 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, in the first variable display time setting process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the advantageous table flag A or the advantageous table flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. .

If neither of the advantageous table flags A and B is stored, in step S5302, the normal table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 as the variable display time table for the first special figure (Fig. 89(a)). In the following step S5303, the normal table is referred to, and the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is acquired, and set as the variable display time for the game round of the first special figure. do. After that, the setting processing of the first variable display time ends.

On the other hand, if either of the advantageous table flags A and B is stored in step S5301, it is determined in step S5304 whether or not the advantageous table flag A is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. If the advantageous table flag A is stored, in step S5305, the special table A stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 as the variable display time table for the first special figure (Fig. )). In subsequent step S5303, with reference to the special table A, the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is acquired, and the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure is obtained. set as

On the other hand, if the advantageous table flag A is not stored in step S5304, it means that the advantageous table flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, in step S5306, the The special table B (FIG. 89(c)) stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is selected as the variable display time table for one special figure. In subsequent step S5303, with reference to the special table b, the variable display time corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CSA stored in the first execution area RAE is acquired, and the variable display time of the game round of the first special figure is obtained. set as

Although illustration is omitted, the variation display time of the game round of the second special figure is also executed in the same manner as the setting process of the first variation display time. That is, when neither of the advantageous table flags A and B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, the normal table is selected as the variation display time table for the second special figure, and the advantageous table is stored in the storage area 234. When the flag A is stored, the special table A is selected as the variable display time table for the second special figure. Further, when the advantageous table flag B is stored in the storage area 234, the special table B is selected as the variable display time table for the second special figure.

<Table switching processing>
FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the table switching process of this embodiment.

The table switching process of this embodiment is for changing the game state between the normal state 601 and the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b based on the establishment of the first and second transition conditions. . This process is executed in step S3901 of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 69 according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the table switching process, in steps S4101 and S4102, the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 as in the sixth embodiment. It is determined whether or not it is stored, and whether or not the V winning flag is stored.

If the V win flag is not stored in step S4102, it is determined in step S5401 whether or not the first side disadvantageous opening flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the disadvantageous special out result of the special figure.

If the first side unfavorable opening flag is not stored, the table switching process is terminated. Determine whether A is stored. The advantage flag A indicates that the first transition condition has been met.

If the advantage flag A is stored, the advantage table flag A is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S5403. Further, in step S5403, processing for erasing the advantage flag A stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the following step S5404, 10 is set to the value of the game round counter area CG2 for the second special figure provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM204. The game round counter area CG2 is for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed after shifting to the first advantageous state 603a. The prescribed number of times (upper limit number) of the advantageous state 603a is set to ten. In the subsequent step S5405, the advantageous table command A is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the table switching process is terminated.

The advantageous table command A set in step S5405 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 outputs a command including information on the contents of the special effect display B to the display control device 212 . As a result, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display B is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round which is performed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Note that the special effect display B is the same as the special effect display B (FIG. 72(c)) in the sixth embodiment.

On the other hand, if the advantage flag A is not stored in step S5402, it is determined whether or not the advantage flag B is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The advantage flag B indicates that the second transition condition is satisfied.

If the advantageous flag B is stored, the advantageous table flag B is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S5407. Further, in step S5407, processing for erasing the advantage flag B stored in the RAM 204 is also performed. In the following step S5408, 10 is set to the value of the game counter area CG2 for the second special figure. The game round counter area CG2 in this step is for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed after shifting to the second advantageous state 603b. The prescribed number of times (upper limit number) of the second advantageous state 603b is set to ten.

In the following step S5409, the advantageous table command B is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Upon receiving the advantageous table command B, the effect control device 82 outputs to the display control device 212 a command including information on the content of the special effect display C shown in FIG. The special effect display C suggests to the player the transition to the second advantageous state 603b. As the special effect display C, for example, a character display 641 such as a telop display of characters "In super heat mode" is performed on the upper and lower parts of the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, or the background color of the display screen G is changed. A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color is conceivable.

By executing the processing of step S5409, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the special effect display C is displayed on the display screen G from the next game round which is performed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. After execution of step S5405 or when a negative determination is made in step S5406, the table switching process is terminated.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

In an advantageous state 603 that is more advantageous than the normal state 601, first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b having different degrees of advantage are provided. 603b. As a result, it is possible to realize the game property of shifting to the advantageous state 603 while the degree of advantage is diversified. At the same time, it is possible to arouse the expectation of moving to (second advantageous state 603b).

As the fluctuation display time table for the advantageous state 603, the ease of selection of the second short fluctuation , the likelihood of establishment of a specific state in which the variation display time for the second special figure has elapsed from the start of the game round of the second special figure) is different), the first and second advantageous states with different degrees of advantage 603a and 603b are constructed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the degree of advantage of the advantageous state 603 with a simple configuration that only selects from which of these tables the variable display time is to be obtained. It becomes possible to realize

In addition, in this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the configuration may be such that the advantageous state 603 is entered after the conditions are met step by step. In this case, it is preferable to set a first condition and a second condition as conditions for shifting to the advantageous state 603, and to shift to the precursor state 602 (see FIG. 76) when the first condition is satisfied.

In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, a first precursor state 602a and a second precursor state 602b are provided, and when the promotion condition is satisfied, the first precursor state 602a transitions to the second precursor state 602b. Alternatively, the second precursor state 602b may transition to the first precursor state 602a when the demotion condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to move to the second advantageous state 603b by satisfying a specific promotion condition during the stay in the first advantageous state 603a. A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the first advantageous state 603a is possible when a specific demotion condition is met during the stay.

As such a configuration, for example, in the first advantageous state 603 a promotion condition is established by the fact that the result of the judgment result of the first special figure becomes the disadvantageous special outlier result B, and the first special figure in the second advantageous state 603 b The demotion condition can be established when the success/failure determination process results in a disadvantageous special loss result A.

In addition, promotion and demotion conditions are not limited to those described above, and may correspond to special disadvantageous outlier results other than A and B, or a dedicated random number counter (for example, the sixth implementation A conditional random number counter in the form) may be provided and established when the value reaches a specific value. Furthermore, for the second special figure (second operation port 34) jackpot random number counter CB1 may be established by becoming a specific value, and the variation type counter CS of the first special figure or the second special figure It may be established by becoming a specific value. Furthermore, for example, for both promotion and relegation conditions, both conditions may be the same, such as the adequacy determination result of the first special figure in the first advantageous state 603a being the disadvantageous special outlier result B .

Incidentally, the promotion from the first advantageous state 603a to the second advantageous state 603b and the demotion from the second advantageous state 603b to the first advantageous state 603a do not necessarily have both, but only one of them is provided. It may be a configuration.

Also in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 may be increased based on the establishment of the additional condition in the advantageous state 603 . Further, the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 may be reduced based on the fact that the reduction condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603 . In this case, it is not necessary to provide both the configuration for increasing the remaining number of times and the configuration for decreasing the remaining number of times, and the configuration may include only one of them.

<Modification of Ninth Embodiment>
This modification differs from the ninth embodiment in the configuration of first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to 9th Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b of this modified example, a common special table A (FIG. 89(b)) is used as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. A different prescribed number of times is set as the number. Specifically, the prescribed number of times for the first advantageous state 603a is set to 10 times, and the prescribed number of times for the second advantageous state 603b is set to 20 times.

In the above configuration, in both the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b, the probability that the winning/failing lottery result on the second special figure side will be validated (probability of substantially becoming a V jackpot) is about 1/10. Although equal, in the second advantageous state 603b, the number of times the lottery is received is greater than in the first advantageous state 603a, so the expected value of winning the V jackpot by the end of the advantageous state increases. With such a configuration, the storage capacity of the variable display time table can be reduced, and the amount of memory used in the ROM 203 can be saved.

In this modified example, the first advantageous state 603a and the second advantageous state 603b are configured to use a common special table. A configuration using different special tables such as special tables A and B shown in FIG. In other words, the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b may be constructed by combining a configuration in which the special table is different and a configuration in which the prescribed number of times is different.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from each of the above-described embodiments in that the winning frequency of the game ball to the second operation opening 34 is restricted. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 104. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the structure similar to said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the right/wrong table for the universal figure of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96(a). In each of the above embodiments, the probability of a winning result in the support lottery (a winning result in the judgment of the general figure) is set to about 99.6% (see FIG. 11 (a)), but this implementation The form is set to 1/25 as shown in FIG. 96(a). That is, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11(b), even if the game ball that wins the first operation opening 33 passes through the through gate 35 immediately before that, the electric accessory 34a does not open almost every time. , The frequency of opening the electric accessory 34a is limited to the extent that the electric accessory 34a is in an open state from time to time.

In this embodiment, the variable display time of the pattern (normal pattern) in the normal pattern display unit 38 and the opening mode of the electric accessory 34a are the same as those of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 11(c). be. Specifically, the pattern of the general pattern display unit 38 is displayed in a variable manner for 0.3 seconds, and in the case of a winning result in the support lottery, the electric accessory is displayed for 1.5 seconds after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. 34a is kept open. Therefore, when the result of the support lottery is a winning result, the following game ball can enter the second operation port 34 after about 1.0 sec after the game ball enters the first operation port 33.例文帳に追加

Next, the configuration of the right/wrong table of the first special figure and the second special figure in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96(b) and (c). As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the success/failure table of the first special figure of the present embodiment, normal loss results and advantageous special loss results are not set, and only jackpot results and disadvantageous special loss results are set. Therefore, if it does not result in a big hit result in the result of the judgment of the first special figure, it will always result in a disadvantageous special out. Incidentally, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in the success/failure table of the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 96(c), the normal loss result and the disadvantageous special loss result are not set, and only the jackpot result and the advantageous special loss result are set. Therefore, if it does not result in a big hit result in the result of the judgment of the second special figure, it will always result in an advantageous special out. Incidentally, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200.

In addition, in the success/failure table of the second special figure, three types of advantageous special losing results A to C are set as advantageous special losing results. These advantageous special loss results A to C are set in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. In the success/failure determination for the second special figure, the probability of the special advantageous result A and the probability of the special advantageous result B are both set to 35/100, and the probability of the special advantageous result C is about 30. /100.

Next, the configuration of the distribution table of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, this distribution table is used for distributing the jackpot type when a jackpot result is obtained in the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is successful.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the distribution table of this embodiment, 8R jackpot results and 16R jackpot results are set as jackpot types, and two types of 16R jackpot results A and B are set as 16R jackpot results. . These 8R jackpot results and 16R jackpot results A and B are set in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In the distribution table, the probability of being distributed to the 8R jackpot result is set to 50/100, the probability of being distributed to the 16R jackpot result A is set to 40/100, and the probability of being distributed to the 16R jackpot result B is set to 10/100. It is That is, when a big hit result is obtained in the judgment of the first special figure or the second special figure, half of the results are distributed to the 16R jackpot result, and most of them are distributed to the 16R jackpot result A.

96 and 97 are added for convenience, and are not stored as data in the success/failure table storage area 221 of the ROM 203. FIG. In addition, various probabilities such as the probability of winning results in the above-mentioned support lottery and the probability of winning jackpot results in the judgment of whether the first special or second special pattern are successful are only examples and are limited to the above. not a thing

Next, the normal table and special table of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. (a) of FIG. 98 shows the normal table, and (b) shows the special table.

As shown in FIG. 98, the normal table and the special table show the relationship between the variation type counter CSA and the variation display time of the first special figure game round, and the variation type counter CSB and the variation display of the second special figure game round. It defines the relationship with time. Note that, unlike the variable display time table (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment, these two tables do not define the relationship with the game counter (the number of times the game is executed).

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the normal table is provided for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. Only the first variation A (10.0 sec) is set in the normal table for the first special figure, and the second variation A whose variation display time is longer than the first variation A is set in the normal table for the second special figure (20.0 sec) is set. That is, in the selection state of the normal table, the first variation A is always selected as the variable display time of the first special game round, and the second variation A is always selected as the variable display time of the second special game round. be. In this case, as described in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the game round of the second special figure is started with a delay of 1.0 sec from the start of the game round of the first special figure, the second special figure Before the fluctuation display time for the second special figure passes from the start of the game round, the fluctuation display time for the first special figure passes from the start of the first special figure, and the first special figure The pass/fail judgment result is validated.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), the special table is provided for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In the special table for the first special figure, only the first variation B (3.0 sec) is set, and in the special table for the second special figure, the second variation B ( 1.0 sec) is set. That is, when the special table is selected, the first variation B is always selected as the variable display time for the first special game round, and the second variation B is always selected as the variable display time for the second special game round. be. In this case, the fluctuation display time for the second special figure elapses from the start of the second special figure faster than the elapse of the variation display time for the first special figure from the start of the first special figure game round. A specific state is established, and the validity determination result of the second special figure is validated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG.

Here, first, the relationship between the variable display time table, the support state of the electric accessory 34a (lottery result of the support lottery), and the probability of the V jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 99(a).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in the state where the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first and second special symbols, the support lottery is lost and the electric accessory 34a is in the support state (open state). If not, the game ball does not enter the second operation port 34, and the game ball enters only the first operation port 33. - 特許庁In this case, only the game round of the first special symbol is executed, and the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol is validated.

Here, in the hit/fail table of the first special figure, only two types of the jackpot result and the disadvantageous special loss result are set (Fig. 96(b)), so the jackpot result and the hit/fail judgment of the first special figure If not, it will be a disadvantageous special omission result. If the result of the winning/failure determination of the first special figure is a disadvantageous special loss result, the second variable winning device 32B is driven in a manner that makes it difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning area 356, so the probability of becoming a V jackpot. becomes almost 0%.

On the other hand, in the state where the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, if the support lottery is won and the electric accessory 34a shifts to the support state, the first and second A game ball wins in each of the two operation ports 33 and 34. - 特許庁In this case, as already explained, the result of the winning/losing determination of the first special figure is validated, and the probability of a V jackpot becomes almost 0%, as in the case where the electric accessory 34a does not shift to the support state.

In addition, in the state where the special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, if the electric accessory 34a does not shift to the support state due to being out of the support lottery, the second operation opening 34 Since the game ball does not win a prize in , the win/loss determination result of the first special figure is validated. Therefore, as in the case where the normal table is selected, the second variable winning device 32B is driven in such a manner that the game ball is less likely to pass through the V winning area 356, and the probability of the V jackpot becomes almost 0%.

On the other hand, in the state where the special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, if the support lottery is won and the electric accessory 34a shifts to the support state, the first And since the game ball wins in each of the second operation ports 33 and 34, both the first special figure and the second special figure are executed. As already explained, when the game rounds of the first and second special symbols are executed while the special table is selected, the above-mentioned specific state is established, and the winning/failure determination result of the second special symbol is valid. become.

Here, in the success/failure table of the second special figure, only two types of jackpot result and advantageous special loss result are set (Fig. 96(c)), so that the second special figure success/failure determination If not, all result will be advantage special out. When the result of the winning/failure determination of the second special figure is the advantageous special losing result, the second variable winning device 32B is driven in such a manner that the game ball easily passes through the V winning area 356, so the probability of becoming a V jackpot. becomes almost 100%.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the support lottery is won in a state where the special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first and second special figures, the V jackpot can be obtained. ing.

Next, transition of the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 99(b).

In the normal state 601, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. In this state, when the result of the winning/losing determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result, the game state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is set to the advantageous state 603 .

Advantageous state 603 is a state in which a special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of times the first special symbol is played from the start is the specified number of times (upper limit number). The advantageous state 603 includes a first advantageous state 603a in which the specified number of times is set to 10 times, and a second advantageous state 603b in which the specified number of times is set to 30 times.

In any of the normal state 601, the first advantageous state 603a, and the second advantageous state 603b, the winning probability of the support lottery is 1/25 in common. That is, it does not have a function of shifting the game state to a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning a winning result in the support lottery is high or a low-frequency support mode in which the probability of winning a winning result is low.

In this embodiment, when the support lottery is won in the selected state of the special table, the V jackpot can be won, while the probability of winning the support lottery is set to 1/25 (FIG. 96(a)). ). Therefore, in the first advantageous state 603a, if the 1/25 support win can be drawn within the restriction of 10 specified times, the V jackpot can be obtained. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state 603b, if the 1/25 support win can be drawn under the restriction that the specified number of times is 30, the V jackpot can be obtained. That is, although the odds of winning the support lottery are the same, the second advantageous state 603b makes it easier for the player to win the support lottery by the end of the second advantageous state 603b, which is a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

Here, an allocation mode of the variable display time table when a jackpot result is obtained will be described with reference to FIG. 100 . FIG. 100(a) is an allocation table for the variable display time table, and FIG. 100(b) is an allocation table for the prescribed number of times. These distribution tables are stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 . 100 are added for convenience, and are not stored as data in the storage area 222. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in the distribution table for the variable display time table, the case where the result of the judgment result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit, and the case where it is a V big hit. , whether or not there is a transition to the special table selection state (advantageous state 603) is defined. When the result of judging whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit result, it is defined whether or not to shift to the advantageous state 603 in association with the big hit type.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are 16R jackpots A and B (see FIG. 97), the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, and when the 8R jackpot is set, the game state is set not to shift. Since the probability that 16R jackpots A and B are selected is 50% (see FIG. 97), if the result of judging whether the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a jackpot result, it is advantageous with a probability of 50% Transition to state 603 . In addition, the case of the V jackpot will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 100 (b), in the distribution table of the specified number of times, when the result of the judgment of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit, and when it is a V big hit , a prescribed number of advantageous states 603 are prescribed. For the case where the result of judging whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, it is defined whether or not to shift to the advantageous state 603 in association with the type of the 16R jackpot.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot A, the specified number of times is set to 10 times, and when the jackpot type is 16R jackpot B, the specified number of times is set to 30 times. Since the probability that the 16R jackpot A is selected and the probability that the 16 jackpot B is selected when the 16R jackpot result is 80% and 20% respectively (see FIG. 97), the first special figure or the second special figure If the result of the judgment is a jackpot result, there is a probability of 80% that the game moves to the first advantageous state 603a, and a probability of 20% that the game moves to the second advantageous state 603b. That is, it is easier to shift to the first advantageous state 603a than to the second advantageous state 603b. In addition, the case of the V jackpot will be described later.

Returning to the description of FIG. 96, when the V jackpot is won in the first advantageous state 603a or the second advantageous state 603b, the game state after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the normal state 601, the first advantageous state 603a, and the second advantageous state 603b. One of two advantageous states 603b is set. This distribution is performed using the distribution table for the fluctuation display time table and the distribution table for the prescribed number of times.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in the distribution table for the variable display time table, it is defined whether or not to transition to the advantageous state 603 in association with the type of the special advantageous loss result of the second special figure. . Specifically, when the type of the special advantageous losing result is the special advantageous losing result A or B (see FIG. 96(c)), the gaming state shifts to the advantageous state 603 and the special advantageous losing result C. is set not to migrate. Since the probability that the advantageous special outlier results A and B are selected is 70% (see FIG. 96(c)), when the V jackpot is won, the probability is 70% to shift to the advantageous state 603, and the probability is 30%. It shifts to the normal state 601 with probability. That is, it is easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 compared to the case where the result of the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), in the distribution table of the specified number of times, the specified number of times of the advantageous state 603 is defined in association with the type of the special advantage loss result of the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special advantage loss result A, the specified number of times is set to 10 times, and in the case of the special advantage loss result B, the specified number of times is set to 30 times. Since the probability of selecting the advantageous special losing results A and B when the result of the judgment of the second special figure is a special advantageous losing result is 50% (see FIG. 96 (c)), it became a V jackpot In the case of , it is configured to shift to the first advantageous state 603a with a probability of 50% and to shift to the second advantageous state 603b with a probability of 50%. That is, it is easier to shift to the second advantageous state 603b than when the result of the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the normal state 601, the success determination result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit result, so that the advantageous state 603 with a probability of 50% (relatively low probability) If a V jackpot can be won in the advantageous state 603 after transition, the transition is made to the advantageous state 603 again with a probability of 70% (relatively high probability). That is, it is configured to facilitate the transition to the advantageous state 603 repeatedly.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the result of the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, when the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made, the probability of 20% (relatively low probability) When shifting to the second advantageous state 603b and shifting to the advantageous state 603 with the V jackpot as a trigger, it is configured to shift to the second advantageous state 603b with a probability of 50% (relatively high probability). That is, it is configured to facilitate the transition to the second advantageous state 603b by winning the V jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is advantageous that the first variation B (3 sec) of the special table for the first special figure is set to a shorter period than the first long variation (30 sec) in each of the above embodiments. This is to allow the game to progress at a good tempo while most of the first special symbol game rounds are not invalidated in the middle and are executed to the end in the state 603 .

Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the following description, the description will focus on the parts that are different from the sixth embodiment.

<Processing for storing first side 16R flag>
FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing processing for storing the first side 16R flag in this embodiment.

The storage processing of this embodiment is executed in step S608 of the first fluctuation start processing in FIG. 61 according to the sixth embodiment. In the first fluctuation start process of FIG. 61, in this embodiment, the processes of steps S611 to S614 and S617 are not executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S603, the process proceeds to step S615.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the first side 16R flag storage process, first, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not the distribution result for the current big win is the 16R big win A. If it is a 16 jackpot A, the 16R flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6002. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6001, it means that the distribution result for this big win is 16R big win B, so in step S6003, the 16R flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. . After execution of steps S6002 and S6003, the processing for storing the first side 16R flag ends.

<Processing for storing second side advantageous open flag>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing processing for storing the second side advantageous opening flag according to the present embodiment.

The storage processing of this embodiment is executed in step S914 of the second fluctuation start processing in FIG. 66 according to the sixth embodiment. In the second fluctuation start process of FIG. 66, in this embodiment, the processes of steps S911, S912, and S915 to S917 are not executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S903, the process proceeds to step S913.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the storage processing of the second side advantageous opening flag, first, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the type of the special advantageous losing result of the second special figure is the special advantageous losing result A. In the case of the special advantage loss result A, the advantage release flag A is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6102.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the type of the special advantage loss result of the second special figure is the special advantage loss result B in step S6103. If the result is the special advantage loss result B, the advantage release flag B is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6104. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6103, it means that the type of the advantage special loss result of the second special figure is the advantage special loss result C, so in step S6105 various flag storage areas of the RAM 204 234 stores the advantageous open flag C. After execution of steps S6102, S6104, and S6105, the processing for storing the second-side advantageous open flag ends.

<Table switching processing>
FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing table switching processing according to the present embodiment.

The table switching process of this embodiment is executed in step S3901 of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in FIG. 69 according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the table switching process, first, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The first winning flag is stored when the winning judgment result of the first special figure is a jackpot result (see step S604 in FIG. 61), and the second winning flag is the winning judgment result of the second special figure. is a jackpot result (see step S904 in FIG. 66).

If the first winning flag or the second winning flag is stored, it is determined in step S6202 whether or not the 16R flag A or the 16R flag B is stored in the various flags storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If neither of the 16R flags A and B is stored, it means that the jackpot type is the 8R jackpot, and in this case the table switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the 16R flag A or 16R flag B is stored in step S6202, the advantage table flag A is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S6203. By storing the advantageous table flag A, the special table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603 .

On the other hand, if neither the first nor the second winning flag is stored in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. FIG. The V winning flag is stored when the game ball winning the second variable winning device 32B passes through the V winning area 356, and indicates that the V jackpot has been won.

If the V win flag is stored, it is determined in step S6205 whether or not the advantageous opening flag A or B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. If the advantageous open flag A or B is stored, the process advances to step S6203 to store the advantageous table flag A in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 as already described.

It should be noted that, if the negative determination in step S6204, it means that neither the jackpot nor the V jackpot has been elected, and if the negative determination is made in step S6205, the success or failure determination result of the second special figure is advantageous special This means that the result is a deviation C, and in these cases, the table switching process is terminated.

After execution of step S6203, it is determined whether or not the 16R flag A or the advantageous release flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in the subsequent step S6206. If any one of these flags is stored, 10 is set to the value of the game counter area CG1 for the first special figure in step S6207. The game round counter area CG1 is for counting the number of times the game round of the first special figure is executed after shifting to the advantageous state 603 . By executing the process of step S6207, the specified number of times of the advantageous state 603 is set to 10, and the advantageous state 603 is set to the first advantageous state 603a.

In the following step S6208, the advantageous table command A is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the table switching process is terminated. The advantageous table command A set in step S6208 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). Upon receiving the advantageous table command A, the effect control device 82 outputs to the display control device 212 a command including information on the content of the special effect display A shown in FIG. 104(a).

The special effect display A informs or suggests to the player that the game state has shifted to the first advantageous state 603a. As the special effect display A, for example, as shown in FIG. A configuration may be considered such as changing the background color of the . Furthermore, in the special effect display A, the first advantageous state 603a is the advantage state of cutting the number of times, and the prescribed number of times is 10, so the first advantageous state 603a ends in the upper left part of the display screen G. A remaining number of times display 652 of "remaining 10 times" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations up to is also performed.

On the other hand, if neither the 16R flag A nor the advantageous opening flag A is stored in step S6206, it means that the 16R flag B or the advantageous opening flag B is stored in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, in step S6209, 30 is set to the value of the game counter area CG1 for the first special figure. As a result, the prescribed number of times of the advantageous state 603 is set to 30, and the advantageous state 603 is set to the second advantageous state 603b.

In the subsequent step S6210, the advantageous table command B is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then the table switching process is terminated. Upon receiving the advantageous table command B, the effect control device 82 outputs to the display control device 212 a command including information on the content of the special effect display B shown in FIG. 104(b).

The special effect display B notifies or suggests to the player that the game state has shifted to the second advantageous state 603b. As the special effect display B, like the special effect display A, a character display 651 of "Special time!!" A configuration such as changing to a dedicated color different from both the normal effect display and the special effect display A is conceivable. In addition, in the special effect display B, since the specified number of times of the second advantageous state 603b is 30 times, the remaining number of times display 652 also displays "30 times remaining".

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

Based on the result of judging whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit result, it is configured to shift to an advantageous state 603 where a specific state is likely to occur (in other words, V jackpot is likely to occur), and further , the win probability of the support lottery is set to 1/25, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the second operating port 34 is restricted.

By adopting a configuration in which the advantageous state 603 is provided, it is possible to provide the interest of realizing the transition to the advantageous state 603 by establishing the transition condition. However, in this configuration, the establishment of a specific state is substantially the condition for the occurrence of the V jackpot. It is necessary to let the game ball enter the second operation port 34.例文帳に追加This is because the establishment of the specific state requires the generation of the second special figure game cycle. Under such a configuration, in this configuration, since the frequency of winning of the game ball to the second operation opening 34 is restricted, the simple game that if the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, it becomes easy to naturally obtain the privilege. It is possible to provide the game property that a privilege can be obtained when the second operation port 34 can be won while the difficulty of winning the second operation port 34 is increased, It is possible to improve interest.

In both the normal state 601 and the advantageous state 603, the winning probability of the support lottery is set to 1/25, and the degree of limitation of the winning frequency to the second operation port 34 is made common in both states 601 and 603.例文帳に追加

According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the support lottery is left as it is, and it is sufficient to switch whether to acquire the variable display time of the first special figure and the second special figure from the normal table or the special table, and the control process is simplified. It becomes possible to convert

After the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, the advantageous state 603 is terminated based on the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure becoming the specified number (upper limit number).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a game feature aiming at winning the second operation port 34 before the advantageous state 603 ends while the frequency of winning the second operation port 34 is limited. As a result, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of danger that the advantageous state 603 will end without winning the prize at the second operation opening 34, thereby improving the amusement.

As a transition condition to the advantageous state 603, a first transition condition on the condition that the winning judgment result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, and 16R jackpots A and B are selected as jackpot types; and a second transition condition under which a V jackpot is achieved in the opening/closing execution mode when the success/failure determination result of the second special figure is the advantageous special loss result A or B, and the first transition condition is established. By doing so, the second transition condition is more likely to be satisfied than before the first transition condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, before the first transition condition is established, the game is played with the aim of establishing the first transition condition, and after the first transition condition is established, the game is played with the aim of establishing the second transition condition. The game method can be switched on the basis of the establishment of the 1 transition condition. As a result, the player is not confused even though it has both the game property of shifting to the advantageous state 603 when the first transition condition is satisfied and the game property of shifting to the advantageous state 603 when the second transition condition is satisfied. can be suppressed and the ease of play can be improved.

The second transition condition can be established in the advantageous state 603, and when the second transition condition is established in the advantageous state 603, the game state can be shifted again to the advantageous state 603 after the end of the advantageous state 603. It was configured.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to satisfy the second transition condition in the advantageous state 603 shifted based on the establishment of the first transition condition, and when the second transition condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603, , the game state can be shifted to the advantageous state 603 again after the advantageous state 603 ends. As a result, if the second transition condition is satisfied in the preceding advantageous state 603, the transition to the advantageous state 603 can be repeated, and the advantageous state 603 can be generated continuously. As a result, not only is the expectation that the V jackpot will occur in the advantageous state 603, but also the second transition condition (the type of the special advantage loss result that triggers the V jackpot is the special advantage loss result A or B) is established. Expectation can also be aroused, and interest is improved.

First and second advantageous states 603a, 603b having different degrees of advantage are provided as the advantageous state 603, and when the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, the configuration shifts to either the first or second advantageous state 603a, 603b. and

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the game property of shifting to the advantageous state 603 while diversifying the degree of advantage. (second advantageous state 603b).

In this embodiment, the first advantageous state 603a and the second advantageous state 603b are configured to use a common special table. Different special tables such as special tables A and B shown may be used. In this case, the specified number of times (upper limit number) may be set to the same number for the first advantageous state 603a and the second advantageous state 603b, or may be set to different numbers.

Further, in this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the configuration may be such that the advantageous state 603 is entered after the conditions are met step by step. In this case, it is preferable to set a first condition and a second condition as conditions for shifting to the advantageous state 603, and to shift to the precursor state 602 (see FIG. 76) when the first condition is satisfied.

In this case, as in the seventh embodiment, a first precursor state 602a and a second precursor state 602b are provided, and when the promotion condition is satisfied, the first precursor state 602a transitions to the second precursor state 602b. Alternatively, the second precursor state 602b may transition to the first precursor state 602a when the demotion condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to move to the second advantageous state 603b by satisfying a specific promotion condition during the stay in the first advantageous state 603a. A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the first advantageous state 603a is possible when a specific demotion condition is met during the stay.

As such a configuration, for example, in the first advantageous state 603 a promotion condition is established by the fact that the result of the judgment result of the first special figure becomes the disadvantageous special outlier result B, and the first special figure in the second advantageous state 603 b The demotion condition can be established when the success/failure determination process results in a disadvantageous special loss result A.

In addition, promotion and demotion conditions are not limited to those described above, and may correspond to special disadvantageous outlier results other than A and B, or a dedicated random number counter (for example, the sixth implementation A conditional random number counter in the form) may be provided and established when the value reaches a specific value. Furthermore, for the second special figure (second operation port 34) jackpot random number counter CB1 may be established by becoming a specific value, and the variation type counter CS of the first special figure or the second special figure It may be established by becoming a specific value. Furthermore, for example, for both promotion and relegation conditions, both conditions may be the same, such as the adequacy determination result of the first special figure in the first advantageous state 603a being the disadvantageous special outlier result B .

Incidentally, the promotion from the first advantageous state 603a to the second advantageous state 603b and the demotion from the second advantageous state 603b to the first advantageous state 603a do not necessarily have both, but only one of them is provided. It may be a configuration.

Also in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 may be increased based on the establishment of the additional condition in the advantageous state 603 . Further, the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 may be reduced based on the fact that the reduction condition is satisfied in the advantageous state 603 . In this case, it is not necessary to provide both the configuration for increasing the remaining number of times and the configuration for decreasing the remaining number of times, and the configuration may include only one of them.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configurations of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are different. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each working port in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the operation port on the side of the second special figure is different. A third working port 34B is provided as the working port on the side of the second special figure in this embodiment. The third working port 34B is arranged upstream of the first working port 33 and the through gate 35 . As for the first operating port 33 and the through gate 35, the through gate 35 is arranged directly above the first operating port 33 on the first special figure side, as in the first and second embodiments.

In more detail about the third working port 34B, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the third working port 34B is an opening of a size through which a game ball can pass, which is opened in the front-rear direction. formed. The third operating port 34B is provided with an electric accessory 331 capable of switching between an open state in which it is easy to enter a ball into the third operating port 34B and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a ball. The electric accessory 331 corresponds to the electric accessory 34a.

In more detail about the electric role 331, the electric role 331 includes an opening and closing role 332 that defines the movement of the game ball in the front-rear direction in the third operating port 34B, and a game ball that flows down from above the third operating port 34B. and a receiving object 333 that receives from below and guides it to the third operation port 34B (rear side of the game machine). The opening/closing accessory 332 has an opening/closing member 334 that can be switched between a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through the third operating port 34B and an open state in which a game ball can pass through. It is switched between an open state and a closed state by being driven by 335 through a link mechanism (not shown). When the opening/closing member 334 is in an open state, the opening/closing member 334 is arranged behind the third operating port 34B (the front surface of the game board 24), more specifically, above the ball discharge passage leading from the third operating port 34B. placed. When the opening/closing member 334 is in the closed state, the opening/closing member 334 closes the third operation opening 34B and becomes flush with the front surface of the game board 24 . In other words, the opening/closing member 334 does not protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 24 in either the open state or the closed state.

The receiving object 333 receives a predetermined number (only one ball) of game balls flowing down from above the third operating port 34B and guides the received game ball to the third operating port 34B. , and a non-receiving state in which game balls falling from above cannot be received from below. The receiving member 336 is switched between a receiving state and a non-receiving state by being driven by the driving portion 337 through a link mechanism (not shown). When the receiving member 336 is in the receiving state, the receiving member 336 protrudes forward from the third operating port 34B (the front surface of the game board 24) and can receive a predetermined number (only one ball) of game balls flowing down from above. Become. On the other hand, when the receiving member 336 is in a non-receiving state, the receiving member 336 is arranged behind the third operating port 34B (the front surface of the game board 24). Placed on the bottom. That is, the receiving member 336 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 24 in the receiving state, and is arranged behind the front surface of the game board 24 in the non-receiving state.

That is, the state in which the opening and closing accessory 332 is in the open state and the receiving accessory 333 is in the receiving state corresponds to the supporting state (open state) of the electric accessory 331, and the opening and closing accessory 332 is in the closed state and the receiving state. The state in which the object 333 is in the non-receiving state corresponds to the non-supporting state (closed state) of the electric accessory 331 . When the electric accessory 331 is in the supported state, entry into the third operating opening 34B is permitted, and when the electric accessory 331 is in the non-supporting state, entry into the third operating opening 34B is restricted. In other words, when the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, the ball entry rate into the third operation opening 34B is improved, and when the electric accessory 331 is in the non-support state, the ball entry rate into the third operation opening 34B is improved. decreases.

As in the first and second embodiments, a ball enters the through gate 35 and the first operation opening 33, and the game round on the first special figure side is started, and a support lottery is performed. When the prize is won, the electric accessory 331 is put in the support state, and the winning to the third operation port 34B is permitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 105, the third working opening 34B is arranged so as to exist on the path for making the game ball enter the first working opening 33. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a game ball is launched to generate a winning prize to the third operation port 34B, the game ball flows down along the path to the first operation port 33.例文帳に追加When the electric accessory 331 of the third operating port 34B is in the supporting state, the game ball flowing down enters the third operating port 34B, and when the electric accessory 331 is in the non-supporting state, the game ball enters the first operating port 33. win a prize. As described above, the electric accessory 331 is placed in the supported state based on the winning of the first operating port 33, more specifically, the winning of the through gate 35. Therefore, when the winning of the third operating port 34B occurs This means that the winning to the first operation opening 33 has occurred before that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the third working port 34B on the side of the second special price is arranged on the flow path to the first working port 33 on the side of the first special price, and the third working port 34B on the side of the first special price A through gate 35 is provided in the 1 operation port 33 . Therefore, when trying to generate a winning prize to the third working opening 34B on the side of the second special figure, it is necessary to flow down on the path to the first working opening 33 on the side of the first special figure, and the third working opening 34B It is difficult to generate only the winning prizes. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize the game property in which the first operating port 33 and the third operating port 34B are won as a set to progress the game.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the flow path of the game ball to the operation port on the side of the second special figure is different. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an overview of the upstream side game area PE of the second special figure side operation opening (fourth operation opening 34C) of the present embodiment.

In this embodiment, each component of the game area PE is provided so that there are a first route and a second route through which the game ball can pass on the upstream side of the fourth operation port 34C on the second special figure side. there is The first route and the second route are flow-down paths through which game balls entering from the entrance portion 370 pass, and a fourth operation port 34C is provided in the discharge portion 371 on the downstream side thereof. The fourth operation port 34C has the same configuration as that of the third embodiment, and is provided with an electric accessory 331. As shown in FIG.

A game ball entered from the entrance portion 370 branches into a first route and a second route at a branching position 372 provided downstream of the entrance portion 370 . In this case, it is set so that the flow-down time required to reach the fourth operating port 34C is shorter when passing through the first route than when passing through the second route.

Therefore, when trying to win the fourth operation opening 34C after winning the through gate 35 and the electric accessory 331 is in the support state, it is better to pass the first route than the second route. It is possible to cause the winning to the fourth operation opening 34C more quickly than passing through the . As a result, the first route allows the game round on the second special side to start earlier than the second route, and the game round on the second special side is faster than the game round on the first special side. are more likely to end early. This facilitates execution of the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantage loss result. Therefore, in a configuration in which it is advantageous to start the game round on the second special figure side immediately after the game round on the first special figure side is started, the game round on the second special figure side is determined by the behavior of the game ball. Since the start timing of is different, it is possible to add a game to enjoy the behavior of the game ball in addition to the variable display time and the lottery result, and it is possible to preferably increase the attention to the game.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a plurality of operation openings on the side of the second special figure are provided. FIG. 108(a) is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized in the working port case and provided in the lower region PE4. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the second operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a. However, the electric accessory 34a does not operate through the lottery on the normal side when the through gate 35 is won, but when the first operation opening 33 is won, the electric accessory 34a is opened without going through the lottery. be done. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 sec) elapses from the winning timing to the first operation opening 33, the electric accessory 34a is closed. That is, the operation of the electric accessory 34a is automatically opened based on the winning of the first operation opening 33, and automatically closed after a predetermined period of time. The control in this case may be performed by the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, or may be electrically controlled via an independent board without the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. may

The right side area PE3 of the game board 24 is provided with a fifth operation opening 34D as an operation opening on the side of the second special figure provided separately from the second operation opening 34 . A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the fifth operation port 34D in the right region PE3. An electric accessory 34d is provided in the fifth operating port 34D, and a winning lottery on the side of the normal drawing is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the electric accessory 34d is opened by winning the lottery. It is said that Since the relationship between the electric accessory 34d and the through gate 35 is the same as the relationship between the electric accessory 34a and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 108(b), in a situation where the electric accessory 34d is in the closed state, the distance between the nail 24b provided on the upstream side of the fifth operating port 34D and the electric accessory 34d is the distance of the game ball. By being shorter than the diameter, prize winning to the fifth operating port 34D is restricted, and by opening the electric accessory 34d, prize winning to the fifth operating port 34D is permitted.

In this embodiment, the high-frequency support state and the low-frequency support state are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34d being in the open state is relatively high or low. Since the configuration for setting the frequency of such frequency is well known, the explanation is omitted, but it may be a configuration realized by changing the probability of the success or failure lottery on the side of the normal map, or the normal map side. It may be a configuration realized by changing the variable display time, a configuration realized by changing the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 34d, or a combination thereof. configuration may be used.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the present embodiment, in the transition processing at the end of the opening and closing execution mode of the game state transition processing (FIG. 21), the current opening and closing execution mode is the first special figure side as a predetermined game result. Or when the game result on the second special figure side is the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result, it is configured to shift to the high frequency support mode of the electric accessory 34d. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the first special figure side or the second special figure side game round is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is configured to shift to the low frequency support mode.

It should be noted that the probability and distribution table of the success/failure determination on the side of the first special figure and the probability and distribution table of the success/failure determination on the side of the second special figure are the same as those of the first embodiment. In other words, it becomes almost a disadvantageous special out result in the right or wrong judgment on the side of the first special figure, and it becomes almost an advantageous special out result in the right or wrong judgment on the side of the second special figure.

The playability of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the low-frequency support mode, even if a game ball is shot aiming at the right side area PE3 and a prize is awarded to the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball based on the prize is not performed, and the electric ball is not paid out based on the prize. The frequency of opening the accessory 34d is low, and winning of the fifth operation opening 34D cannot be expected. Furthermore, similarly to the first embodiment, if the game ball is shot aiming at the right side area PE3, the winning rate to the first operation opening 33 is lower than when the game ball is shot aiming at the left side area PE2. The nail 24b and the like are arranged so as to substantially prevent the winning of the first operation opening 33 from occurring. That is, if a game is played aiming at the right side area PE3 in the low-frequency support mode, it becomes a game in which the winning lottery on the special figure side can hardly be received. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is launched aiming at the left side area PE2, and based on the winning prize to the first operation port 33, the winning lottery on the first special figure side is received, and the first operation port 33 It is more advantageous for the player to play a game that receives a winning lottery on the second special figure side based on the winning of the second operation port 34 that is opened based on the winning.

In the high-frequency support mode, by shooting a game ball aiming at the right area PE3, winning to the through gate 35 occurs, and the electric accessory 34d is easily opened based on the winning. Then, regardless of the game round of the first special figure side, it becomes possible to implement the game round of the second special figure side, and the winning/failure lottery result of the second special figure side is easily reflected. In other words, the opening and closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result that frequently occurs in the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure becomes easier to implement. Then, when a V winning occurs during the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning is executed. When a predetermined number of games are played in the high-frequency support mode, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of opening the electric accessory 34d and the probability of winning the fifth operation opening 34D are not zero.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state (low frequency support mode) in which the game round on the side of the second special figure can be executed in relation to the game round on the side of the first special figure (low frequency support mode), and the second special figure Since it has a state in which the game round on the side can be performed regardless of the game round on the first special figure side, the so-called Renzo zone (high frequency support mode) can be realized.

In particular, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of the winning lottery on the side of the second special figure is not changed. In addition, the length of the selected variable display time does not change regardless of the number of times the game is played. Therefore, it is possible to provide a substantial consecutive zone without changing the winning probability or variable display time, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

In the low-frequency support mode, the recommended game is a left-handed game in which winning to the first working port 33 leads to winning to the second working port 34. Although the probability of winning is not zero and relatively low frequency, it is possible to perform the game round on the side of the second special figure without going through the game round on the side of the first special figure. The winning lottery on the 2nd special figure side is set so that the result is almost an advantageous special loss result, so the game round on the 2nd special figure side is played without going through the game round on the 1st special figure side. If it can be implemented, it will be possible to receive benefits based on the advantageous special loss result. In other words, even in the low frequency support mode, instead of a left-handed game that waits for the result of the second special figure side game round to be reflected in relation to the first special figure side game round, the fifth A right-handed game of waiting for winning to the operation port 34D can also be carried out according to the player's preference. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to select the desired game, and various needs can be met. It should be noted that even in the high-frequency support mode, it is also possible to play a left-handed game in which the game round on the side of the first special figure is executed via the game round on the side of the first special figure. In this case, since the game result on the side of the second special figure is reflected with the same probability as during the low-frequency support mode, the merit for the player is low. However, for example, if the time when you have to leave the store is approaching, and you want to complete only the game round on the 1st special plan side and leave the store without leaving the Renso zone, high-frequency support It can be said that there is also significance in playing left-handed games. From this point of view as well, it is possible to respond to various needs.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In the first embodiment, when the first long variation on the first special figure side is selected or when the second short variation on the second special figure side is selected, to the second operation port 34 Regardless of the winning timing, the length of the variable display time that the game round on the second special figure side ends first is set, but this may be changed as follows. That is, if the winning timing to the second operating port 34 is later than the predetermined timing, such as just before the electric accessory 34a is closed, Even if the 1st long variation is selected on the 1st special figure side or the 2nd short variation is selected on the 2nd special figure side, the game round on the 1st special figure side will end earlier Each variable display time and a period during which the open state of the electric accessory 34a is maintained may be set. In this way, even if the same variable display time is set in the game round on the second special figure side, the game on the second special figure side is played at the earliest possible timing after the game round on the first special figure side is started. It is advantageous for the player to start the turn. Therefore, it is possible to realize game characteristics that are more advantageous for the player to win the second operation opening 34 immediately after winning the first operation opening 33 .

In the above game characteristics, the fluctuation display time of the game round on the side of the first special figure is long, the fluctuation display time of the game round on the side of the second special figure is short, and the game round on the side of the second special figure The game round on the side of the second special figure ends earlier than the game round on the side of the first special figure depending on whether the start timing is early or not. That is, in addition to the items selected on the gaming machine side such as the length of the variable display time of both game rounds, the player's launch operation such as the start timing of the second special figure side, that is, the winning timing to the second operation port 34 Since the game includes matters involving the player, it is possible to leave room for the player to intervene and encourage active participation in the game.

(2) In the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantageous special loss result or the disadvantageous special loss result, when V winning occurs in the second variable prize winning device 32B, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V win is executed as the next opening/closing execution mode. However, for example, if a V prize is generated in a predetermined round (for example, the first round) of the opening and closing execution mode based on the special advantage result or the special disadvantage result, the opening and closing execution mode after the predetermined round A configuration may be adopted in which rounds (second and subsequent rounds) are implemented.

(3) In the opening/closing execution mode based on the special advantageous loss result and the disadvantageous special loss result, the probability of V winning is arbitrary and may be changed according to the designed game characteristics. However, if V wins are too likely to occur, the open/close execution mode based on V wins may be frequently implemented, resulting in an extremely high pitch rate. Therefore, by setting the V winning rate to, for example, a predetermined value or less (1/10 or less), it is possible to realize the above-described excellent game characteristics while suppressing a rise in the ball-putting rate.

(4) The positional relationship between the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above. For example, the first variable winning device 32A may be arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 32B, or both variable winning devices 32A and 32B may be arranged side by side. In addition, although both the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are arranged in the lower region PE4, they may all be arranged in regions PE1, PE2 and PE3 different from the lower region PE4. and may be placed in different regions. For example, the first variable winning device 32A may be arranged in the lower region PE4, and the second variable winning device 32B may be arranged in the left region PE2 or the right region PE3, or may be arranged in the reverse positional relationship. good. Further, both variable winning devices 32A and 32B may be arranged in the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, respectively, or both or one of them may be arranged in the upper side area PE1. Among these, both variable winning devices 32A and 32B are arranged so that they can be separately shot (arrangement that does not reach the other when aimed at one), to generate a V prize based on the result of special loss It is possible to play a game while clearly distinguishing between the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning and the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the big win. Conversely, by arranging it in a position where it is difficult or impossible to distinguish between shots (a position where one is aimed and the other is reached), for example, an opening and closing execution mode that generates a V prize and an opening and closing execution mode based on a V winning It is possible to make a series of games flow more smoothly.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening/closing execution mode is frequently performed based on the special deviation result. Therefore, in the relationship with the ball-entering part for acquiring the holding information such as the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, the ball-entering part for acquiring the holding information part) and the second variable prize winning device 32B for generating V prizes are arranged in such a way that it is difficult or impossible to separate them, so that the second variable prize winning device 32B is frequently performed while acquiring the pending information. It is also possible to make the prize balls by the prize winning to the second variable prize winning device 32B during the opening and closing execution mode of the second variable prize winning device 32B assist the holding balls. Conversely, an arrangement in which the ball-entering unit for obtaining hold information and the second variable prize-winning device 32B for generating V prizes can be separately fired (if one is aimed at, the other is not reached). arrangement), it is possible to avoid awarding extra prize balls (prize balls based on winning to the second variable prize winning device 32B) during the game for which the pending information is acquired, and the second If the variable prize winning device 32B is to win a prize, it is necessary to change the firing intensity, so V prizes are less likely to occur during the open/close execution mode in which the distribution mode is low unless the target is intentionally aimed.

(5) In the first embodiment and the like, the game results of the first special figure and the second special figure are the jackpot result, the special disadvantageous loss result, the advantageous special loss result, and the normal loss result. However, the game result on the first special figure side may be only the disadvantageous special loss result, and the game result on the second special figure side may be only the advantageous special loss result. In addition, in terms of game characteristics such as how to implement the opening and closing execution mode of the advantageous special loss result on the second special figure side, the game result on the first special figure side is not only the disadvantageous special loss result but also the normal loss result. It is good also as a structure included. This is because, if the first special figure side is the result of normal loss, the opening/closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result of the second special figure side is executed even if the game round of the first special figure side ends first.

(6) A first game counter and a second game counter are provided separately, the number of games on the first special figure side is specified by the first game counter, and the number of games on the second special figure side is specified by the second game. Although the number of games is specified by the number counter, the number of games played may be specified by one counter. For example, although the game round on the first special figure side is implemented, if the game round on the second special figure side is not implemented, the first game round counter is incremented, but the second game round counter is It is not added, and a deviation occurs in both counters, but by doing as described above, it is possible to avoid an event in which the variable display time does not come as designed due to the deviation.

However, as in the above-described embodiment, the following game can be implemented by allowing the deviation between the first game counter and the second game counter. For example, a game is performed in which the winning to the first operating port 33 is generated but the winning to the second operating port 34 is not generated, and only the first game counter is incremented. Then, for example, in a situation where the second game round counter is 10, if only the first game round counter is incremented to 101, the game round on the first special figure side is set to the variable display time by the second zone. On the other hand, the setting of the variable display time by the first zone is performed for the game round on the side of the second special figure. Then, after that, when returning to the game in which the game round on the first special figure side and the game round on the second special figure side are performed in parallel, 10 game rounds (the first game round counter is 101 to 110, the second 2 game round counter is 11 to 20) is a zone where the set of the first long variation and the second long variation is likely to be selected, the 11th to 90th round (1st game round counter is 111 to 190, the second game round counter is 21 to 100) is a zone where the set of the first short fluctuation and the second long fluctuation is likely to be selected, and the 91st to 100th times (191 to 200 for the first game counter, 101 to 110 for the second game counter) The set of the first short fluctuation and the second short fluctuation becomes a zone where it is easy to select, and the 101st to 110th times (the first game counter is 201 to 210, the second game counter is 111 to 120) is the first long fluctuation The set of second length variations will be the zone that is likely to be selected. In other words, if it is a configuration that realizes the zone where the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first by the length of the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side and the length of the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side , The zone where the game round on the second special figure side tends to end first due to the deviation of both game round counters is the zone realized by setting the variable display time on the first special figure side (in the above example, The first game counter is 101-110, 201-210, the second game counter is 11-20, 111-120 zones) and the zone realized by setting the variable display time on the second special figure side (above In the example, the first game counter is 191-200, and the second game counter is 101-110). In this way, it is also possible to intentionally adjust the zone in which the game round on the second special figure side ends first.

(7) In the fluctuation display time table (FIG. 29) of the first embodiment, etc., when the first long fluctuation is set as the fluctuation display time on the side of the first special figure, or the fluctuation display on the side of the second special figure When the second short fluctuation is set as the time, either, the game round on the second special figure side ends first, but the first special figure side is the first long fluctuation and the second When the special figure side is the second short fluctuation, it may be configured such that the game round on the second special figure side ends first.

Further, by adjusting the variable display time of one of the first special figure and the second special figure, it may be configured to generate an event in which the game round on the second special figure side ends first. Specifically, for example, the fluctuation display time on the side of the second special figure is made constant at the second long fluctuation. Then, the variation display time on the first special figure side is configured to select either the first short variation or the second long variation, and when the first short variation is selected, the first special figure side , the game round ends first, and when the first long variation is selected, the game round on the second special figure side ends first. In this way, the event that the game round on the side of the second special figure ends first becomes more likely to occur as the length of the variable display time of the game round on the side of the first special figure becomes longer, The content of the game times becomes easier to understand.

(8) Each variation display time of the first short variation, first long variation, second short variation, and second long variation is an example, and may be longer than the above as long as the effects of each invention are achieved. Good or short. Also, if the first special figure side is the first long fluctuation, the game round on the second special figure side will start regardless of the start timing of the second special figure side or the length of the fluctuation display time on the second special figure side. Although it is configured to end first, depending on the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side and the length of the variable display time on the second special figure side, whether the game round on the second special figure side ends first The length of the first length variation may be set such that . Also, if it is the second short fluctuation on the second special figure side, the game round on the second special figure side regardless of the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side or the length of the fluctuation display time on the first special figure side is configured to finish first, but depending on the start timing of the game round on the second special figure side and the length of the variable display time on the first special figure side, whether the game round on the second special figure side ends first The length of the second short variation may be set such that the length is different.

(9) The opening/closing mode of each opening/closing execution mode is not limited to the above. For example, the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning may be the result of the 8 rounds of the jackpot, or the opening/closing execution mode of an opening/closing mode different from the opening/closing execution mode of the 16 rounds or the opening/closing execution mode of the 8 rounds performed based on the jackpot results. may be Further, the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result may be provided with an opening/closing execution mode having an opening/closing manner different from the opening/closing execution mode of 16 rounds or 8 rounds. For example, a 2-round opening and closing execution mode may be provided, with the number of rounds being less than 16 or 8 rounds. Moreover, even if the number of rounds is the same, an opening/closing execution mode may be provided in which the opening/closing mode of the big winning opening 321 is different. For example, the opening mode of the big prize opening 321 may include a mode in which it is opened for a long time and a mode in which it is opened for a short time, and the opening/closing mode may be changed by combining these. In addition, the opening and closing of the big prize opening 321 during one round is not limited to one time, and may be performed multiple times. good. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode based on the special failure result, it may be possible to open/close multiple times during one round.

(10) The first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are provided separately, and the second variable winning device 32B executes the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss, but only one variable winning device It is good also as a structure implement|achieved by. In this case, a V winning area in which V winning is possible is provided in the one variable winning device, and whether or not V winning occurs depends on the opening/closing mode of the variable winning device and the allocation to the V winning area. configuration.

(11) Although 15 prize balls are paid out regardless of whether the first variable prize winning device 32A or the second variable prize winning device 32B wins, the number of prize balls may be different. For example, if the prize balls of the second variable prize-winning device 32B are smaller than the prize balls of the first variable prize-winning device 32A, the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result or V-winning and the opening/closing execution mode based on the special losing result are The opening/closing execution mode for awarding the privilege and the opening/closing execution mode for generating the V prize can be clearly distinguished. In this way, for example, it is possible to suppress the act of trying to obtain a prize ball by aiming for the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss.

(12) Using the positional relationship between the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35, when the game round on the second special figure side is started, the game on the first special figure side must be However, regarding the possibility of winning a prize to the second operating port 34, instead of using the electric accessory 34a, it is mechanically based on the winning to the first operating port 33. A configuration may be adopted in which winning to the second operation port 34 is allowed. For example, the electric accessory 34a is opened using the motion and weight of the game ball that has entered the first operating port 33, and after a predetermined period of time, the electric accessory 34a is closed using the motion and weight of the game ball. It may be a so-called non-electric accessory. As this configuration, for example, in the passage through which the game ball that has won the first operation opening 33 passes, a link mechanism for opening the electric accessory 34a is provided at a position where it passes immediately after winning the first operation opening 33, The electric accessory 34a is opened by the opening link mechanism. Further, a link mechanism for closing the electric accessory 34a is provided at a position where the game ball passes after a predetermined period from the position where the link mechanism for opening is provided, and the electric accessory 34a is opened by the link mechanism for closing. It may be configured to be in a closed state.

(13) In the variable display time table of FIG. 29, the second zone (for example, the first game counter = 101 to 110, 201 to 210, etc.) where the game round on the second special figure side tends to end first is the above It is not limited to the above, and can be changed according to the game characteristics to be designed. For example, the second zone may not be provided up to the ceiling (501-), or as in the second embodiment, as a continuous zone after the big win, the smaller the value of each game counter, the more the second feature. A configuration may be adopted in which the game cycle on the drawing side is likely to end first. In addition, a plurality of zones are provided in which the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first, and in each zone, the probability that the game round on the second special figure side is likely to end first is different. A configuration in which the probabilities of selecting the long fluctuation and the second short fluctuation are different) may be employed.

Furthermore, in each zone, the same numerical value was set for the first game counter and the second game counter. It may be configured to differ from the number of games in which the short variation is likely to be selected. Even if the first long fluctuation is selected, even if the second short fluctuation is selected, the game round on the second special figure side ends first, so opening and closing based on the advantageous special loss result Although the event that facilitates execution of the execution mode is the same, the length of the effect duration of the game cycle by each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may differ. Therefore, by doing so, it is possible to provide a difference in relation to the performance, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

(14) The special table of the second embodiment or the like may be configured to be set when the power is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player who plays the game first after the opening of the game hall has an advantage without changing the probability of the winning lottery.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the suspension information is not stored while each game is being played.

In this case, if the variable display time set according to the number of stored reservation information is different, which of the first special figure side game round and the second special figure side game round ends first? , can be changed according to the number of pending information. For example, if the variable display time of the game round on the second special figure side is likely to be shortened as the number of pending information on the second special figure side increases, the second special figure increases as the number of pending information on the second special figure side increases. The game round on the drawing side tends to end earlier. Also, if the variable display time of the game round on the first special figure side is likely to be shortened as the number of pending information on the first special figure side increases, the larger the number of pending information on the first special figure side, the more the first special figure The side outside the game on the side of the drawing tends to end earlier.

(16) In the second variable winning device 32B, the shutter 358 is driven and controlled at the same timing for each opening/closing execution mode, and the shutter 358 performs a constant operation from the opening/closing execution mode start timing. Any configuration may be used as long as a certain operation is performed from a predetermined timing. For example, the shutter 358 may be configured to operate after a predetermined period from the start timing of the first special figure side game round or the start timing of the second special figure side game round. By doing so, it is possible to change the likelihood of V winning in relation to the length of the variable display time of each game round.

(17) During the first special figure side game round that is performed based on the winning of the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34 is made to win and the second special figure side game round is performed. Although the game characteristics such as whether the game round on the second special figure side is finished before the game round on the first special figure side has been explained, the game round on the second special figure side is It may be a game feature such as finishing before a predetermined state different from the times. For example, a state is set in which a predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period on the display screen G, the second operation opening 34 is made to win during the state, and the second special figure side game round based on the winning is performed. If the predetermined effect is completed earlier than the predetermined period of execution, a privilege is given as a game result on the side of the second special figure (opening/closing execution mode based on the game result is executed). Further, a sorting device is provided upstream of the second variable winning device 32B, and the mode of sorting the game balls by the sorting device includes a mode of sorting to the second variable winning device 32B and a mode of not sorting to the second variable winning device 32B. set. Then, during the period in which the distribution to the second variable winning device 32B is performed, the game turn on the second special figure side ends, thereby allowing the winning to the second variable winning device 32B and generating a V winning. It is good also as a structure which obtains.

(18) In the lottery system on the general map side, when determining the variable display time, the configuration may be such that a counter provided for setting the variable display time is acquired without using the electric accessory release counter C4.

(19) In the lottery system on the normal drawing side, the number of times of opening the electric accessary 34a, the duration of opening, and the variable display time are not limited to those described above, and may be changed within the scope of the effects of the invention.

(20) As in the thirteenth embodiment, using the second operation port 34 and the fifth operation port 34D, the second special figure side only while the first special figure side game round is being implemented and a state in which the game round on the second special figure side can be carried out regardless of whether or not the game round on the first special figure side is implemented. For example, it may be changed as follows. That is, during the low-frequency support mode, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operation port 34 is opened for a predetermined period of time triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33. The configuration is as follows. Then, based on the transition to the high-frequency support mode, the configuration is such that the winning of the second operation port 34 is frequently allowed. Even in this way, in the low-frequency support mode, if the winning to the first operation port 33 is not passed, the winning to the second operation port 34 does not occur, and in the high-frequency support mode, the first operation Winning to the second operating port 34 can be generated without going through the winning to the port 33. - 特許庁In this case, the position of the through gate 35 may be directly above the first operating port 33 as in the first embodiment, or may be provided in the right region PE3 as in the thirteenth embodiment.

(21) The start of each game round is restricted in the first game round control process or the second game round control process based on the V winning flag being stored during the opening/closing execution mode based on the special loss result (step A positive determination may be made in S501 or step S801). By storing the V winning flag, the opening and closing execution mode based on the V winning flag is implemented in the game state transition processing of the normal processing to be started next after the end of the opening and closing execution mode. By the way, after the opening/closing execution mode in which the V win flag is stored, if the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs before the next game state transition processing, the first special figure This is because the game round on the side and the game round on the second special figure side can be started. In the above embodiment, although the game round is started even in such a situation, the affirmative determination is made in step S501 or step S801 of the subsequent game round control processing, and the game round does not proceed (does not end). ) until the opening/closing execution mode ends.

(22) The probability of being distributed to the 16-round jackpot result is different between the case of a big hit result in the judgment of the 1st special figure side and the case of a big hit result in the judgment of the 2nd special figure side. Although it is set to ensure the superiority of the second special figure side, the distribution destination and distribution rate of the jackpot result may be different from the above. For example, a 2-round jackpot result in which two round games are performed is set as a distribution destination of the jackpot result. And, when it becomes a jackpot result in the hit/fail judgment on the first special figure side, it is set so as to be easily distributed to the two-round jackpot result. In this way, the superiority of the second special figure side can be secured more clearly.

(23) Conducting a support lottery on the side of the normal diagram based on the winning through the through gate 35, and if winning the support lottery, the electric accessary 34a is opened and the winning of the second operation opening 34 is permitted. However, after winning the support lottery, the electric accessory 34a may be opened by satisfying a predetermined condition. As a predetermined condition, for example, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through a predetermined passage portion, and when the game ball passes through the predetermined passage portion, winning to the second operation opening 34 is permitted. In this case, if the predetermined passing portion is provided at the position where the through gate 35 is provided in the first embodiment (right above the first working opening 33), based on the winning to the first working opening 33 The electric accessory 34a is opened. The through gate 35 may be arranged directly above the first operating port 33 (it may be above or below a predetermined passing portion) as in the first embodiment, or may be arranged directly above the first operating port 33. It may be arranged at a position other than the position where the game ball passes in a situation where the game ball is shot aiming at the first operation opening 33 (for example, the left side area PE2).

(24) Regarding the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special loss result is executed, the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode ends (the timing at which the ending period ends) ), the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be terminated. In this way, the player's attention who enjoys watching the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is prevented from shifting to the opening/closing execution mode based on the unfavorable special loss result which is executed every time. , it is possible to fully enjoy the production.

(25) When executing the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of disadvantageous special loss, the opening command may not be set at step S1010 in the game state transition process, and the external signal may not be set at step S1011. If the opening command is not set, it is possible to reduce the output/receive commands in the opening/closing execution mode based on the disadvantageous special outage result that is executed every time, and if the external signal is not set. It is also possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of receiving an external signal for the opening/closing execution mode based on the result of disadvantageous special loss every time in the hall computer of the game hall or the like.

(26) In a configuration that provides a plurality of types of disadvantageous special loss results on the first special figure side and realizes game characteristics according to the types of these disadvantageous special loss results, there are also a plurality of disadvantageous special loss results on the second special figure side A configuration may be provided in which a type is provided, and game characteristics corresponding to the type are realized when the disadvantageous special loss result on the side of the second special figure is reflected. In addition, a plurality of types of advantageous special loss results for either or both of the first special figure side and the second special figure side are set, and when these advantageous special loss results are reflected, the game characteristics according to the type are set. It is good also as a structure which implement|achieves.

(27) In the sixth to ninth embodiments, when the result of the judgment of whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a jackpot result, it is configured to move to the advantageous state 603, but in the advantageous state 603 A configuration that does not migrate is also possible. In this case, in the sixth embodiment, establishment of the first condition is a prerequisite for the transition to the advantageous state 603, and establishment of a configuration that permits the transition to the advantageous state 603 by the establishment of the first condition. can be done.

(28) In the sixth to ninth embodiments, the gaming state is always set to the normal state 601 after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the V jackpot ends, but the configuration can be set to the advantageous state 603. may be In this case, for example, the game state may be divided into the normal state 601 or the advantageous state 603 based on the success/failure determination result of the second special figure that triggered the occurrence of the V jackpot (type of special outlier result). Moreover, it may be configured to be set in the portent state 602 . In this case, the transition destination may be selected from two types of states, the normal state 601 and the precursor state 602, or may be configured to select the transition destination from three types of states including the advantageous state 603. .

(29) In the sixth embodiment, the conditions for establishing the first and second conditions are that a specific value is acquired as the conditional random number counter CC. The success/failure judgment result of the figure will be a specific result (for example, the success/failure judgment result of the first special figure will be a specific disadvantageous special loss result), and the lottery result of the support lottery will be a specific result (support result). , Obtaining a specific value as the fluctuation type counter CS, obtaining specific fluctuation display time information as the fluctuation display time information of the first and/or second special figure, etc. may be established conditions.

(30) In the sixth embodiment, the second condition is different from the first condition, but may be the same condition as the first condition.

(31) In the above sixth to eighth embodiments, based on the fact that the suitability determination result of the first special figure is a disadvantageous special loss result, transition to the precursor state 602 or the first and second precursor states 602a, 602b Although the configuration is such that the process of determining whether or not to perform the migration determination is performed, the execution timing of the migration determination is not limited to this. For example, the result of the right or wrong determination of the second special figure is a disadvantageous special outlier, a specific value is acquired as the variation type counter CS, and the first and / or second special figure is specified as the variation display time information. Acquisition of the variable display time information, or the fact that the lottery result of the support lottery becomes a specific result (support result) may be used as a trigger. In addition, a dedicated random number (dedicated random number for an independent determination trigger such as a conditional random number counter CC) is provided for determining whether or not to perform a transition determination to the portent state 602, and a specific value is provided as the dedicated random number. Acquisition may be used as a trigger. Furthermore, the number of support lotteries (or the number of times the normal game round is executed) from a predetermined timing (immediately after turning on the power or finishing the jackpot, the establishment of the first condition in the second condition), the first special figure and / or the second It may be triggered by the number of executions (or the number of executions of game rounds) of the 2 special figure success/failure determination becoming a specific number of times.

(32) In the sixth embodiment, when the first condition is satisfied, the normal table is selected as the variable display time table for the first special figure and the second special figure. A configuration may be adopted in which an omen table different from the table and the special table is provided, and transition is made to a state in which the omen table is selected. The portent table may be the same as or different from the normal table in terms of the likelihood of occurrence of the specific state (the likelihood of acquisition of the second short fluctuation). When the susceptibility to occurrence of the specific state is made different, the specific state is more likely to occur than in the normal table (the second short fluctuation is more likely to be selected), and the specific state is less likely to occur than in the special table (the second short fluctuation is less likely to be selected). ) configuration. As a result, the player can enjoy a certain amount of profit when the first condition is satisfied, and it is possible to reduce disappointment when the precursor state 602 ends while the second condition is not satisfied.

In the seventh embodiment having the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, a configuration may be adopted in which different variable display time tables are selected for the first precursor state 602a and the second precursor state 602b. In this case, the configuration may be such that the portent table is selected in one of the first and second portent states 602a and 602b, and the normal table is selected in the other. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that mutually different first and second predictor tables are provided, and the first predictor table is selected in the first predictor state 602a, and the second predictor table is selected in the second predictor state 602b.

(33) In the sixth to eighth embodiments, when the advantageous state 603 ends without winning the V jackpot, the normal state 601 is entered. .

(34) In the sixth to eighth embodiments, the precursor state 602 ends based on the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure reaching the upper limit, but the termination condition of the precursor state 602 is not limited to this. For example, the number of executions of the game rounds of the second special scheme is the upper limit number, the total number of executions of the game rounds of the first and second special schemes is the predetermined upper limit number, the first and second special schemes A different upper limit number is set for each of the game rounds shown in the figure, and one or both of the game rounds of the first and second special symbols reaching the upper limit numbers may be set as the end condition of the premonitory state 602 . Further, in a configuration including an intermediate table, the number of acquisitions of the variable display time from the intermediate table may be the upper limit. Furthermore, as the upper limit number, it may be configured to set the number of executions of at least one of the first and second special figures, or set the number of lotteries for support lottery (or the number of times of execution of normal game rounds) may be configured. In addition, the end condition may be that the elapsed period after shifting to the advantageous state 603 reaches a predetermined period, or that the number of game balls shot after shifting to the advantageous state 603 reaches a predetermined number.

(35) In the sixth to ninth embodiments, the advantageous state 603 ends based on the number of executions of the game round of the first special figure becoming the upper limit number, but the condition for ending the advantageous state 603 is not limited to this. For example, the number of executions of the game rounds of the second special scheme is the upper limit number, the total number of executions of the game rounds of the first and second special schemes is the predetermined upper limit number, the first and second special schemes Separate upper limit numbers are set for the game times in the figure, one or both of the game times of the first and second special symbols are the above respective upper limit numbers, and the number of acquisition times of the variable display time from the special table is The termination condition of the advantageous state 603 may be reaching the upper limit number. Also, as the upper limit number, it may be configured to set the number of executions of at least one of the first and second special figures, and further, the number of lotteries of support lottery (or the number of times of execution of normal game times) It is good also as a structure which sets.

Also in the tenth embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous state 603 is not limited to the upper limit of the number of execution times of the second special symbol, but the number of execution times of the first special symbol. may be the upper limit number.

(36) In the sixth to tenth embodiments, the advantageous state 603 ends based on the number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol is played. The advantageous state 603 may end based on the drop lottery.

(37) In the sixth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous state 603 occurs when the first and second conditions are met step by step. may end (shift to a game state with a low degree of advantage).

(38) In the seventh to ninth embodiments, the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is that the result of the suitability determination of the first special figure is a specific special loss result. It is not limited. For example, the success or failure determination result of the second special figure is a specific special outlier result, a specific value is acquired as the fluctuation type counter CS, the first and / or second special figure as the fluctuation display time information The transition condition may be that specific variable display time information is acquired, that the lottery result of the support lottery is a specific result (support result), or the like.

(39) In the above-described seventh embodiment, the fact that the suitability determination result of the first special figure becomes a specific disadvantageous special loss result is set as the transition condition to the first and second precursor states 602a and 602b, or The condition for promotion from the precursor state 602a to the second precursor state 602b and the condition for demotion from the second precursor state 602b to the first precursor state 602a are set. In one, for example, the success/failure determination result of the second special prize will be a specific result (for example, a specific advantageous special loss result), and the lottery result of the support lottery will be a specific result (support result). , acquisition of a specific value as the variation type counter CS may be a condition. In addition, a dedicated random number for the transition condition, etc. (independent dedicated random number such as the conditional random number counter CC in the sixth embodiment) is provided, and a specific value is obtained as the dedicated random number. good.

(40) In the seventh embodiment, the ease with which the second condition (the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603) is changed (the ease of transitioning to the advantageous state 603) However, it is also possible to change only the content of the condition while the ease with which the second condition is established remains unchanged. However, considering the player's interest in the change of the second condition, the configuration of the seventh embodiment is preferable.

Further, when the change condition is satisfied, the content of the condition of the second condition may be unchanged, and the ease of being satisfied may be changed. Such a configuration may include, for example, changing the probability that the second condition is satisfied, changing the frequency of execution of the determination process to determine whether the second condition is satisfied, or changing the timing of execution of the determination process. A configuration that

As a configuration for changing the establishment probability of the second condition or changing the execution frequency of the determination process, for example, specific variable display time information is acquired as the variable display time information of the game round of the first special figure. With this as the second condition and the execution trigger of the determination process, the ease of selection of specific variable display time information is different (the number of variable type counters CSA assigned to specific variable display time information is different). variable display time table, and switches the variable display time table from which the variable display time information is acquired based on the satisfaction of the change condition.

In addition, as a configuration for changing the execution trigger of the determination process, for example, the first execution trigger is that the result of the determination of the first special figure is the first specific special deviation result, and the result of the determination is the first A second specific special result that is different in the likelihood of being selected from the one specific special missing result is used as a second execution trigger, and based on the establishment of the change condition, the first and second A configuration, etc., in which switching is performed between execution triggers is conceivable.

(41) In the seventh embodiment, when the promotion condition is satisfied, the condition for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 is switched from the second condition A to the second condition B. When a plurality of conditions are set in , the promotion condition is established under the condition that the second condition A is the transition condition after configuring to shift to the advantageous state 603 by satisfying any one of them In this case, the second condition B may be added to the transition conditions to increase the number of conditions. In this case, the number of conditions to be added may be one or plural.

This is the same when the demotion conditions are satisfied. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of conditions is reduced by exempting from

(42) In the seventh embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous state 603 are changed when the change conditions (promotion conditions, demotion conditions) are satisfied. A configuration in which the end condition of 603 is changed may be employed.

Even in this case, the easiness of establishment of the change condition may be unchanged, and only the content of the condition may be changed. Further, the content of the change condition may be unchanged and the easiness of establishment may change. Furthermore, when a plurality of conditions are set as end conditions for the portent state 602 and the advantageous state 603, the portent state 602 and the advantageous state 603 are terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied. It is also possible to add or reduce termination conditions based on the establishment of the above.

(43) In the eighth embodiment, the addition condition is that the result of the judgment result of the first special figure is a specific disadvantageous special loss result, but the addition condition is not limited to this. The success/failure determination result of the second special figure will be a specific result (for example, a specific advantageous special loss result), the lottery result of the support lottery will be a specific result (support result), and as a variation type counter CS Acquisition of a specific value, acquisition of specific variable display time information as the variable display time information of the first and/or second special figure, etc. may be added conditions. In addition, a dedicated random number (independent dedicated random number such as the conditional random number counter CC in the sixth embodiment) is provided for the above-mentioned additional condition, etc., and the addition condition is that a specific value is acquired as the dedicated random number. good too.

(44) In the eighth embodiment, the fact that the result of the determination of the first special figure is a disadvantageous special loss result is used as a trigger for the execution of the determination process for determining the success or failure of the addition condition, but the addition determination is not limited to this. For example, the success/failure determination result of the second special figure will be a disadvantageous special loss result, a specific value will be obtained as the fluctuation type counter CS, the lottery result of the support lottery will be a specific result (support result), etc. may be In addition, a dedicated random number (dedicated random number for an independent determination trigger such as a conditional random number counter CC) is provided for selecting whether or not to perform an additional determination, and a specific value is acquired as the dedicated random number. It can be used as an opportunity.

Furthermore, the number of support lotteries from a predetermined timing (for example, the start of the advantageous state 603) (or the number of times of normal game times) and the number of times of execution of the first special figure and / or second special figure It may be triggered by the number of times the game is played reaches a specific number of times. In this case, the execution trigger may be set so that the number of executions of the above-described determination process from the start to the end of the advantageous state 603 is one, or the execution trigger may be set so that it is executed multiple times. good. In addition, after setting the execution trigger of the judgment process as the result of the judgment of the first special figure to be a disadvantageous special outlier (each time the judgment of the first special figure is performed, the above judgment process is performed almost every time. When the remaining number of game rounds of the first special figure up to the upper limit number is equal to or less than a predetermined number, or after shifting to the advantageous state 603, the game round of the first special figure is executed The execution of the determination process may be started when the number of times reaches a predetermined number or more.

(45) In the above eighth embodiment, based on the fulfillment of the additional condition, the remaining number of times until the number of times of execution of the game round of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number is added. In the configuration that counts up the number of executions of the second special figure after shifting to the advantageous state 603, it may be configured to add the upper limit number. Moreover, in a configuration having a reduction condition, the configuration may be such that the upper limit number is decreased based on the establishment of the condition.

(46) In the eighth embodiment, the number of additions is fixed to a predetermined number (five times), but a plurality of types of numbers are provided as the number of possible additions, and one number is selected from among these numbers. , the selected number may be added as the added number. The selection of the number of additions in this case can be performed based on, for example, the result of determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, the type of special outlier result) or the like. According to this configuration, the number of additions can be randomized, and not only whether or not the number of remaining times of the advantageous state 603 will increase, but also the degree of increase can be added. can. Similarly, in the configuration in which the remaining number of times or the upper limit number is decreased, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of numbers are provided as the number of decreases.

(47) In the eighth embodiment, the specified number of times is added based on the fulfillment of the additional condition, but the specified number of times may be reset. For example, in a configuration in which the initial prescribed number of times is set to 5 times, if the additional condition (change condition) is satisfied with the remaining number of times of 3 times, the number of times is set to 5 times again, and the advantageous state 603 is set from the remaining 5 times state. can be configured to play. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of prescribed numbers of different numbers are provided as the prescribed number of times that can be reset, and one of the prescribed number of times is selected and reset. The selection of the specified number of times in this case can be performed based on, for example, the result of determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, the type of special outlier result) or the like. In these cases, the special effect display on the display screen G sets the remaining number of times display 632 to 5 and displays characters such as "Restart!!" to give the impression that the game can be played again from the remaining 5 times. Alternatively, characters such as "+2 times!" It may give an added impression.

(48) In the above-described eighth embodiment, the added remaining number of times is effective only in that advantageous state. A configuration that can be carried over to the advantageous state 603 may be employed. As a result, the presence or absence of the addition can be reflected in the likelihood of occurrence of the next V jackpot, and the interest is improved.

In this case, as the remaining number of times at the start of the next advantageous state 603, the remaining number of times at the time of the V jackpot or immediately before the V jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "previous remaining number of times") may be used as it is, or may be set to the initial prescribed number of times. A configuration using a number obtained by adding the last remaining number of times may be used. However, in the former case, the remaining number of times immediately before and the initial specified number of times (5 times) are compared, and if the remaining number of times immediately before is greater than the initial specified number of times (or more), the straight remaining number of times is used and is less than the initial specified number of times. In the case of (or in the case of less than), it is preferable to use the initial specified number of times. As a result, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable when the remaining number of times at the start of the advantageous state 603 becomes smaller than the initial specified number of times.

(49) In the eighth embodiment described above, it is possible to easily obtain an additional winning result in the additional determination, or to make the additional determination more likely, or to create an additional specialized state in which both of these conditions occur. In addition, it may be configured to transition from the non-additional specialized state to the additional specialized state based on the establishment of a predetermined state transition condition.

In such a configuration, as the predetermined state transition condition, it is possible to use various conditions such as that the result of the determination of whether the first special figure is a specific disadvantageous special out. Further, the additional specialization state may extend over a plurality of game rounds, or may be limited to one game round, or the elapsed period from the start of the additional specialization state may be a predetermined period. It may be terminated based on

(50) In the above eighth embodiment, as the advantageous state 603, set the first special game state in which the additional lottery is not performed and the second special game state in which the additional lottery is performed, and shift to the advantageous state 603. It may be configured to shift to either the first or second special game state when the situation arises. In this case, the degree of advantage excluding the presence or absence of addition may be the same between the first and second special game states, or may be different.

Further, the addition lottery may be performed in each of the first and second special game states, and the second special game state may be more likely to be added than the first special game state. As such a configuration, the lottery result of the extra lottery in the second special game state is more likely to be an extra lottery result than that in the first special game state, or the execution frequency of the extra lottery is second than that in the first special game state. It is conceivable that the number of special game states increases. In a configuration having a plurality of special game states with different additions or easiness to be added, it may be configured to allow transition between game states by establishment of promotion conditions or demotion conditions. In these cases, the number of special game states is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(51) In the ninth embodiment, it is configured to determine which of the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b to transition to based on the type of the special loss result of the second special figure, but for example, It may be configured to be determined based on the type of the special deviation result of the first special figure, the variation type counter CS and the like. In addition, a dedicated random number (an independent dedicated random number such as the conditional random number counter CC in the sixth embodiment) is provided for selecting which advantageous state 603 to transition to, and a decision is made based on the random number. good too.

(52) In the above-described ninth embodiment, when the success/failure determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot result, the transition to the second advantageous state 603b is made, but the first advantageous state 603a , may be configured to transition to another advantageous state 603 having a different degree of advantage from the first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b, or may be configured not to transition to the advantageous state 603.

(53) In the ninth and tenth embodiments, two types of advantageous states 603, first and second advantageous states 603a and 603b, are provided, but the number of types of advantageous states 603 is not limited to two. , 3 or more.

Also, in embodiments other than the above ninth and tenth embodiments, a plurality of advantageous states 603 may be provided. In this case, the number of types of advantageous states 603 is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

(54) In the tenth embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery is set to limit the frequency of winning the second operation port 34, but instead of or in addition to this, the fluctuation of the normal game round The frequency of winning a prize to the second operation opening 34 may be restricted by setting the display time, the opening time of the electric accessory 34a, and the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened.

(55) In the tenth embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery is set to limit the frequency of winning the second operation opening 34. A game ball flowing down one flow path can win a prize in a second operation port 34, and a game ball flowing down a second flow path different from the first flow path can not win a prize in the second operation port 34. After configuring the area PE, a distribution member is provided on the upstream side of the first and second flow paths, and the game balls flowing down the game area PE are distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution member It is good also as a structure which distributes. In this case, the distribution mode of the distribution member, in other words, the flow-down mode of the game balls, can limit the frequency of winning prizes to the second operation opening 34, and the player's interest in the flow of the game balls can be enhanced. become. In such a configuration, the game ball flowing down the first flow-down path is likely to enter the second operation port 34, and the game ball flowing down the second flow-down path is more likely than the game ball flowing down the first flow-down path to the second operation port 34 It may be configured so that it is difficult to win a prize.

In the above configuration, the distribution member may be driven by a drive unit such as an electromagnetic solenoid or an electric motor, or the distribution direction may be switched by a game ball passing through the distribution member. In the former case, the drive unit may be electrically connected to the main controller 81 to periodically drive the distribution member. This makes it possible to simplify the control process while changing the distribution mode of the distribution members under the control of the main controller 81 .

(56) In the tenth embodiment, when the game state shifts to the advantageous state 603, the winning probability of the support lottery may be changed. For example, before the transition to the advantageous state 603, the high-frequency support mode in which the support winning result has a probability of almost 100% as in the first embodiment, and after the transition to the advantageous state 603, the support winning result is assumed. A low-frequency support mode in which the probability of becoming a

As the low-frequency support mode, in addition to lowering the winning probability of the support lottery, the variable display time of the normal game round may be longer, and the opening time of the electric accessory 34a may be shorter. It may be a combination of two or more of the three elements.

(57) In the tenth embodiment, the advantageous states 603 are provided with a plurality of advantageous states 603a and 603b having different degrees of advantage, but the number of the advantageous states 603 may be one.

(58) In the tenth embodiment, when the V jackpot and when the result of judging whether the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit, the transition to the advantageous state 603 is performed. However, the configuration may be such that the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made only in the latter case. In addition, the transition condition to the advantageous state 603 is not limited to the V jackpot or jackpot, and as in the other embodiments, the result of the determination of whether the first special figure is a specific disadvantageous special loss result, etc. Various conditions can be used.

(59) In the tenth embodiment, both when the result of the judgment of the first special figure is a big hit and when the result of the judgment of the second special figure is a big hit, the transition to the advantageous state 603 is made. However, it may be configured to shift to the advantageous state 603 only in the former case. That is, if the transition to the advantageous state 603 is determined at least based on the winning to the first operating port 33, the opportunity for the transition determination is appropriately secured even though the frequency of winning to the second operating port 34 is limited. becomes possible. It should be noted that it may be configured such that the transition determination to the advantageous state 603 is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry openings other than the first and second operation openings 33 and 34 .

(60) In the tenth embodiment, when the V jackpot is won, the configuration is such that it is easier to shift to the advantageous state 603 than when the first special figure or the second special figure is a big hit. However, the easiness of transition to the advantageous state 603 may be the same for both, or the latter may be configured to transition to the advantageous state 603 more easily than the former.

(61) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when entering a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

It should be noted that each of the following inventions is defined as "the present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can determine whether or not to award a privilege to a player. There is known a gaming machine capable of determining whether or not (see, for example, Patent Document 1)." Regarding the background art, "Here, there is still room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing attention to games. ” was made with the problem to be solved by the invention.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (winning to the first operation port 33), a predetermined notification means (first special figure display portion AS of the main display portion 37) is started to produce a game turn, and a predetermined In a gaming machine provided with game round control means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81) for ending the game round effect based on the satisfaction of the end condition,
Specific event control means (main control means) for generating a specific event based on a specific condition (winning to the second operation port 34) that is established after the start condition is established, and ending the specific event based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time a function of executing the second game round control process by the device 81);
A first privilege that gives a privilege to a player when the specific event ends before the end of the game round, and does not give a privilege to the player when the specific event ends after the game round ends. Giving means (a function for executing processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode based on the advantage special loss result of the game round on the side of the second special figure in the game state transition processing by the main controller 81);
A second privilege that does not give a privilege to a player when the specific event ends before the end of the game cycle, but gives a privilege to the player when the specific event ends after the game cycle ends. Giving means (a function for executing processing for starting the opening and closing execution mode based on the result of the special advantage loss of the game round on the first special figure side in the game state transition processing by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, there are cases where a privilege is granted by the first privilege granting means and there are cases where a privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means depending on the specific event that occurs after the start of the game round. For example, when the length of the predetermined period during which the specific event continues is the same, if the specific condition is established quickly after the start of the game round, the specific event tends to end earlier than the game round, and in this case, the first privilege is granted. There is a high possibility that the privilege will be given by the means. Conversely, if the timing at which the specific condition is established is delayed after the start of the game round, the possibility that the second privilege granting means will grant the privilege increases. Further, for example, when the specific conditions are established at the same timing, the shorter the predetermined period, the more likely the specific event will end earlier than the game round, and the higher the possibility that the first privilege providing means will award the privilege. Become. Conversely, the longer the length of the predetermined period, the higher the possibility that the privilege will be granted by the second privilege granting means. Furthermore, for example, the longer the length of the game round, the more likely the specific event will end earlier than the game round, and the higher the possibility that the first privilege awarding means will award the privilege. Conversely, the shorter the length of the game, the higher the possibility that the second privilege awarding means will award the privilege. In this way, by making a distinction between which privilege granting means grants the privilege according to the relationship between the end timing of the game round and the end timing of the specific event, the privilege can be granted simply by playing the game round. It is possible to realize a novel game property that is far from the conventional game, such as playing games, and can greatly contribute to increasing the attention of the game.

Feature A2. Giving determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (function of executing the processing of steps S602 and S902 by the main controller 81) When,
Privilege granting means (by main controller 81) for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player function to execute game state transition processing),
Special notification execution means (first game round by main controller 81) for executing special notification according to the determination result of the grant determination by predetermined notification means based on the grant determination by the grant determination means control processing, a function of executing the second game round control processing);
A gaming machine comprising
Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) for storing period information corresponding to the notification period of the special notification executed by the special notification execution means as a period information group;
Acquisition means for acquiring from the period information storage means the period information corresponding to the determination result by the provision determination means (executing the first variable display time setting process and the second variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) function) and
with
The special notification execution means executes the special notification in the notification period corresponding to the period information acquired by the acquisition means,
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a predetermined grant correspondence result (advantageous special loss result), the acquisition means obtains the first period information (first short fluctuation on the first special figure side, When the second short fluctuation on the second special figure side) is acquired, it is possible to allow the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means, while the acquisition means determines the first period When the second period information different from the information (the first length variation on the first special figure side and the second length variation on the second special figure side) is acquired, the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means A gaming machine characterized by comprising special means (a function of executing a forced termination process by the main control device 81) capable of restricting the termination of the game.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and if the result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, the privilege is granted in the gaming machine. In the case of the grant response result, depending on the length of the special notification, there are cases where a benefit is granted and there are cases where the grant of the privilege is restricted. Since the length of the special notification is stored as period information in the period information storage means, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the privilege when the result of predetermined grant correspondence is met simply by changing the period information. It can be said that this is a possible configuration. In this way, it is possible to change the probability of granting a privilege without changing the probability of granting determination by the granting determination means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game that is different from the conventional game of changing the probability of grant determination, and can greatly contribute to the improvement of the attention of the game.

Feature A3. The special means satisfies a predetermined special condition (for the first special figure side, the game round for the second special figure ends; for the second special figure, the game round for the first special figure ends). If the acquisition means acquires the first period information, which means that the special notification will end before the special The configuration is such that it is possible to restrict the granting of the privilege when the acquisition means acquires the second period information indicating that the special notification will end after the condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, whether or not the privilege is given differs depending on the relationship between the end timing of the special notification and the establishment timing of the special condition. Therefore, since not only the length of the period information but also other conditions are related to awarding of the privilege, the conditions for awarding the privilege can be diversified.

Feature A4. A specific state execution means (first game by the main controller 81) that starts a specific state (game round on the first special figure side) based on a predetermined start opportunity and ends the specific state based on the completion of the end condition time control processing),
The determination condition is established during the specific state,
The special means permits the privilege to be given when the first period information, which means that the special notification ends before the end of the specific state, is acquired by the acquisition means. on the other hand, when the acquisition means acquires the second period information indicating that the special notification ends after the end of the specific state, the privilege is restricted from being granted. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, characterized in that it has a configuration that enables

According to the above configuration, since the determination condition is satisfied during the specific state, the special notification is started during the specific state. If the special notification ends before the specific state, the benefit is given, and if the special notification ends after the specific state, the benefit is not given. Therefore, not only the relationship between the first period information and the second period information such as the length of the special notification, but also the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied in the specific state (the start timing of the special notification) and the end timing of the specific state ( Duration of the specific state) is also involved in the presence or absence of awarding of the privilege, and it becomes possible to vary the conditions for awarding the privilege in a wide range, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature A5. Provided in the game area (game area PE), a first ball entry part (second operation opening 34) and a second ball entry part (first operation opening 33) into which a game ball can enter,
The grant determination means executes the grant determination by determining that the determination condition is satisfied that the game ball has entered the first ball entering portion,
A second determination of whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, which is a determination different from the grant determination by the grant determination means, is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entering portion. 2 grant determination means (function for executing the process of step S602 by the main controller 81);
A second special notification executing means for executing a second special notification according to the determination result of the second grant determination by a predetermined notification means based on the second grant determination by the second grant determination means. (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81);
with
The specific state execution means executes the second special notification by the second special notification execution means as the specific state,
In a situation where the second special notification by the second special notification executing means is being executed, the entry into the first ball entering section is permitted, while the second special notification by the second special notification executing means is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that entry of a ball into the first ball entry section is restricted when the game is not executed.

According to the above configuration, utilizing the relationship between the special notification (first special notification) based on the ball entering the first ball-entering section and the second special notification based on the ball entering the second ball-entering section, The presence or absence of privilege provision can be changed. Since the ball entering the first ball-entering section, which triggers the first special notification, is permitted only during execution of the second special announcement, the ball is entered into the second ball-entering section and 2. During the execution of the special notification, the ball is entered into the first ball-entering section, and the second period is the notification period of the first special notification executed based on the ball entering the first ball-entering section. The game feature is such that a privilege is given by acquiring the first period information instead of the information. Therefore, it is possible to realize novel gameplay utilizing the relationship between the length of the notification period based on the ball entering the plurality of ball entering sections and the length of the notification period based on the ball entering the respective ball entering sections.

Feature A6. Second period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) for storing period information corresponding to the notification period of the second special notification executed by the second special notification execution means as a period information group )When,
Second acquiring means for acquiring the period information according to the determination result by the second addition determining means from the second period information storing means (function for executing the setting process of the first variable display time by the main controller 81) When,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, not only the length of the notification period of the first special notification, but also the notification period of the second special notification can be changed. Therefore, during the second special notification that is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entering section, the first special notification is performed, and the first special notification is performed before the second special notification. In terms of game characteristics such as giving a privilege by ending the first special notification, not only the viewpoint of whether or not the notification period corresponds to the second period information rather than the first period information, but also the second period information. 2. Since the length of the special notification can be related to the provision of the privilege, the playability is greatly improved.

Feature A7. The period information storage means stores a period information group in a first mode in which the first period information is more likely to be acquired by the acquisition means than the second period information, and the second period information is The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, characterized in that it stores at least a period information group that is a second mode that is more likely to be acquired by the acquisition means than the first period information.

According to the above configuration, when the period information is acquired from the period information group of the first aspect, the privilege is likely to be given, and when the period information is acquired from the period information group of the second aspect, the privilege is easily granted. less likely to be granted. In this way, the probability of awarding the privilege can be changed only by changing the mode of the period information group stored in the period information storage means, so that the probability of awarding the privilege can be varied without changing the probability of award determination. It is possible to easily realize such a novel game property.

Feature A8. The period information storage means stores a specific period information group including the period information group of the first mode and the period information group of the second mode,
A number grasping means (second game counter) for grasping the number of executions of the special notification from a predetermined timing,
As the specific period information group, a first specific number of times group in which the period information group of the first mode is likely to be selected according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means, and a period information group of the second mode are selected. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that a second specific number of times group that is likely to be played is set.

According to the above configuration, since the first period information and the second period information are selected from the specific period information group according to the number of times the special notification is performed, the acquisition means acquires the period information. It is possible to change the probability of granting a privilege without changing the group of period information, and realize a novel game property such that the probability of granting a privilege differs depending on the number of times special notification is performed.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the frequency grasping means is configured to grasp the number of times the special notification is performed after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means.

According to the above configuration, the number of special notifications ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means is reset when the privilege is granted. As a result, when a player selects a gaming machine to be seated, it is possible to use the timing of past awarding of benefits as a guideline.

Feature A10. The period information storage means stores a first period information group as the first mode and a second period information group as the second mode as different types of period information groups,
First switching means for switching the type of the period information group acquired by the acquisition means from the second period information group to the first period information group (variable display time table by main controller 81) based on the first switching opportunity function to execute switching processing),
Second switching means (mainly a function of executing switching processing of the variable display time table by the control device 81;
The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first switching opportunity occurs, the information group is switched to the first period information group, so that a privilege is easily granted, and when the second switching opportunity occurs, the privilege is granted because the information group is switched to the second period information group. becomes difficult. In this way, it is possible to add not only a game in which a privilege is given simply based on the result of grant determination, but also a game in which the occurrence of a switching opportunity is desired/undesired, thereby diversifying the game. can make a significant contribution to

Feature A11. The first switching means uses the fact that the determination result of the provision determination means is a predetermined first provision correspondence result as the first switching trigger,
The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the second switching means uses the fact that the determination result of the grant determining means is a predetermined second grant correspondence result as the second switching trigger.

According to the above configuration, if the determination result of the grant determination means is the grant correspondence result, not only is the privilege granted, but if it is the predetermined first grant correspondence result, the first period in which the privilege is more likely to be granted The state is switched to the state in which the period information is acquired from the information group. On the other hand, even if a privilege is granted, if the predetermined second grant response result occurs, the period information is switched to a state in which the period information is acquired from the second period information group to which the privilege is less likely to be granted. In this way, if the period information group is switched according to the type of grant correspondence result, it is possible to draw attention not only to the award of the privilege, but also to the type of the grant correspondence result that triggered the grant of the privilege. It becomes possible.

Feature A12. The privilege granting means grants a first privilege based on the determination result of the grant determination means being the predetermined first grant correspondence result, and the determination result of the grant determination means is the predetermined second grant. A configuration for granting a second privilege based on the correspondence result,
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first privilege is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.

According to the said structure, if an advantageous 1st privilege is provided, it will be in the state which a privilege is more easily provided after that. By doing so, it is possible to add an inflection to the awarding of the privilege, and to improve the playability.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. shooting means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting game balls into the game area based on the player's shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (first operation port 33) and a second ball entry portion (second operation port 34) which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
First lottery means (first special figure side in main controller 81) that executes a first lottery to decide whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering section a function to execute the validity judgment process);
Second lottery means for executing a second lottery for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering section (second special figure side in the main controller 81) a function to execute the validity judgment process);
A first state in which benefits are more likely to be given based on the first lottery than the second lottery and the second lottery than the first lottery according to the number of lotteries of the first lottery and the second lottery. Switching means for switching between a second state in which a privilege is likely to be granted based on (a function of executing a first variable display time setting process and a second variable display time setting process by the main control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a privilege is given to the player by entering the game ball into the first ball entering section, and the game ball is entered into the second ball entering section. In the gameplay with a plurality of lottery systems such as a second lottery to determine whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, which lottery system wins depending on the number of lotteries of the first lottery and the second lottery. Switching between a first state and a second state such as whether it is easy or not is performed. By doing so, it is possible to advance the game while associating the independently performed lottery systems with each other. As a result, the game can be diversified, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B2. The switching means switches a state related to granting a privilege in the first lottery according to the number of lotteries of the first lottery, and a state related to granting a privilege in the second lottery according to the number of lotteries of the second lottery. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein switching between the first state and the second state is performed by switching the .

According to the above configuration, the state of the first lottery side is switched according to the number of lotteries of the first lottery, and the state of the second lottery side is switched according to the number of lotteries of the second lottery. It becomes possible to manage each independently and switch the state. Therefore, the independence of both lottery systems can be ensured, and the effect of the feature B1 of associating both lottery systems with a simple configuration can be achieved.

Feature B3. Receiving means (electric accessory) provided for the second ball-entering portion and capable of switching between a receiving state in which game balls are received in the second ball-entering portion and a non-receiving state in which it is more difficult to accept game balls than in the receiving state 34a) and
acceptance control execution means (function for executing electric support processing by the main controller 81) for executing switching control between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the acceptance means;
with
The acceptance control execution means is a means capable of changing the acceptance means from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering section (through by the main controller 81) A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized by comprising a function of executing a prize winning process for the game.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for a ball to enter the second ball-entering section based on the ball entering the first ball-entering section. , the numbers of lotteries of the first lottery and the second lottery are easily associated. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the first state and the second state are switched according to the number of lotteries of the first lottery and the second lottery.

Feature B4. Any one of characteristics B1 to B3, wherein the switching means switches between the first state and the second state without changing the winning probability of the first lottery and the winning probability of the second lottery. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, without changing the winning probability of each lottery system, it is possible to switch between the first state in which the privilege is likely to be awarded in the first lottery and the second state in which the privilege is likely to be awarded in the second lottery. conduct. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game and to simplify the configuration as compared with the configuration in which the winning probability of each lottery system is changed each time.

Feature B5. characterized in that the winning probability resulting in the award of the privilege in the first lottery and the winning probability resulting in the awarding of the privilege in the second lottery are set to be the same probability. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B4.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning is the same in both lottery systems, so basically the probability of awarding a privilege is the same depending on which lottery you receive. However, as described in feature B1, the ease with which a privilege is granted differs between the first state and the second state. In this way, in a configuration having a plurality of lottery systems with the same winning probability, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the easiness of granting benefits to each system is different.

Feature B6. In the first state, the second lottery carried out by the second lottery means is likely to be invalidated, thereby making it easier to award a privilege by the first lottery,
In the second state, the first lottery conducted by the first lottery means is likely to be invalidated, so that a privilege is likely to be granted by the second lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the above configuration, even if both lotteries are executed in the first state, the second lottery is likely to be invalidated, so that the remaining first lottery is likely to give a privilege, and in the second state, both lotteries are executed. Since the first lottery is likely to be invalidated even if the first lottery is used, the remaining second lottery is more likely to give a privilege. In this way, switching between the first state and the second state can be suitably realized.

Feature B7. In the first state, the second lottery conducted by the second lottery means is likely to be invalidated by the result of the first lottery conducted by the first lottery means, so that the first lottery Benefits are easier to give,
In the second state, the second lottery carried out by the first lottery means is likely to be invalidated by the result of the second lottery carried out by the second lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that it has a configuration in which benefits are easily granted.

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the lotteries of both lottery systems are executed in any state, and the significance of having both lottery systems can be ensured. In the first state, the first lottery invalidates the second lottery, and in the second state, the first lottery is invalidated rather than the second lottery. For example, it is possible to change which lottery system gives a privilege without changing the winning probability or the like, and it is possible to suitably realize switching between the first state and the second state.

Feature B8. Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter than in the open state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing a round game performed by variable ball entry control that switches the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state, and then switches to the closed state (large winning opening opening and closing processing by the main controller 81 functions to perform) and
When the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery is a winning result, a transition means for shifting to a specific state (opening/closing execution mode based on a jackpot result) in which the round game is played a plurality of times by the variable ball entering means. (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81);
with
The switching means is capable of switching between the first state and the second state even if the results of the first lottery and the second lottery are non-winning results. The game machine according to any one of B7.

According to the above configuration, if the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery is a winning result, the configuration shifts to a specific state in which a plurality of round games are performed. and the second state in which the privilege is likely to be given by the second lottery can be performed without going through the winning result. If switching between the first state and the second state is performed according to a specific state based on the winning result, it becomes necessary to improve the probability of winning the first lottery and the second lottery, and there is a concern that the pitching rate will rise. Therefore, with the above configuration, switching between the first state and the second state is performed without passing through the specific state, so that the effect of feature B1 can be achieved while avoiding the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. becomes.

Feature B9. A number grasping means (first game counter, second game counter) for grasping the number of lotteries of the first lottery and the second lottery performed after the specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the switching means executes switching between the first state and the second state based on the number of lotteries ascertained by the number of times ascertaining means.

According to the above configuration, switching between the first state and the second state is performed according to the number of times the lottery has been performed since the specific state was entered. It is possible to use it as a target.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A launching means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball into a game area (game area PE) based on a player's shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (first operation port 33) and a second ball entry portion (second operation port 34) which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter than in the open state;
Variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control between the open state and the closed state of the variable ball entry means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process by the main controller 81);
A first lottery means for executing a first lottery based on the game ball entering the first ball entering section (a function of executing a winning judgment process on the first special figure side by the main control device 81);
A second lottery means for executing a second lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering section (a function of executing a winning judgment process on the second special figure side by the main control device 81);
Transition means capable of shifting to a specific state in which the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed by the variable ball entry control means based on the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means. (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81);
with
As the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means, a first result (disadvantageous special loss result) in which the variable ball entry means shifts to a first specific state in which the variable ball entry is controlled in the first mode; , a second result (advantageous special loss result) in which the variable ball entry means shifts to a second specific state in which the variable ball entry is controlled in a second mode that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode is set. and
The transition means
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the first result and the lottery result by the second lottery means is the second result, the first specific state is not shifted to the second specific state. A first specifying means (a function of executing a forced termination process for the game round on the second special figure side in the second game round control process by the main control device 81),
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the first result and the lottery result by the second lottery means is the second result, the second specific state is not shifted to the first specific state. second specifying means (function for executing forced termination processing for the game round on the first special figure side in the first game round control processing by the main control device 81),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the first lottery is conducted by the first lottery means based on the ball entering the first ball entering section, and the second lottery is conducted by the second lottery means based on the ball entering the second ball entering section. There are a plurality of lottery systems such that the lottery results of both lottery means are the first result, the variable ball entry means is controlled in the first mode, and the second result is the first. The variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is performed in a second mode that is more advantageous than the mode. In such a configuration, the result of the first lottery by the first lottery means is the first result, the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means is the second result, and the result of the variable ball entry control is the result. When the situation overlaps, the case where the variable ball entry control is performed in the first mode (shifted to the first specific state) and the case where the variable ball entrance control is performed in the second mode (shifted to the second specific state) And there is a possibility of both. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to points such as in which aspect the variable ball entry control is performed (whether or not the second aspect is advantageous for the player), and the variety of games can be made. The degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased by improving the quality of the game.

Feature C2. Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is a specific result, the transition means performs a round in which the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means in the specific state. A configuration that allows the game to be shifted to a specific game state in which the game can be executed multiple times,
The first specific state to be shifted when the lottery result of the first lottery means or the second lottery means is the first result, and the second specific state to be shifted when the second result is the round The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the game is executable only once.

According to the above configuration, a specific game state (so-called jackpot state) in which a plurality of round games are performed and a first specific state and a second specific state in which only one round game is performed (so-called small hit state, special off state ) exists, when the states in which only one round game is played overlap, which state is implemented differs between the first specifying means and the second specifying means. Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the specific game state in which the round game is played a plurality of times is not executed, and the game property of the feature C1 can be realized within the range that does not cause a large disadvantage to the player.

Feature C3. The probability of winning in the first lottery by the first lottery means does not change before and after the transition to the first specific state by the transition means,
Characteristic C1 or Characteristic C2, characterized in that the probability of winning in the second lottery by the second lottery means does not change before and after the transition to the second specific state by the transition means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning by the first lottery means does not change even if the state shifts to the first specific state, and the probability of winning by the second lottery means does not change even if the state shifts to the second specific state. Even if control is performed by the first specifying means or the second specifying means that does not cause the transition to the specified state or the second specified state, the game state before and after that is not greatly affected. For example, if the winning probability increases after the transition, but the transition to the first specific state or the second specific state does not occur, the player suffers a great disadvantage. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of the characteristic C1 within a range that does not cause a large disadvantage to the player.

Feature C4. Distributing means (shutter 358) for distributing game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means to a specific area (V winning area 356) and a different area (discharge area 357) from the specific area (shutter 358);
In the distribution means, distribution control means (by the main controller 81) for executing distribution control between a specific mode in which game balls that have reached the distribution means are distributed to the specific area and a non-specific mode in which the game balls are distributed to the different areas. a function to execute V distribution setting processing);
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area (a function of executing processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode based on the V winning flag by the main control device 81);
with
When the variable ball entry control is performed in the first mode, the distribution control means, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the entered game ball is sent to the distribution means. When the distribution means is set to the non-specific mode at the timing of arrival, and the game ball enters the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry control is performed in the second mode, the The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the sorting means is brought into the specific mode at the timing when the entering game ball reaches the sorting means.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific state in which the variable ball entry control is performed in the first mode, it is difficult for the game ball entering the variable ball entry means to pass through the specific area, and the variable ball entry is performed in the second mode. In the second specific state in which the control is performed, the game ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area. That is, in the case where the first result and the second result overlap, if the first specific state is set by the first specifying means, the specific area cannot be passed through and the privilege is not given, but the second specifying means When the second specific state is established, it is possible to pass through the specific area and a privilege is given. By doing so, it is possible to differentiate the advantages of the variable ball entry control based on the first result and the variable ball entry control based on the second result.

Here, when trying to make the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means different between the first result and the second result, the difference equal to or greater than the maximum number of balls that can be entered during one specific state is cannot give rise to. In other words, there is a limit to trying to create a difference in the degree of advantage by prize balls based on incoming balls. On the other hand, if a privilege is given depending on whether or not the specific area is passed as described above, a difference in the degree of advantage exceeding the difference in the number of winning balls based on the maximum number of entering balls in one specific state is generated. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to produce a large difference in the degree of advantage between the first result and the second result, and it is possible to improve the game playability.

Feature C5. The distribution control means determines timing of distribution control between the specific mode and the non-specific mode in the first specific state, and distribution control between the specific mode and the non-specific mode in the second specific state. The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the timing is controlled to be the same timing.

According to the above configuration, the timing of distribution control becomes the same regardless of the type of specific state. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to create a large difference in the advantage between the first result and the second result.

Feature C6. A first notification is started by a predetermined notification means based on the fact that the first lottery by the first lottery means is performed, and then the first notification is given as a notification result corresponding to the result of the first lottery. A first notification means for ending (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main control device 81);
A second notification is started by a predetermined notification means based on the fact that the second lottery by the second lottery means is performed, and then the second notification is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the second lottery. A second notification means for ending (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81);
with
The first specifying means shifts to the first specified state based on the fact that the first notification by the first notification means ends earlier than the second notification by the second notification means,
The second specifying means shifts to the second specified state on the basis that the second notification by the second notification means ends earlier than the first notification by the first notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the first result and the second result overlap in both lottery systems, the case of shifting to the first specific state based on the first result is the first notification corresponding to the first lottery means. is completed first, and the transition to the second specific state based on the second result is the case where the second notification corresponding to the second lottery means is completed first, and which of the lottery systems It becomes clear by each notification means whether the result of (1) is reflected in the specific state. As a result, for example, it is possible to easily discover a fraudulent act that tries to generate a specific state without using the lottery by taking advantage of the complexity of each lottery system.

Feature C7. When one of the first lottery by the first lottery means and the second lottery by the second lottery means is executed, the other lottery is executed and the transition means is based on the other lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the timing is before transition to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the phenomenon that both lotteries overlap easily occurs, and the first specific state or the second specific state reflects either the lottery result by the first lottery means or the lottery result by the second lottery means. It is possible to suitably realize the game property such as moving to.

Feature C8. The first lottery by the first lottery means is set so that the lottery result is more likely to be the first result than the second result,
The second lottery by the second lottery means is set so that the lottery result is more likely to be the second result than the first result,
When the second lottery by the second lottery means is executed, the first lottery by the first lottery means is executed and the transition means shifts to the specific state based on the first lottery. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the timing is the previous timing.

According to the above configuration, the second lottery is more advantageous for the player than the first lottery. However, when the second lottery is carried out, the first lottery has been carried out before that, and before the transition to the specific state based on the result of the first lottery, the specific state of both lottery systems are duplicated. Therefore, it becomes a target of the first specifying means and the second specifying means. That is, it becomes difficult to perform the act of receiving only the second lottery and intentionally shifting to the second specific state based on the second result. Therefore, when the specific states of both lottery systems are overlapped, it is possible to suitably realize the game characteristics such as which one is executed.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball to a game area (game area PE) based on a player's shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (first operation opening 33) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A game round effect is started by a predetermined notification means (main display unit 37) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion, and the game round effect is terminated as a result of the predetermined notification once. As the game round, a game round control means (a function of executing a first game round control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game round to be performed by the predetermined notification means;
A gaming machine comprising
The game area is provided with variable ball entry means (electric accessory 34a) capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter than in the open state.
Switching control means for executing switching control between the open state and the closed state of the variable ball entry means (function for executing electric support processing by the main controller 81),
The switching control means switches the variable ball-entering means from the closed state to the open state when the game round is started, and switches the variable ball-entering unit to the open state at a timing before the game round ends. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to bring the ball-entering means into the closed state.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entering means, a game round is always being performed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new playability using the relationship between the game round and the ball entering the variable ball entering means.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which some kind of privilege can be granted when a ball enters the variable ball entry means, and whether or not to grant the privilege is determined in relation to the progress of the game round being executed, it is assumed that the game round If a ball is entered into the variable ball-entering means in a situation in which the above is not performed, there may be an inconvenience that a privilege is awarded regardless of the progress. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, when a ball is entered into the variable ball-entering means, the game is always played. It is possible to suitably realize game characteristics such as determining whether or not to give a privilege in relation to the progress of the game cycle.

Feature D2. A passing portion (through gate 35) provided at a position through which the game ball entering the ball entering portion always passes;
open lottery means (function of executing the process of step S1307 by the main controller 81) for executing an open lottery to determine whether or not the variable ball entry means is brought into the open state based on passing through the passing portion;
with
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the switching control means executes the switching control based on the fact that the result of the open lottery by the open lottery means is a winning result.

According to the above configuration, the open lottery for determining whether or not to open the variable ball entry means is performed based on the passage of the ball through the passing portion rather than the entry into the ball entry portion. The lottery based on the entry into the ball and the opening lottery of the variable ball entry means can be independently carried out separately. As a result, it is possible to open and close the variable ball entry means before the end of the game cycle executed based on the entry of the ball into the ball entry section, so that the configuration of the characteristic D1 can be suitably realized. can.

Feature D3. A specific notification means for causing a predetermined notification means to start a specific notification based on the opening lottery by the opening lottery means, and then ending the specific notification as a notification result corresponding to the result of the opening lottery. (a function of executing electric support processing by the main controller 81),
The switching control means executes the switching control after the specific notification by the specific notification means is completed,
The game according to feature D2, wherein a notification period during which the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means is set to be shorter than the length of the game round executed by the game round control means. machine.

According to the above configuration, the opening lottery is carried out, and the notification period until the variable ball entry means is opened based on the result of the lottery is set shorter than the length of the game round. It is possible to open the variable ball entry means.

Feature D4. The shooting means shoots game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the notification period is set to be shorter than the firing period.

According to the above configuration, for example, when the passage portion and the variable ball entry means are arranged at positions close to each other, when the game ball launched next to the game ball that has passed through the passage portion reaches the variable ball entry means, , There is a high possibility that the variable ball entering means is in an open state, and the game ball that has reached can enter the variable ball entering means. By doing so, it is possible to realize a series of flows such as passing through the passing section, entering the ball into the ball entering section, starting the game round, starting the open lottery, and entering the ball into the variable ball entering means. becomes.

In addition, the firing cycle is generally a relatively short cycle, and by making the notification period shorter than such a short firing cycle as described above, the variable ball entry means is in an open state. It is possible to make it difficult to perform a so-called stopping action to shoot a game ball in time with the timing.

Feature D5. The variable ball entry means is arranged downstream of the passing portion,
The positions of the passing portion and the variable ball entering means are such that the period required for the game ball to flow down from the position corresponding to the passing portion to the position corresponding to the variable ball entering means is longer than the notification period. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, wherein

According to the above configuration, the notification period elapses before the game ball flows down from the passing portion to the variable ball entering means, and the variable ball entering means is likely to be in the open state. As a result, for example, when a game ball that has passed through the passing portion flows down to the variable ball entry means, the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to smoothen the flow of the entering ball from passing through the passage portion to the variable entering means.

Feature D6. The shooting means shoots game balls at a predetermined shooting cycle,
The switching control means puts the variable ball-entering means in the open state based on the fact that the lottery result of the open lottery is a winning result, maintains the open state for a predetermined opening period, and then is closed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D5, wherein the predetermined open period is set to be longer than the firing period.

According to the above configuration, one or more game balls reach the variable ball entry means during the predetermined open period. Therefore, a ball can be expected to enter the variable ball-entering means during a predetermined open period, and it is possible to suitably realize game characteristics by causing a ball to enter the variable ball-entering means during a game turn.

Feature D7. The open lottery means can immediately execute the open lottery based on the passing of the game ball through the passing portion, while the notification period based on the open lottery and the switching control based on the winning result are being executed. Even if the game ball passes through the passage part, the opening lottery is not performed based on it, and the new opening lottery is executed with the passage of the passage part generated after the end of the switching control as a trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D6.

According to the above configuration, even if the game ball passes through the passing portion during the execution of the switching control based on the notification period based on the open lottery and the winning result, the open lottery based on the passage is not performed. After the end of one switching control, the open lottery is performed without passing through the passing section and the variable ball entry means is opened, that is, it is opened except during the execution of the game round. do not have. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the playability of the feature D1.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball to a game area (game area PE) based on a player's shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (first operation opening 33) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A game round effect is started by a predetermined notification means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering portion, and the game round effect is terminated as a result of the predetermined notification as one game cycle. , a game round control means (a function of executing a first game round control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game round to be performed by the predetermined notification means;
privilege giving means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for giving a privilege to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined giving condition;
A gaming machine comprising
The game area is provided with a second ball-entering portion (second operating port 34) different from the first ball-entering portion,
The granting condition is more likely to be established as the length of the specific period from when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion to when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion is shorter. game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine in which the game ball is shot into the game area based on the player's shooting operation, and when the shot game ball enters the first ball entry portion, an effect for the game round is performed. If the ball can be entered into the second ball entering part immediately after being entered into the first ball entering part, a novelty game property can be realized such that a privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means.

Feature E2. A second game round effect is started by a predetermined notification means based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entering portion, and the second game round effect is terminated as a result of the predetermined notification once. As the second game round, a second game round control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) is provided so that the second game round is performed by the predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the second game round is started based on the ball entering the second ball entering portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly start the second game round after starting the first game round in relation to the game round (first game round) based on the ball entering the first ball entering portion. If possible, it becomes possible to easily give a privilege, and it is possible to realize a novel game property that is far from the conventional game machines.

Feature E3. Means for allowing a ball to enter the second ball-entering portion based on the occurrence of a specific event in which a game ball enters the first ball-entering portion (execution of electronic support processing by the main controller 81) The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized by comprising a function of

According to the above configuration, the ball does not enter the second ball entering portion until the ball enters the first ball entering portion. It is possible to make it easier to understand the playability such as causing the ball to enter the ball portion.

Feature E4. Means for restricting ball entry into the second ball entry section based on the elapse of a predetermined period from the occurrence of the specific event (function for executing electric support processing by main controller 81) The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, after the occurrence of the specific event in which the game ball enters the first ball-entering part, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball-entering part after a predetermined period of time has passed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to understand the playability such as causing the ball to enter the second ball-entering part immediately after entering the first ball-entering part.

Feature E5. Lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the fact that the game ball entered the second ball entrance portion (function for executing the second special figure side success determination process by the main control device 81),
Any one of the characteristics E1 to E4, characterized in that, when the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is won, the shorter the specific period, the easier it is for the granting condition to be satisfied. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the ball enters the first ball-entering section and the ball enters the second ball-entering section quickly, the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball-entering section must be won. condition is not met. In this way, not only the flow of game balls, but also the lottery process on the gaming machine side can be performed, so that the gaming machine side can manage the success or failure of the granting condition to some extent. Therefore, it is preferable in terms of game design, and for example, it is possible to suitably design the ball output rate.

Feature E6. When the shooting means is operated so that the game ball reaches the first ball entering part, the first ball entering part and the second ball entering part can reach the second ball entering part. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with two ball-entering sections.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to aim and hit the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion without changing the mode of the shooting operation. In other words, it is possible to enter the ball into the second ball-entering section while maintaining the mode of the shooting operation in which the ball is entered into the first ball-entering section. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform a game in which a ball is quickly entered into the second ball-entering part after entering the first ball-entering part.

Feature E7. As a flow-down route from a predetermined position in the game area to the second ball-entering portion, a first flow-down route (first route) that requires a first period to flow down to the second ball-entering portion, and the second ball-entering portion. A game according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that a second flow path (second route) that requires a second period longer than the first period is provided in order to flow down to the part. machine.

According to the above configuration, if the ball can flow down the first flow path, the ball can enter the second ball entering portion more quickly than the ball can flow down the second flow path, making it easier to satisfy the granting condition. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to how the game ball behaves, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E8. Arranged at the branch position of the first flow-down path and the second flow-down path from the predetermined position to the second ball entry part, the game ball that has reached the branch position is moved to the first flow-down path and the second flow-down. The game machine according to feature E7, further comprising a sorting means (shutter 358) for sorting to the path.

According to the above configuration, it becomes a configuration in which the ease with which the provision condition is established changes depending on which flow-down route the liquid is distributed by the distribution means. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a first acquisition means for acquiring first determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition (a prize winning process based on the first operation opening winning by the main controller 81: a function of executing the processes of S301 to S306); ,
First lottery means (first fluctuation start process by main controller 81) for executing a first lottery to determine whether or not to execute the first specific control based on the first determination information acquired by the first acquisition means function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in the
A first specific control means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the first specific control based on the lottery result of the first lottery means;
Second acquisition means for acquiring second determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first acquisition condition (a winning process based on the second operation opening winning by the main controller 81 : a function to execute the processes of S307 to S312);
Second lottery means for executing a second lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second specific control based on the second determination information acquired by the second acquisition means (second fluctuation start process by the main controller 81 function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in the
A second specific control means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the second specific control based on the lottery result of the second lottery means;
third obtaining means for obtaining third determination information based on satisfaction of a third obtaining condition which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first obtaining condition and the second obtaining condition; a function to execute the winning process);
Third lottery means for executing a third lottery to determine whether or not to execute the third specific control based on the third determination information acquired by the third acquisition means a function to execute lottery processing);
a third specific control means (a function of executing an electrical opening/closing process by the main controller 81) capable of executing the third specific control based on the lottery result of the third lottery means;
with
In the first lottery means, the second lottery means, and the third lottery means, another lottery can be executed after the corresponding lottery is performed until the specific control corresponding to the lottery is executed. is the configuration,
A lottery result by the first lottery means is a lottery result for executing the first specific control, and a lottery result by the second lottery means is a lottery result for executing the second specific control. setting means for setting which of the first specific control and the second specific control is prioritized based on the third determination information acquired by the third acquisition means (supporting process by the main controller 81 A game machine characterized by comprising: a process for setting a variable display time in: a function for executing the processes of S2008 to S2010).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the first specific control and the second specific control may overlap, which specific control is prioritized is set using the third determination information for the third specific control. be done. By doing so, not only is a game for enjoying which specific control to be executed is added, but compared to a configuration in which which one is given priority is predetermined, the first and second specific controls are controlled. Randomness is generated in the execution of control, and the playability is improved. Moreover, the factor that causes such randomness is the third determination information used in the third lottery for determining whether or not to execute the third specific control. It is possible to simplify the configuration. Therefore, with a simple configuration, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the degree of attention.

Feature F2. The configuration is characterized in that the third specific control can be executed regardless of whether the first specific control is given priority or the second specific control is given priority by the setting means. A gaming machine described in F1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to set the superiority or inferiority between the first specific control and the second specific control without affecting the winning probability of the third lottery means, that is, the execution probability of the third specific control. As a result, the effect of feature F1 can be achieved without significantly changing the design of the gaming machine.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the second acquisition condition can be established by performing the third specific control.

According to the above configuration, a situation in which all of the first to third determination information are acquired is likely to occur. That is, even if the first specific control and the second specific control overlap, if the third determination information is not acquired, it is difficult for the setting means to set which one to give priority to. According to the above configuration, at least when the second lottery based on the second determination information is the result of the lottery in which the second specific control is executed, the third specific control is performed before that, and the third determination is performed. Since the information has been acquired, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to perform the setting due to the absence of the third determination information as described above.

Feature F4. The setting means uses the third determination information that triggered the execution of the third specific control to set the second determination information acquired when the second acquisition condition is satisfied during the third specific control. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the second specific control based on determination information is superior or inferior to the first specific control.

According to the above configuration, it becomes clear which third determination information is to be used when setting the superiority or inferiority between the first specific control and the second specific control in the configuration of feature F3. As a result, when there are a plurality of pieces of third judgment information, it is not possible to set the superiority or inferiority due to unclear which third judgment information is to be used.

Feature F5. Based on the fact that the third lottery by the third lottery means is performed, a change display is started by a predetermined notification means (normal figure display unit 38), and the result of the third lottery is based on the lapse of the display period change display means for ending the change display as the notification result corresponding to
Period setting means for setting the display period for performing the change display using predetermined information (electric accessory opening counter C4) of the third determination information (executing the processing of S2008 to S2010 by the main controller 81 function) and
with
Any one of the characteristics F1 to F4, wherein the setting means is configured to set the superiority or inferiority of the first specific control and the second specific control based on the display period set by the period setting means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the display period for notifying the result of the third lottery is set, and the superiority or inferiority between the first specific control and the second specific control is set based on the display period. In this way, the relationship between the first specific control and the second specific control can be adjusted without changing the lottery result of the third lottery or the winning probability of the third lottery. Therefore, the effect of feature F1 can be achieved without significantly changing the design of the gaming machine.

Feature F6. Any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that, of the first specific control and the second specific control, the side given priority by the setting means is executed, while the side not given priority is not executed. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the phenomenon that the specific control is waiting because it was not prioritized does not occur. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability of feature F1 with a simple configuration without requiring a configuration such as storing specific control that has not yet been executed.

Feature F7. Any of the features F1 to F6, wherein the player's advantage when the first specific control is executed is different from the player's advantage when the second specific control is executed. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game characteristics such as which one is prioritized by the setting means in relation to the degree of advantage.

Feature F8. The setting means is configured to facilitate setting so as to give priority to the first specific control out of the first specific control and the second specific control,
The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the configuration is such that the player is more advantageous when the second specific control is executed than when the first specific control is executed.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the second specific control on the advantageous side to be prioritized. By doing so, it is possible to play an appropriate game without excessively arousing the sense of anticipation.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A launching means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball into a game area (game area PE) based on a player's shooting operation;
A starting ball entry portion (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game ball;
Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32A, 32B) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball;
Transition determination means capable of executing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift the game state to a specific state in which opening/closing control is performed by the variable ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry section. (a function of executing the success/failure determination process by the main controller 81);
Transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning the game state to the specific state based on the result of transition determination by the transition determination means;
Based on the transition determination by the transition determination means, a game round production is started by a predetermined notification means, and the game round production is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the transition judgment result. Control means (a function of executing a first game round control process and a second game round control process by the main control device 81);
period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) for storing period information corresponding to the performance period of the game round executed by the game round control means as a period information group;
Acquisition means for acquiring the period information according to the result of transition determination by the transition determination means from the period information group stored in the period information storage means (first variable display time setting process by main controller 81; 2 function to execute setting processing of variable display time);
with
The game round control means executes an effect of the game round in the notification period corresponding to the period information acquired by the acquisition means,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (end of the opening/closing execution mode), a first change means (by the main controller 81) capable of changing the period information group to be acquired by the acquisition means from the previous period information group a function to execute variable display time table switching processing);
grasping means (switching counter) for grasping a number corresponding to the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means;
A second changing means (main A process of setting the ceiling table in the variable display time table switching process by the control device 81: for example, a function of executing the process of S2106);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the period information group for setting the presentation period of the game round is changed based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition. Therefore, for example, it is possible to realize game characteristics such as changing the length of the performance period before and after the big win (the judgment result by the transition judging means is the result corresponding to the specific state transition) with the big win as the change condition. In addition, in this game machine, the grasping means grasps the number corresponding to the number of changes in the period information group, and when the grasped number reaches the predetermined number, the first changing means changes the period information. Period information may be changed when changing groups. Therefore, the change pattern of the period information group becomes much more diversified than when it is performed only by the first change means. That is, for example, in the example where the length of the production period is changed after the big win, the length of the production period after the big win can be different even if the result of the big win is the same. realizable. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that greatly expands the range of games by diversifying the length of the presentation period and attracts the interest of the players.

In addition, "a second change capable of changing the period information group to be changed by the first change means based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition based on the number grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined number means" may be "second changing means capable of changing the period information group changed by the first changing means based on the number grasped by the grasping means and based on the establishment of the predetermined change condition". .

Feature G2. When the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means, the period information group changed by the first changing means is not changed by the second changing means. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, the player desires the change by the second change means, and the effect of the feature G1 is enhanced. Specifically, when the number of times changed by the first change means reaches a predetermined number, the change is made by the second change means. It is conceivable that you will want it. Then, it is possible to use a material for selecting a game machine, such as positively selecting a machine for which the change condition is met a predetermined number of times to play a game.

Feature G3. Characteristic feature G1 or feature G2, characterized in that the predetermined change condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the transition determining means being a transition response result corresponding to transition of the specific state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the period information group is changed by shifting to a specific state in which opening/closing control is performed in which a ball can enter the variable ball entering means. Moreover, depending on the number of transitions to the specific state, the period information group is changed to a different period information group from the change destination by the first change means. By doing so, the change points of the period information group are aggregated into the specific state, which is the point that can greatly increase the attention, and the interest in the change is increased, and the change can be overlooked. can be suppressed.

Feature G4. a case where the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means, and a case where the period information group changed by the first changing means is not changed by the second changing means; The gaming machine according to feature G3, characterized in that the determination result by the transition determining means that satisfies the condition may be the same.

According to the above configuration, even if the determination result by the shift determining means is the same and the specific state is the same, the change destination of the period information group may be different. In this way, the effect of the feature G3 can be obtained without complicating the determination result by the transition determining means. In addition, for example, even if the specific state is not what the player wants, the state itself can be changed to what the player wants by changing the change destination of the period information group by the second change means. may be. Therefore, it is possible to draw a great deal of interest not only to the specific state but also to the change destination of the period information group.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the number grasped by the grasping means can be different from the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the second grasping means separately from the first grasping means. For example, in the case of a configuration in which a predetermined change condition is satisfied by a big win, the player can identify the number of times the period information is changed by the first change means from the data display machine in the game hall or the like. be. Therefore, if the number grasped by the grasping means and the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means are the same, the timing at which the period information group is changed by the second changing means (up to a predetermined number It can be said that the player can clearly recognize the timing). In this case, if certainty is desired in the determination of machine selection, it is considered preferable that the number of times be the same. Clarity, and the ambiguity enhances the enjoyment of platform selection.

As a specific configuration of the feature G5, "when the period information group is changed by the first changing means, the number of times grasped by the grasping means is reduced to the number of times grasped so far. means for updating by adding the above numbers (function for executing the processing of steps S2102, S2103, etc. by the main controller 81).

Feature G6. a plurality of types of transition response results are set as transition response results corresponding to transition to the specific state in the determination result by the transition determination means;
The grasping means corresponds to the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means after the judgment result by the transition judging means becomes a predetermined transition handling result among the plurality of types of transition handling results. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that it is configured to grasp numbers.

According to the above configuration, the start timing for grasping the number of times by the grasping means becomes clear. In particular, by setting the start opportunity as a predetermined transition response result among the transition response results for transitioning to the specific state, the specific state, which has been attracting a lot of attention in the first place, is performed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the start opportunity from being overlooked.

Feature G7. Setting means for setting the predetermined number by which the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means (function for executing the process of step S2208 by the main controller 81),
Any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the setting means is configured to set one predetermined number according to the current setting trigger from among a plurality of types of predetermined numbers (FIG. 45(b)). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, one of a plurality of types of numbers is set as the predetermined number for changing the period information group by the first changing means to be changed by the second changing means. In this way, not only does it become difficult to know when the second change means will make a change, but the change by the second change means may change the advantage for the player (feature G2). , the timing at which the advantage differs depends on the predetermined number that is set. By doing so, it is possible to greatly diversify games through a simple event of changing the period information group.

Feature G8. When the period information group is changed by the first changing means, means for updating the number of times grasped by the grasping means by adding a number of 1 or more to the number of times grasped so far (main controller 81),
When the number of times grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the difference between the number of times grasped by the grasping means and the predetermined number is added when the grasping of the number of times by the grasping means is started next time. means (function for executing processing such as step S2409 by the main controller 81);
The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, one or more is added to the number of times grasped by the grasping means based on one change of the period information group. In such a configuration, the number of changes in the period information group may be less than the predetermined number before reaching the predetermined number. The playability of up to is improved.

Furthermore, when the number of times grasped by the grasping means reaches a predetermined number or more, the difference between the number of times and the predetermined number may be carried over to the next time or later. By doing so, for example, when the number of times of change by the second change means is significantly greater than the predetermined number, it is expected that the next time the value reaches the predetermined value earlier. Therefore, for example, when a large value is added, it is possible to receive all the benefits based on it.

Feature G9. Setting means for setting the predetermined number by which the period information group changed by the first changing means is changed by the second changing means (function for executing the process of step S2403 by the main controller 81),
The grasping means can grasp the number corresponding to the number of times the period information group is changed by the first changing means even in a situation where the predetermined number is not set by the setting means. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that the number of times grasped by the grasping means before setting by the setting means will be the predetermined number. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the change is performed by the second change means, and it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games.

In particular, when applied to the configuration of feature G8, an event in which the predetermined number is greatly exceeded before the predetermined number is set is more likely to occur, so the effect of carrying over the difference can be enhanced. In this case, among the configurations of the feature G8, "when the number of times grasped by the grasping means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the difference between the number grasped by the grasping means and the predetermined number is means for adding at the start timing of grasping the number of times by the grasping means", the above effect can be obtained.

Feature G10. The number of times that the grasping means grasps can be notified by a predetermined notifying means (display screen G). A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, characterized in that it has a function of displaying a value.

According to the above configuration, the player can clearly recognize how long it will take for the change by the second change means to be made by the notification by the number of times notification means. Therefore, when the change by the second change means is preferable to the player, the change can be made to look forward to.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A launching means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball into a game area (game area PE) based on a player's shooting operation;
A starting ball entry portion (first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34) provided in the game area and capable of receiving a game ball;
Giving determination means (function for executing winning/failing determination processing by the main control device 81) capable of determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering section When,
Privilege granting means (main control unit) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result corresponding to granting the privilege to the player a function of executing game state transition processing by the device 81);
Based on the provision determination by the provision determination means, a predetermined notification means starts the effect of the game round, and the game cycle ends the effect of the game round as a notification result corresponding to the result of the provision determination. Control means (a function of executing a first game round control process and a second game round control process by the main control device 81);
Specific control means (main a function of executing the processing of steps S2307, S2309, etc. by the control device 81;
with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific control means is capable of taking the fact that the result of grant determination by the grant determination means is a non-grant correspondence result different from the grant correspondence result as the start trigger.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a privilege is awarded based on the grant determination result being the grant correspondence result, even the non-grant correspondence result that is not the grant correspondence result can make people interested. . In particular, the game machine has a so-called ceiling function that makes it easier for the player to receive a privilege when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a specific number. is configured to be performed based on the non-granting correspondence result. Regarding the ceiling function, generally, it is provided from the viewpoint of relieving the so-called addiction from the granting of a privilege to the granting of the next privilege. However, with such a ceiling function, for example, information on whether or not the ceiling is close to the ceiling can be clearly understood from the timing of giving benefits displayed on the data display machine provided in the game hall and the number of times the game is played. Gaming machines that are far from the ceiling are more likely to be avoided, which is considered to be one of the reasons for the decline in operating rates of gaming machines. Therefore, as described above, the trigger for starting the ceiling function is not the result of granting the benefit, but the result of non-granting, so it is difficult to understand whether it is close to the ceiling. can be guaranteed.

Feature H2. The specific control means, after the non-granting correspondence result is the start opportunity, until the number of executions of the game round after that reaches the specific number, even if the non-granting correspondence result is the specific number The game machine according to feature H1, characterized in that it is not used as the start opportunity.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a specific number of measurements from being started many times due to the continuous occurrence of non-applying correspondence results, so that the ceiling function can be favorably exhibited.

Feature H3. A first non-granting correspondence result that serves as the start trigger and a second non-granting correspondence result that does not serve as the start trigger are set as the non-granting correspondence results that are not subject to granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, depending on the relationship between the first non-applying corresponding result and the second non-applying corresponding result, it is possible to easily adjust whether the non-applying corresponding result is used as a start trigger or not. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature H1 with a simpler configuration.

Feature H4. Characteristic feature H3, characterized in that the provision determination by the provision determination means is set such that the probability of the second non-grant corresponding result is higher than the probability of the first non-granting corresponding result. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to cause inconvenience due to a succession of the first non-granting correspondence results that can be a start opportunity.

Feature H5. The specific control means subtracts, from the specific number, the number of game rounds executed from the game round to which the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means immediately before, based on the occurrence of the start trigger. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to start counting the number of times the game is played.

According to the above configuration, for example, if the number of times the game is executed after granting the privilege is a predetermined number of times, the result is a non-granting response result. It will be in the state which a privilege is easy to give by a specific control means. In other words, the number of games played has been counted since the granting of the privilege, and the count is treated as valid when the non-granting result is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to achieve a novel configuration that is different from the conventional ceiling function.

Feature H6. When the number of executions of game rounds from the game round to which the privilege is awarded by the privilege granting means immediately before is greater than the specified number, the specific control means sets the difference to the next start. The gaming machine according to feature H5, characterized by comprising first means (a function of executing processing such as step S2409 by the main controller 81) capable of subtracting from the specific number at a trigger.

According to the above configuration, when the number of times the game is played after granting the privilege exceeds a specific number and a start opportunity is generated (when the non-granting correspondence result is obtained), the difference is carried over to the next time. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a series of games to occur after a large addiction has occurred, and it is possible to increase the range of increase and decrease in the number of balls put out, thereby improving the playability.

Feature H7. The specific control means sets the difference to 0 when the number of executions of the game rounds from the game round to which the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means immediately before is greater than the specified number. The gaming machine according to feature H5 or feature H6, further comprising second means (a function of executing the process of step S2511 by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, unlike the feature H6, carryover does not occur, but it is preferable for the player who intends to end the game after reaching the ceiling (after awarding the privilege). Also, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the difference.

Feature H8. The specific control means is
When the number of game rounds executed from the game round in which the privilege is granted by the immediately preceding privilege granting means is greater than the specific number, the difference is the specified number at the next start opportunity. A first means capable of subtracting from (the function of executing the process of step S2512 by the main controller 81)
When the number of executions of game rounds from the game round to which the privilege is granted by the immediately preceding privilege granting means is larger than the specific number, the difference can be set to 0. means (the function of executing the process of step S2511 by the main controller 81);
with
The game machine according to feature H5, further comprising selection means (a function of executing the process of step S2509 by the main controller 81) capable of selecting between the first means and the second means.

According to the above configuration, regarding the handling of the number of executions and the difference of the specific number, whether the first means or the second means is used is a point in which the degree of advantage for the player greatly differs, and the player is interested. It can be said that it is a point to send Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which which of the first means and the second means is used is selected, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of game playability.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball;
Acquisition means for acquiring information for determination based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entrance portion (winning process for operation opening by main controller 81);
Giving determination means (setting process of first variable display time by main controller 81; 2 function to execute setting processing of variable display time);
privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the determination result of the grant determination by the grant determination means;
Based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a game run execution means (main control device) for executing a game cycle according to the determination result of the grant determination by a predetermined notification means (main display unit 37) A gaming machine comprising a function of executing a first game round control process and a second game round control process by 81),
The grant determination means is capable of executing the grant determination so as to obtain a result corresponding to the number of executions of the game rounds from a predetermined timing,
For a predetermined game round to be performed after the predetermined timing, a special notification corresponding to the grant determination by the grant determination means when the predetermined game round is performed is provided for the determination of the predetermined game round. At a timing before information is acquired, a special notification means (a function of executing a specific period effect process by the effect control device 82) that can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means is provided. A game machine characterized by

According to the above configuration, the grant determination means can execute the grant determination according to the number of times corresponding to the number of game rounds executed from the predetermined timing. In some cases, a special notification corresponding to the result of provision determination may be performed before the acquisition of the information for use. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the determination result by the subsequent grant determination means without entering the game ball into the starting ball entry part by reaching the predetermined timing, and the game can be started at the predetermined timing. It is possible to determine whether to continue or stop. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature I2. Characteristic I1 characterized in that it is set as the predetermined timing that the judgment result by the provision judgment means is a predetermined specific result (special outlier results B to D in the fifth embodiment) The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the predetermined timing is reached based on the judgment result by the provision judgment means, and it becomes possible to grasp the subsequent judgment result by the special notification before the ball is entered. By doing so, it is possible to raise interest in the determination result by the provision determining means.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the specified result is a result that the privilege is not given by the privilege giving means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw attention even to the result that no privilege is given. Then, the effect of feature I2 can be obtained without significantly changing the probability of determination by the provision determining means.

Feature I4. Based on the predetermined timing, after the predetermined timing, a transition is made to a specific state (specific period) in which the privilege is likely to be granted by the privilege granting means by performing the game rounds of the specified number of times. is the configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the special notification means is configured to be able to notify that the game will shift to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when it comes to the predetermined timing, it becomes easier to give the privilege in the game times after the specific number of times. Then, the player can be notified of this through a special notification. Therefore, it is possible to inform the point of interest of the player, such as when the privilege will be granted, by a special notification that it will come at a predetermined timing, so that the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased.

Feature I5. It is set as the predetermined timing that the judgment result by the provision judgment means is a predetermined specific result (special outlier results B to D in the fifth embodiment),
Based on the predetermined timing, after the predetermined timing, a transition is made to a specific state (specific period) in which the privilege is likely to be granted by the privilege granting means by performing the game rounds of the specified number of times. is the configuration,
When the judgment result by the provision judgment means performed during the specific state is the specific result, after the privilege is easily given in correspondence with the specific result that triggered the transition to the specific state. , The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the privilege is likely to be granted in response to the specific result being obtained during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when a specific result that triggers a shift to a specific state occurs during a specific state, a privilege is given after the specific state that has already shifted. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the event of a so-called draw loss during the specific state, and improve the playability during the specific state.

Feature I6. When the determination result by the provision determination means performed during the specific state is the specified result, regardless of the number of times determination by the provision determination means that has the specified result is performed from the predetermined timing. After the privilege is granted in response to the specified result that triggered the transition to the specified state, the privilege is likely to be granted in response to the specified result in the specified state. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that it has a configuration of

According to the above configuration, when the specific result is obtained during the specific state, the privilege is continuously given after the specific state ends. In this way, for example, it is possible to avoid sluggishness during the game due to repeated execution of the specific state, the granting of the privilege, and the specific state and the granting of the privilege.

Feature I7. It is set as the predetermined timing that the judgment result by the provision judgment means is a predetermined specific result (special outlier results B to D in the fifth embodiment),
Based on the predetermined timing, after the predetermined timing, a transition is made to a specific state (specific period) in which the privilege is likely to be granted by the privilege granting means by performing the game rounds of the specified number of times. is the configuration,
storage means (variation display time table storage area 223) for storing a period information group in which a plurality of period information corresponding to the notification period for executing the game round is stored;
Selection means for selecting period information corresponding to the notification period of the current game round from the period information group stored in the storage means (setting processing of the first variable display time by the main controller 81, second variable display function to execute time setting processing),
with
As the period information group, the specific period information group ( specific period table) is set,
A change means (a function of executing the process of step S2604 by the main controller 81) capable of changing the period information group to the specific period information group based on the predetermined timing is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, since it is a configuration in which the grant determination of the award is performed using the notification period corresponding to the number of times the game is executed from the predetermined timing, for example, a configuration in which the determination probability of the grant determination is changed. In comparison, the fairness of games is ensured, and the degree of freedom in game design is greatly improved. However, if the change to the specific period information group is configured to be performed at any timing, there is a possibility that the points that the player should pay attention to are too diverse, and the player's attention is rather dispersed. Therefore, the change to the specific period information group is performed based on the game result (based on the fact that the determination result by the grant determination means is the specified result), so it should be noted that the grant determination means The above effects can be achieved without violating the premise that the determination result is obtained by

Feature I8. As the period information group, a second specific period information group (ceiling table) is set in which the specific period information is set so that the specific period information is easily selected regardless of the number of executions of the game times after setting,
If the determination result by the provision determination means performed during the specific state is the specific result, after the privilege is provided in correspondence with the specific result that triggered the transition to the specific state, the The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the second specific period information group is set.

According to the above configuration, different period information groups are set depending on whether the specific result is obtained before the specific state or when the specific result is obtained during the specific state. Specifically, if the specific result is obtained before the specific state, the specific period information is likely to be selected after the specific number of times, and the privilege is easily given. The second specific period information group is set so that the specific period information is likely to be selected regardless of the number of times the game is executed, and thus the privilege is likely to be given regardless of the number of times the game is executed. In this way, by simply changing the period information group to be set, an event such as a privilege being granted after a specific state and then successively being granted can be realized without changing the probability of grant determination by the grant determination means. can be realized.

In particular, if the group of period information set before and after the specific state is changed, and the timing at which the privilege is granted after that is changed, the advantage is greatly different depending on the timing even if the specified result is the same. become. That is, before the specific state, the privilege is not granted unless the game is played a specified number of times, while during the specified state, the privilege is granted a smaller number of times than the specified number of times. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to obtain the specific result during the specific state, and it is possible to realize game characteristics such as how to draw the specific result during the specific state.

Feature I9. Comprehension means (loop counter) for comprehending the number of times that the determination result by the grant determination means performed during the specified state is the specified result,
The number of times the second specific period information group is set is determined according to the number of times grasped by the grasping means after the privilege is granted corresponding to the identification result that triggered the transition to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature I8, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, even if the specific result is obtained multiple times during the specific state, the second specific period information group is set accordingly, so that the so-called loss is not caused, rather, the It is possible to enhance the effect of game characteristics such as how to assign a specific result to.

Feature I10. A plurality of types of the specific results are set as the determination result of the grant determination by the grant determination means,
The grasping means adds a number corresponding to the type of the specific result to the number of times grasped so far when the determination result by the imparting determination means performed during the specific state is the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that it is a possible configuration.

According to the above configuration, the number of times the second specified period information group is set may differ depending on the type of specified result. By doing so, interest in drawing a specific result during the specific state and the type of the specific result is heightened, and the playability during the specific state is greatly improved.

Feature I11. The privilege imparting means imparts the same privilege to a first specified result of the plurality of types and a second specified result in which the number added by the grasping means differs from the first specified result. The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of

According to the above configuration, the number of times the second specific period information group is set differs for different types of specific results, even if the same privilege is given to the specific results. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in appearance when the specified result is obtained, and to draw attention to the set number of times of the second specified period information group.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
period information acquisition means for acquiring the period information from the period information storage means (function for executing the setting process of the second variable display time by the main control device 81);
A specific event (game turn of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means elapses. a specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on
with
Second period information corresponding to a second period that is different from the first period ( The second short-variation fluctuation display time information) is configured to be more advantageous for the player,
Equipped with state transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition establishment determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81),
Among the game states to which the state transition means can shift, there is a second game state (special table selection state) in which the ease of acquisition of the second period information is different from that of the first game state (normal table selection state). is included and
The state transition means is
A specific condition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition (first condition) is established in the first game state;
When it is determined by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the second game state is made easier than when the specific condition is not satisfied, or the transition to the second game state is performed. Permissible transition means (function for executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event occurs based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period than to select the first period as the period. In this way, the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the occurrence period of the specific event. It becomes possible to provide a novel playability. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game.

Further, in the above configuration, as game states, a first game state and a second game state in which the ease of acquiring the second period information is different from that in the first game state are provided. When established, the game state is easily shifted to the second game state, or the shift to the second game state is permitted.

For example, if the transition difficulty to the second game state is uniform, if the transition condition continues to be unsatisfied during the game, the expectation for the transition to the second game state (second game state is in an undesirable state for the player, he/she will gradually become less likely to have a sense of crisis, which may lead to a decrease in the player's desire to play. In this respect, according to this feature, the satisfaction of the change condition eases the difficulty of transitioning to the second game state, and even if a situation occurs in which the state does not transition to the second game state continues, a sense of anticipation and a sense of crisis can be generated. It can be aroused, and it becomes possible to maintain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest such as making it easier to shift to the second game state according to the game situation, thereby improving the amusement.

Feature J2. The period information storage means stores a first period information group (normal table) and a second period information group (special table) that are different in the ease with which the second period information is acquired by the acquisition means,
The acquiring means acquires the period information from the first period information group in the first gaming state, and acquires the period information from the second period information group in the second gaming state (main controller 81 A gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized in that it has a function of executing a setting process of the first variable display time according to J1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the game state by switching the period information group from which the period information is acquired. Therefore, it is possible to shift to an advantageous game state without using a special winning result such as a big win as a trigger, and to provide a novel game property different from the conventional game based on the premise of drawing a big win in a winning lottery. becomes possible.

Feature J3. The means for transition,
When the specific condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been established, transition condition determination means (main control a function of executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the device 81;
Means for shifting the game state to a second game state when the transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S4108 to S4112 by the main control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game state shifts to the second game state by the stepwise establishment of the specific condition and the transition condition. In a conventional game machine, whether or not to shift to another game state (for example, an advantageous state such as a high probability state in which the result of a winning lottery is likely to be a winning result) in units of one ball entering the ball entering section Therefore, it is assumed that the player can only enjoy each game (game round) corresponding to the above-mentioned entering ball as to whether or not the game state transitions. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the specific condition is met in one game, the transition to the second game state does not occur unless the transition condition is met in the subsequent game. As a result, the player can enjoy whether or not to shift to the second game state over a plurality of games, thereby improving interest.

Feature J4. The transition means is means for transitioning the game state to the second game state (condition by the main controller 81) when the transition condition is satisfied before a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to feature J3, characterized by comprising a function of executing a cancellation process.

If the transition condition is permitted to be satisfied indefinitely after the specific condition is satisfied, the game must be continued after the specific condition is satisfied until the transition condition is satisfied. It is possible to preferably avoid it and improve the playability.

Feature J5. The means for transition is means capable of canceling the establishment of the specific condition (execution of condition cancellation processing by the main controller 81) when the predetermined end condition is satisfied while the transition condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature J4, characterized in that it has a function to

According to the above configuration, the period during which the game state is easily shifted to the second game state or the period during which the transition to the second game state is allowed ends with the establishment of the end condition, and the establishment of the specific condition is aimed again. Amusement can be provided. As a result, the game can be played with a sense of tension after the specific condition is satisfied, and the interest can be improved.

Feature J6. production means (symbol display device 41) capable of executing a predetermined production;
When the specific condition is established, effect control means (function for executing a special effect start processing by the effect control device 82) for controlling to perform a special effect in the effect means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, since the special effect is performed in response to the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible for the player to grasp the establishment of the specific condition. If the second game state is a desirable state for the player, it is possible to suitably arouse expectations for the transition to the second game state, and if the second game state is an undesirable state for the player. , the sense of danger of shifting to the second game state can be favorably aroused, and the amusement is improved.

Feature J7. Means for controlling so that the special effect is performed by the effect means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition even in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied (executing the special effect start processing by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to feature J6, characterized by comprising a function to

According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a configuration in which the establishment of the specific condition cannot be uniquely determined from the special effect, while indicating to the player that the specific condition may have been established by the special effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of guessing whether a specific condition has been established or the thrill of proceeding with the game without it being clear that the specific condition has been established.

Feature J8. Means capable of maintaining the first game state even if the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state (function of maintaining the selected state of the normal table even after the first condition is satisfied by the main controller 81) is provided. The game machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition is satisfied, it is sufficient to maintain the previous state as the game state related to the ease of acquiring the second period information (or the ease of establishing the specific state). , it is possible to simplify the control process and reduce the processing load.

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the second gaming state is a state in which the second period information is more likely to be acquired than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to realize a game property that facilitates transition to an advantageous game state or permits transition to an advantageous game state.

Feature J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the second gaming state is a state in which the second period information is less likely to be acquired than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to realize a game property that facilitates the end of an advantageous game state or permits the end of an advantageous game state.

Feature J11. The specific condition determination means includes means for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied based on the ball entering the ball entering portion (function for executing condition establishment determination processing by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to incorporate the specific condition satisfaction determination process into the control process for the specific event, and to execute the specific condition determination process as part of the control process. As a result, the control process can be simplified, and failures in determining whether the specific condition is established can be suppressed, as compared with a configuration in which both processes are performed separately.

Feature J12. Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (jackpot random number counter C1) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (winning a prize to the second operation opening 34) (main controller 81 for the second operation opening 34 function to execute the winning process) and
special determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S611 and S911 by the main controller 81) for performing determination processing based on the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
with
It is characterized in that it is configured to be advantageous to the player when the second period information is acquired as the period information and the judgment result of the special judging means is a specific result (special outlier result). The game machine according to any one of J1 to J11.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage depending not only on the ease with which the second period information is obtained, but also with the ease with which the identification result is obtained. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of elements that change the degree of advantage. It is possible to diversify the game states, for example, there is a game state in which the likelihood of obtaining a specific result is suppressed to a normal level.

Feature J13. A lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (a function of executing a winning/failure determination process for the second operation opening 34 by the main control device 81);
The action for a game cycle is started by a predetermined informing means, and the end of the action for a game cycle as a notification result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means is regarded as one game cycle, and the game cycle of each game cycle. A game round control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) that controls so that the operation is performed;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the specific event is the game-playing action.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to utilize the action for playing the game for notifying the result of the lottery as the specific event. As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not the game-playing operation will end in the second period and to notify the result of the lottery by one notification means, so that it is possible to consolidate the points of interest. .

When this feature is applied to the feature J12, "lottery processing" and "lottery means" may be read as "determination process" and "determination means", respectively.

Feature J14. The state transition means, even if the specific condition is not established, special transition conditions different from the specific conditions in the first game state (the success/failure determination result for the first special figure and the second special figure is the jackpot result ) is established, the game state can be shifted to the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J13.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the second game state even in a situation where the specific condition is not established, and the expectation of shifting to the second game state regardless of whether or not the specific condition is established. It is possible to heighten the sense of danger and danger. Not only that, it is also possible to diversify the transition route to the second game state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature J15. The game state to which the state transition means can shift includes a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state,
According to any one of features J1 to J14, the state transition means includes means capable of transitioning the game state to the third game state based on the establishment of the specific condition. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the establishment of the first specific condition based on the transition of the game state to the third game state. As a result, it is possible to add the pleasure of estimating the fulfillment of a specific condition from the change in the game state, and it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game (change in the game state).

Feature J16. A specific passing portion (V winning area 356) through which game balls can pass;
Privilege granting means (function for executing game state transition processing by main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to a player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific passing portion;
A plurality of aspects including a first aspect in which a game ball can or easily pass through the specific passing portion and a second aspect in which a game ball cannot pass through the specific passing portion or is more difficult to pass than the first aspect. Means for a specific passing section (second variable winning device 32B) operable at
with
The means for the specific passing section is configured to operate in the second mode more easily when the second period information is obtained than when the first period information is obtained as the period information. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J15, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the step of passing the game ball through the specific passing portion is interposed in the process until the awarding of the privilege, thereby allowing the player to participate in the game and technically intervene in addition to the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion. Opportunities can be secured, and interest is improved.

Feature J17. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning to the first operation port 33), and a first specific event period (first fluctuation a first specific event control means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (second special figure game round) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (winning a prize to the second operation port 34), and a second specific event period (second fluctuation a second specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
When one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses (reverse a privilege giving means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of giving a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a state);
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the likelihood of establishment of the specific state is different from the first game state (ordinary table selection state). and
The state transition means is
A specific condition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition (first condition) is established in the first game state;
When it is determined by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the second game state is made easier than when the specific condition is not satisfied, or the transition to the second game state is performed. Permissible transition means (function for executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the first specific event is controlled to occur over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is satisfied, the second specific event is controlled to the second specific event. The second specific event period elapses earlier than the first specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events under the configuration of being controlled to be performed over the event period In this case, a privilege is given to the player. In this way, whether or not a benefit is granted depends on which period of time elapses first. It is possible to provide a novel game property. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game.

Further, in the above configuration, as game states, a first game state and a second game state in which the ease of establishment of a specific state is different from that of the first game state are provided, and the specific condition is established in the first game state. In this case, the game state is easily shifted to the second game state, or the shift to the second game state is allowed.

For example, if the transition difficulty to the second game state is uniform, if the transition condition continues to be unsatisfied during the game, the expectation for the transition to the second game state (second game state is in an undesirable state for the player, he/she will gradually become less likely to have a sense of crisis, which may lead to a decrease in the player's desire to play. In this respect, according to this feature, the satisfaction of the change condition eases the difficulty of transitioning to the second game state, and even if a situation occurs in which the state does not transition to the second game state continues, a sense of anticipation and a sense of crisis can be generated. It can be aroused, and it becomes possible to maintain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest such as making it easier to shift to the second game state according to the game situation, thereby improving the amusement.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features J2 to J16 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature J18. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter,
Grant determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined grant condition (V winning) has been established based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section (executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) function) and
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the granting determination means determines that the granting condition is satisfied (function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) When,
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the ease with which the granting condition is established is different from the first game state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
A specific condition determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific condition (first condition) is established in the first game state;
When it is determined by the specific condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the second game state is made easier than when the specific condition is not satisfied, or the transition to the second game state is performed. Permissible transition means (function for executing the processes of steps S3202, S3205, and S3206 by the main controller 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the granting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the privilege is granted when it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied. Below, as the game state, a first game state and a second game state in which the granting condition is different from the first game state are provided, and when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the game The configuration is such that the state is easily shifted to the second game state or the shift to the second game state is allowed.

For example, if the transition difficulty to the second game state is uniform, if the transition condition continues to be unsatisfied during the game, the expectation for the transition to the second game state (second game state is in an undesirable state for the player, he/she will gradually become less likely to have a sense of crisis, which may lead to a decrease in the player's desire to play. In this respect, according to this feature, the satisfaction of the change condition eases the difficulty of transitioning to the second game state, and even if a situation occurs in which the state does not transition to the second game state continues, a sense of anticipation and a sense of crisis can be generated. It can be aroused, and it becomes possible to maintain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest such as making it easier to shift to the second game state according to the game situation, thereby improving the amusement.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features J2 to J16 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter,
Grant determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined grant condition (V winning) has been established based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section (executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) function) and
Privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the granting determination means determines that the granting condition is satisfied; ,
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the ease with which the granting condition is established is different from the first game state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
Special transition means (steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main controller 81 that can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition functions to perform) and
Transition condition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4415, S4606, S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, function to execute the processes of S4607, S4611, and S4612);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the granting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the privilege is granted when it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied. Below, as the game state, a first game state and a second game state in which the granting condition is different from the first game state are provided, and a predetermined change condition is provided for the transition condition to the second game state. It is considered to be a configuration that can be changed by being established.

For example, if the transition condition to the second game state is fixed, there is a concern that the transition route will be unified and the game will become monotonous. In addition, if the state in which the transition condition is not established during the game continues for a long time, it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation for the establishment of the transition condition (a sense of crisis if the second game state is an undesirable state for the player), and the desire to play is reduced. Attenuation may also occur.

In this regard, according to this feature, since the transition condition can be changed when the change condition is established, the transition route can be diversified, and the monotony of the game can be suppressed. Moreover, by changing the transition condition, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency with respect to the fulfillment of the transition condition, thereby making it possible to maintain the desire to play. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest in changing transition conditions, which improves interest.

In addition, according to the above configuration, since the change condition is established based on the predetermined game result, it is possible to change the transition condition during the game. In this case, the player is interested in whether or not the transition to the second game state will occur, and the transition condition is changed. In other words, it is possible to change the goal to be achieved and the goal to be avoided during the game, thus making it possible to diversify the game.

Feature K2. The transition condition changing means converts the transition condition from a first transition condition (winning a disadvantageous special loss result C) to a second transition that is more likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition based on the establishment of the change condition. Characteristic K1 characterized by having a changeable means (a function of executing the processing of S4407, S4410, S4411, S4611, and S4612 by the main controller 81) for the condition (winning the special disadvantage result D). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to shift to the second game state when the change condition is established. For example, if the second game state is a desired state for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of satisfying the transition condition, the enjoyment of satisfying the change condition can be provided, and the second game state can be provided. is not desirable for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of avoiding establishment of the transition condition, the enjoyment of avoiding the establishment of the change condition can be provided, and the amusement is improved.

Feature K3. The transition condition changing means changes the transition condition from a first transition condition (winning a disadvantageous special loss result D) to a second transition that is less likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition based on the establishment of the change condition. Characteristic K1 characterized by having a changeable means (a function of executing the processing of S4407, S4414, S4415, S4606, and S4607 by the main controller 81) for the condition (winning the special disadvantage result C). Or the gaming machine according to feature K2.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to shift to the second game state when the change condition is satisfied. For example, if the second game state is a desired state for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of satisfying the transition condition, the enjoyment of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition can be added. If the game state is not desirable for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of avoiding the establishment of the transition condition, the enjoyment of the establishment of the change condition can be added to improve the amusement.

Note that when the feature K3 is applied to the feature K2, "the transition condition is changed from the second transition condition to the first transition condition based on the fact that the change condition or a specific condition different from the change condition is established." It can be read as "provided with changeable means". According to this configuration, mutual conversion between a state in which it is easy to shift to the second game state and a state in which it is difficult to shift to the second game state is possible. As a result, further diversification of game properties can be achieved, and interest is improved.

Feature K4. Multiple conditions can be set as the transition conditions,
When a plurality of conditions are set as the transition conditions, the special transition means can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of any one of the plurality of conditions. have the means to
The transition condition changing means according to any one of characteristics K1 to K3, characterized in that it comprises means capable of adding a condition to the transition condition based on the establishment of the change condition. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to increase the number of transition conditions by establishing the change condition under the structure that the transition to the second game state becomes easier as the number of conditions set as the transition conditions increases. . In this case, since it becomes easier to shift to the second game state when the change condition is established, for example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, it is possible to add the pleasure of establishing the change condition. Become. Note that the increase in the number of transition conditions is not limited to the addition of one condition, and may be the addition of a plurality of conditions.

Feature K5. Multiple conditions can be set as the transition conditions,
When a plurality of conditions are set as the transition conditions, the special transition means can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of any one of the plurality of conditions. have the means to
Characteristic feature K1, wherein the transition condition changing means comprises means capable of invalidating at least one of a plurality of conditions set as the transition conditions based on the establishment of the change condition. The game machine according to any one of K4.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of transition conditions by establishing the change condition under the structure that the more conditions set as transition conditions, the easier it is to transition to the second game state. Become. In this case, since it becomes difficult to shift to the second game state when the change condition is established, for example, if the second game state is a desirable state for the player, it is possible to add the pleasure of avoiding the establishment of the change condition. be possible.

When the feature K5 is applied to the feature K4, "the transition condition changing means invalidates at least one of the plurality of conditions set as the transition conditions based on the establishment of the change condition. It can be read as "provided with possible means".

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any one of the features K1 to K5. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature K6. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
period information acquisition means for acquiring the period information from the period information storage means (function for executing the setting process of the second variable display time by the main control device 81);
A specific event (game turn of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means elapses. a specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on
with
Second period information corresponding to a second period that is different from the first period ( The second short-variation fluctuation display time information) is configured to be more advantageous for the player,
Equipped with state transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition establishment determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81),
Among the game states to which the state transition means can shift, there is a second game state (special table selection state) in which the ease of acquisition of the second period information is different from that of the first game state (normal table selection state). is included and
The state transition means is
Special transition means (steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main controller 81 that can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition functions to perform) and
Transition condition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4415, S4606, S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, function to execute the processes of S4607, S4611, and S4612);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event occurs based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period than to select the first period as the period. In this way, the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the occurrence period of the specific event. It becomes possible to provide a novel playability. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the condition for shifting to the second game state can be changed by establishing the change condition based on the predetermined game result, so the effect of the feature K1 can be played synergistically.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features K2 to K5 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature K7. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning to the first operation port 33), and a first specific event period (first fluctuation a first specific event control means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (second special figure game round) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (winning a prize to the second operation port 34), and a second specific event period (second fluctuation a second specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
When one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. privilege granting means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the likelihood of establishment of the specific state is different from the first game state (ordinary table selection state). and
The state transition means is
Special transition means (steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main controller 81 that can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition functions to perform) and
Transition condition changing means (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4415, S4606, S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, function to execute the processes of S4607, S4611, and S4612);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the first specific event is controlled to occur over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is satisfied, the second specific event is controlled to the second specific event. The second specific event period elapses earlier than the first specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events under the configuration of being controlled to be performed over the event period In this case, a privilege is given to the player. In this way, whether or not a benefit is granted depends on which period of time elapses first. It is possible to provide a novel game property. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the condition for shifting to the second game state can be changed by establishing the change condition based on the predetermined game result, so the effect of the feature K1 can be played synergistically.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features K2 to K5 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature K8. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter,
Grant determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined grant condition (V winning) has been established based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section (executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) function) and
Privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the granting determination means determines that the granting condition is satisfied; ,
State transition means (main controller) for shifting the game state from a first game state (normal table selection state) to a second game state (special table selection state) in which the grant condition is more likely to be established than in the first game state 81, a function of executing a condition establishment determination process and a table switching process),
A plurality of the first game states are set (first precursor state 602a, second precursor state 602b),
A game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the easiness of transition to the second game state differs in each of the first game states.

According to the above configuration, since it is configured to be able to shift to the second game state in which the provision condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the first game state, the player aims to shift the game state to the second game state. to play. Under such a configuration, a plurality of first game states are set, and the easiness of transition to the second game state is different in each first game state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to stay in the first game state in which the transition to the second game state is easy, as a pre-stage before shifting to the second game state. As a result, it is possible to provide not only whether the player can shift to the second game state, but also the enjoyment of which first game state to stay in, thereby improving the amusement.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features K1 to K7 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (V winning area 356) into which game balls can enter,
Grant determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined grant condition (V winning) has been established based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section (executing the processing of steps S1204 and S1205 by the main controller 81) function) and
Privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to the player when the granting determination means determines that the granting condition is satisfied; ,
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the ease with which the granting condition is established is different from the first game state (normal table selection state). and
The state transition means is
Special transition means (steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main controller 81 that can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition functions to perform) and
Transition changing means for changing the likelihood of establishment of the transition condition based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4607, S4611, S4612 by main controller 81) function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the granting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the privilege is granted when it is determined that the granting condition is satisfied. Below, as the game state, a first game state and a second game state in which the granting condition is different from the first game state are provided, and a transition condition is established when a predetermined change condition is established. The configuration is such that the easiness can be changed. In this case, the degree of difficulty in establishing the transition condition can be changed according to whether or not the change condition is established, and the ease of establishment can be enhanced. As a result, compared to the case where the degree of difficulty of establishment of the transition condition is fixed, the expectation of transitioning to the second game state (the sense of crisis when the second game state is an undesirable state for the player) fluctuates. It becomes easy to produce, and interest improves.

Feature L2. The change means for transition, based on the satisfaction of the change condition, changes the environment for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied from a first environment to a second environment in which the transition condition is different from the first environment. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized by comprising an environment changing means (function for executing table switching processing by the main controller 81) capable of changing the environment.

According to the above configuration, the environment in which the establishment of the transition condition is determined based on the establishment of the change condition is changed from the first environment to the second environment. As a result, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed in a practically preferable manner.

Feature L3. The environment changing means has means for changing the first environment to the second environment by changing the probability of establishment of the transition condition from a first probability to a second probability different from the first probability. The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized by:

According to the above-described configuration, a mode in which a transition condition is met with a first probability and a mode in which a transition condition is met with a second probability are prepared, and simple control is performed by simply switching between them when the change condition is met. , it is possible to change the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied, thereby simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load.

Feature L4. The environment changing means changes the first environment to the second environment by changing the determination frequency of the establishment of the transition condition from a first frequency to a second frequency different from the first frequency. The gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3, characterized by comprising means for playing.

According to the above configuration, it is easy to prepare a mode in which a determination can be made at the first frequency and a mode in which a determination can be made at the second frequency as the mode of determining whether the transition condition is met, and to switch between them when the change condition is met. It is possible to change the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied by simple control, and it is possible to simplify the control processing and reduce the processing load.

Feature L5. The environment changing means includes means for changing the first environment to the second environment by changing the timing for determining whether the transition condition is met from a first timing to a second timing different from the first timing. The game machine according to any one of features L2 to L4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, as the mode of determination of establishment of the transition condition, a mode in which the determination can be made based on the first trigger and a mode in which the determination can be made based on the second trigger are prepared. It is possible to change the ease with which the transition condition is established by a simple control of switching, and it is possible to simplify the control processing and reduce the processing load.

Feature L6. The environment changing means includes means for changing the first environment to the second environment by changing the transition condition from the first transition condition to a second transition condition different from the first transition condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are prepared as the transition condition, and the ease of establishment of the transition condition can be changed by a simple control of switching between them when the change condition is established. It is possible to simplify the control process and reduce the processing load.

Note that each configuration described in any of the features K2 to K8 may be applied to the feature L6. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L6, wherein the transition condition is more likely to be established in the second environment than in the first environment.

According to the above configuration, it becomes easier to shift to the second game state when the change condition is met. For example, if the second game state is a desired state for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of satisfying the transition condition, the enjoyment of satisfying the change condition can be provided, and the second game state can be provided. is not desirable for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of avoiding establishment of the transition condition, the enjoyment of avoiding the establishment of the change condition can be provided, and the amusement is improved.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L6, wherein the transition condition is less likely to be satisfied in the second environment than in the first environment.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to shift to the second game state when the change condition is satisfied. For example, if the second game state is a desired state for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of satisfying the transition condition, the enjoyment of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition can be added. If the game state is not desirable for the player, in addition to the enjoyment of avoiding the establishment of the transition condition, the enjoyment of the establishment of the change condition can be added to improve the amusement.

Note that when the feature L8 is applied to the feature L7, the feature L8 may be changed to "the environment for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied based on the fact that the change condition or a specific condition different from the change condition is satisfied. It can be read as "equipped with means capable of changing from the environment to the first environment". According to this configuration, mutual conversion between a state in which it is easy to shift to the second game state and a state in which it is difficult to shift to the second game state is possible. As a result, further diversification of game properties can be achieved, and interest is improved.

Note that each configuration described in any of the features J1 to J17 may be applied to any of the features L1 to L8. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature L9. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
period information acquisition means for acquiring the period information from the period information storage means (function for executing the setting process of the second variable display time by the main control device 81);
A specific event (game turn of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means elapses. a specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on
with
Second period information corresponding to a second period that is different from the first period ( The second short-variation fluctuation display time information) is configured to be more advantageous for the player,
Equipped with state transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition establishment determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81),
Among the game states to which the state transition means can shift, there is a second game state (special table selection state) in which the ease of acquisition of the second period information is different from that of the first game state (normal table selection state). is included and
The state transition means is
Special transition means (steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main controller 81 that can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition functions to perform) and
Transition changing means for changing the likelihood of establishment of the transition condition based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4607, S4611, S4612 by main controller 81) function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event occurs based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period than to select the first period as the period. In this way, the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the occurrence period of the specific event. It becomes possible to provide a novel playability. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed when the predetermined change condition is satisfied. Therefore, the effect of the feature L1 can be synergistically achieved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features L2 to L8 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature L10. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning to the first operation port 33), and a first specific event period (first fluctuation a first specific event control means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (second special figure game round) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (winning a prize to the second operation port 34), and a second specific event period (second fluctuation a second specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
When one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. privilege granting means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the likelihood of establishment of the specific state is different from the first game state (ordinary table selection state). and
The state transition means is
Special transition means (steps S4408, S4409, S4412, S4413, S4614 to S4616 by the main controller 81 that can shift the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition functions to perform) and
Transition changing means for changing the likelihood of establishment of the transition condition based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (S4407, S4410, S4411, S4414, S4415, S4606, S4607, S4611, S4612 by main controller 81) function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the first specific event is controlled to occur over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is satisfied, the second specific event is controlled to the second specific event. The second specific event period elapses earlier than the first specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events under the configuration of being controlled to be performed over the event period In this case, a privilege is given to the player. In this way, whether or not a benefit is granted depends on which period of time elapses first. It is possible to provide a novel game property. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game. Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be changed when the predetermined change condition is satisfied. Therefore, the effect of the feature L1 can be synergistically achieved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features L2 to L8 and the above features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
period information acquisition means for acquiring the period information from the period information storage means (function for executing the setting process of the second variable display time by the main control device 81);
A specific event (game turn of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means elapses. a specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on
with
Second period information corresponding to a second period that is different from the first period ( The second short-variation fluctuation display time information) is configured to be more advantageous for the player,
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing state transition determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81),
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the second period information is more likely to be acquired than the first game state (normal table selection state). cage,
The second game state includes a plurality of special game states (first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b) with different easiness of acquisition of the second period information,
The state transition means is a special transition means (state transition determination processing by the main controller 81, a function for executing table switching processing).

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the specific event occurs based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means Under the configuration in which the event ends, it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period than to select the first period as the period. In this way, the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the occurrence period of the specific event. It becomes possible to provide a novel playability. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the second game state in which the second period information is more likely to be acquired than the first game state includes a plurality of special game states in which the second period information is more likely to be acquired. An advantageous state can be constructed, and it is possible to realize a game property of shifting to an advantageous state while diversifying the degree of advantage. As a result, not only the expectation that the game state will shift to the second game state, but also the expectation that the game state will shift to the special game state with a high degree of advantage can be aroused, and the amusement is improved.

Feature M2. The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state 603b),
The period information storage means is configured to be able to store the period information as a period information group,
The period information group includes a first period information group (special table A) including at least the second period information, and a second period information group ( There is a special table B) and
In the first special game state, the period information acquisition means acquires the period information from the first period information group, and in the second special game state, the period information acquisition means acquires the period information from the second period information group. The gaming machine according to feature M1, which is configured to be able to acquire period information.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the advantageous degree of the advantageous state with a simple configuration that only controls the selection of which period information to acquire from the first and second period information groups. It becomes possible to realize the configuration of M1 in a practically preferable manner.

Feature M3. The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state 603b),
Characteristic M1 or characterized by comprising means capable of making the transition period when shifting to the second special game state different from the transition period when shifting to the first special game state. The gaming machine described in M2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the degree of advantage in the advantageous state with a simple configuration that only differs the transition period of each special game state, and the configuration of the feature M1 is realized in a practically preferable manner. becomes possible.

Feature M4. The special transition means is
Based on the fact that the number corresponding to the number of executions of the predetermined process after shifting to the special game state (the number of executions of the game round of the second special figure, the number of selections of the special table) becomes a specific number (prescribed number of times) Ending means capable of ending the special game state;
a specific number setting means for setting the specific number of the special game state when transitioning to the special game state;
The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state 603b),
Any one of the characteristics M1 to M3, wherein the specific number setting means comprises means for differentiating the specific number of the first special game state from the specific number of the second special game state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to diversify the degree of advantage of the advantageous state with a simple configuration in which the specific number of each special game state is changed, and the configuration of the feature M1 is realized in a practically preferable manner. becomes possible.

Feature M5. The period information storage means is configured to be able to store the period information as a period information group,
Characteristic feature M3 or feature M4, wherein the period information acquisition means comprises means for acquiring the period information from the same period information group in the first special game state and the second special game state. The gaming machine described in .

While the degree of advantage is diversified by differentiating the transition period of each special game state, the period information group used in the first and second special game states is made common to reduce the usage amount of the period information storage means. can be saved, and an optimum configuration can be achieved while the storage capacity is limited.

Feature M6. The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state) in which the second period information is more likely to be acquired than the first special game state 603b) and
The state transition means includes means capable of transitioning the game state to the second special game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition (promotion condition) in the first special game state. The game machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, characterized in that

In a configuration in which a plurality of special game states with different degrees of advantage are provided as advantageous states to which the normal state can be shifted, for example, after the transition to the advantageous state, the game state is fixed until the end of the state. There is a risk that the player will be disappointed if the state shifts to the first special game state with the lower degree. In this regard, according to this configuration, it is possible to shift to the second special game state even after shifting to the first special game state, so the first special game state is expected to shift to the second special game state. The game can be played, the disappointment of the player can be reduced, and the desire to play can be continuously enhanced.

Feature M7. The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state) in which the second period information is more likely to be acquired than the first special game state 603b) and
The state transition means includes means capable of transitioning the game state to the first special game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition (demotion condition) in the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility of shifting to the first special game state with a low advantage even when the state is shifted to the second special game state with a higher advantage. As a result, the enjoyment of playing the second special game state can be added while avoiding the transition to the first special game state, and the amusement is improved.

When this feature is applied to the feature M6, the "predetermined specific condition" may be read as "the specific condition or a predetermined condition different from the specific condition."

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any one of the features M1 to M6. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature M8. A first specific event (game round of the first special figure) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined first occurrence condition (winning to the first operation port 33), and a first specific event period (first fluctuation a first specific event control means (a function of executing the first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
A second specific event (second special figure game round) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined second occurrence condition (winning a prize to the second operation port 34), and a second specific event period (second fluctuation a second specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on the elapse of the display time);
When one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. privilege granting means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing condition satisfaction determination processing and table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first game state (ordinary table selection state),
The second game state includes a plurality of special game states (first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b) with different easiness of acquisition of the second period information,
The state transition means is a special transition means (state transition determination processing by the main controller 81, a function for executing table switching processing).

According to the above configuration, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the first specific event is controlled to occur over the first specific event period, and when the second occurrence condition is satisfied, the second specific event is controlled to the second specific event. The second specific event period elapses earlier than the first specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events under the configuration of being controlled to be performed over the event period In this case, a privilege is given to the player. In this way, whether or not a benefit is granted depends on which period of time elapses first. It is possible to provide a novel game property. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, in the second game state in which the specific state is more likely to be established than in the first game state, a plurality of special game states with different easiness to establish the specific state are included, so a plurality of advantageous states are constructed. It is possible to realize a game property of shifting to an advantageous state while diversifying the degree of advantage. As a result, not only the expectation that the game state will shift to the second game state, but also the expectation that the game state will shift to the special game state with a high degree of advantage can be aroused, and the amusement is improved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features M2 to M7 and the features J1 to J18 may be applied to the feature M8. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
period information acquisition means for acquiring the period information from the period information storage means (function for executing the setting process of the second variable display time by the main control device 81);
A specific event (second special figure game round) is generated based on the establishment of a predetermined occurrence condition (second operation port 34), and corresponds to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means a specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on the elapse of the period;
with
Second period information corresponding to a second period that is different from the first period ( The second short-variation fluctuation display time information) is configured to be more advantageous for the player,
The period information storage means stores a first period information group (normal table) including at least the first period information as the period information, and the second period information obtained by the obtaining means from the first period information group. and a second period information group (special table) that is likely to be
From a first state (normal table selection state) in which the period information obtaining means obtains the period information from the first period information group to a state in which the period information obtaining means obtains the period information from the second period information group Equipped with state transition means (function for executing condition establishment determination processing and table switching processing by the main controller 81) for transitioning to two states (selection state of the special table),
The state transition means is
special transition means (function for executing the processes of steps S4104 to S4112 by the main controller 81) capable of transitioning to the second state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
Based on the fact that the number corresponding to the number of executions of the predetermined process after shifting to the second state (the number of executions of the game round of the second special figure, the number of selections of the special table) becomes a specific number (prescribed number of times) Ending means capable of ending the second state (function for executing table return processing by the main controller 81);
Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (addition condition) in the second state, a change means (addition determination processing by the main controller 81, step function to execute the processing of S5101 to S5103);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific event occurs based on the fulfillment of the occurrence condition, and the specific event ends based on the elapse of the period corresponding to the period information acquired from the period information storage means. , it is more advantageous for the player to select the second period as the period than to select the first period. In this way, since the degree of advantage changes depending on what period is selected as the occurrence period of the specific event, it is possible to provide a novel game, which greatly contributes to increasing the attention of the game. be able to.

Further, in the above configuration, the first period information group including at least the first period information as the period information and the second period information group from which the second period information is more likely to be acquired than the first period information group are provided. By switching whether to acquire the period information from the information group, a transition to a state advantageous to the player is made. Therefore, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without using a special winning result such as a big win as a trigger. can give

In addition, in the above configuration, after the transition to the second state in which the second period information is easily acquired, the predetermined change condition is satisfied, so that the specific number or the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be changed. there is This makes it possible to change the transition period to the second state in a fluid manner, making it difficult to predict how long the second state will continue, thereby improving interest. Moreover, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the remaining number of times in the second state changes during the game in the second state, which can greatly contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature N2. The terminating means terminates the second state based on a number corresponding to the number of times the period information is obtained from the second period information group becomes the specific number when transitioning to the second state. have the means to
The changing means is characterized by comprising means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number corresponding to the number of acquisitions up to the specific number based on the establishment of the change condition. The gaming machine described in N1.

According to the above configuration, by managing the number of acquisition times of the period information from the second period information group, it is possible to manage the period during which the second state is maintained, thereby simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load. becomes possible. Furthermore, by changing the specific number or the remaining number of acquisition times based on the establishment of the change condition, the maintenance period of the second state can be changed fluidly after the start of the second state. can be realized in a practically preferred mode.

Feature N3. The terminating means comprises means capable of terminating the second state based on a number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the specific event becoming the specific number when transitioning to the second state,
The changing means is characterized by comprising means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number corresponding to the number of occurrences up to the specific number based on the establishment of the change condition. The gaming machine according to N1 or feature N2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to manage the period during which the second state is maintained by managing the number of occurrences of the specific event, thereby simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load. Furthermore, by changing the specific number or the remaining number of occurrences based on the establishment of the change condition, the maintenance period of the second state can be changed fluidly after the start of the second state. can be realized in a practically preferred mode.

In addition, the feature N3 is defined as "the specific event control means is configured to generate the specific event as a first specific event, and the predetermined second occurrence condition (winning to the first operation opening 33) is satisfied. A second specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main control device 81) for generating a second specific event (a game round of the first special figure) based on establishment, and the ending means is , when the game state shifts to the second state, the second state is changed based on the fact that the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes the specific number means capable of terminating, and the changing means has means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number of the number corresponding to the number of occurrences up to the specific number."

In this case, "the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event is a specific number" means that the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the first specific event is a specific number. the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the second specific event becomes a specific number; the number corresponding to the sum of the number of occurrences of the first specific event and the second specific event becomes a specific number; the first specific event and the same or different specific numbers are set for each of the second specific events, and the number corresponding to at least one of the number of occurrences of the first specific event and the second specific event is the specific number.

Feature N4. The changing means is
addition means for adding a predetermined number to the specific number or the remaining number based on the fulfillment of the change condition (function for executing the processes of steps S5101 to S5103 by the main controller 81);
means (function for executing table return processing by the main controller 81) capable of making the number obtained by adding the predetermined number by the adding means the new specified number or the remaining number;
The game machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the remaining number of times of the second state by satisfying the change condition, and it is possible to extend the transition period to the second state. As a result, the enjoyment of satisfying the change condition in the second state is added, and the amusement is improved.

Feature N5. There are multiple types of numbers as numbers that can be added to the specific number or the remaining number,
comprising selection means for selecting an addition number from the plurality of types of numbers,
The gaming machine according to feature N4, wherein the addition means adds the addition number selected by the selection means as the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add interest in not only whether or not the number of remaining times in the second state increases, but also to what degree the increase amount will be, thereby further improving the amusement. becomes possible.

Feature N6. Privilege granting means (game state transition processing by main controller 81) capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to a player based on establishment of a predetermined granting condition (passage of game ball through V winning area 356) function),
Any of features N1 to N5, wherein the provision condition is more likely to be satisfied when the second period information is obtained as the period information rather than when the first period information is obtained. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the second state, it becomes easier to grant benefits, and by changing the remaining period of the second state, the degree of expectation that the benefits will be granted by the end of the second state can be changed. For example, if the remaining period of the second state is extended, the degree of expectation of privilege provision can be improved, and conversely, if the remaining period of the second state is shortened, the degree of expectation of privilege provision can be lowered. That is, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege increases or decreases while aiming to award a privilege in the second state, thereby improving the amusement.

Feature N7. state setting means capable of setting a state after granting the privilege to the second state when the privilege is granted based on the fulfillment of the granting condition in the second state;
When the second state is set by the state setting means, the specific number or the remaining number at the time of starting the second state is the specific number or the remaining number at the time of granting the privilege or immediately before granting the privilege. a number setting means capable of setting a number corresponding to
The gaming machine according to feature N6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to carry over the remaining period of the second state, which has been increased or decreased due to the fulfillment of the change condition, to the game after the award of the privilege. Accordingly, whether or not the change condition is established can be reflected in the ease of granting the next privilege, and the interest is improved.

Feature N8. The state transition means is an initial specified number setting means (step S4111 by the main controller 81) for setting a predetermined initial specified number (initial specified number of times) as the initial specified number when the game state shifts to the second state. function to execute the processing of
The number setting means, when the second state is set by the state setting means, provides the privilege to the initial specific number by setting the specific number or the remaining number when the second state is started. The gaming machine according to feature N7, further comprising means for setting a value corresponding to the time or the number obtained by adding the specific number or the remaining number immediately before the awarding of the privilege.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to use the amount carried over from before the award of the privilege in the remaining number of times in the second state as an additional amount to the initial specific number. This suppresses the inconvenience that the easiness of granting a privilege is limited when the carryover amount is less than the initial specified number.

Feature N9. The change means subtracts a predetermined number from the specific number or the remaining number based on the satisfaction of the change condition;
means for setting the number after the predetermined number is subtracted by the subtraction means as the new specific number or the remaining number;
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the remaining number of times of the second state by satisfying the change condition, and it is possible to shorten the transition period to the second state. As a result, the enjoyment of avoiding the satisfaction of the change condition in the second state is added, and the amusement is improved.

Feature N10. There are a first specific state and a second specific state in which the change condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the first specific state,
Characteristic features N1 to N9, characterized in that it comprises changing state transition means capable of transitioning from the first specific state to the second specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined state transition condition. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to construct a period (zone) in which the remaining number of times is likely to be changed in the second state. As a result, the easiness of changing the remaining number of times in the second state can be sharpened, and the interest is improved.

Feature N11. The change means includes means for performing change determination processing for determining whether or not the change condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N10, wherein the change determination process can be executed a plurality of times in the second state.

According to the above configuration, since the change determination process can be performed a plurality of times in the second state, it becomes easier for the player to experience the change in the remaining number of times in the second state. Further, for example, if the change of the remaining number of times of the second state is desirable for the player, even if the change condition is not met in the first change determination process, the subsequent change determination process can be expected. It becomes possible to enjoy whether the remaining period of the second state changes until the end of the second state.

Feature N12. A plurality of the second states are set, and each of the second states is configured so that the easiness of establishment of the change condition is different from each other,
Any one of features N1 to N11, wherein the special transition means includes means capable of transitioning to any one of a plurality of the second states when transitioning to the second state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, not only the anticipation that the game state will shift to the second state, but also the anticipation that the game state will shift to the second state where the change condition is likely to be satisfied can be aroused, thereby improving the amusement. Note that the configuration of the features M2 to M7 may be applied to the feature N12. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature N13. A launching means (shooting device 28) capable of shooting game balls into a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
with
The specific event control means includes means for generating the specific event based on the ball entering the ball entering section,
The change means includes means for determining whether or not the change condition is satisfied based on the ball entering the ball entering portion (function for executing the addition determination process by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N12.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to incorporate the change condition satisfaction determination process into the control process for the specific event, and to execute the change condition determination process as part of the control process. As a result, the control processing can be simplified, and processing failures in determining whether the change condition is met can be suppressed, compared to a configuration in which both processing are performed separately.

Feature N14. A launching means (shooting device 28) capable of shooting game balls into a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
with
a winning lottery means (a function of executing the processes of steps S611 and S911 by the main control device 81) for performing a winning lottery based on the ball entering the ball entering section;
The change means enables the change condition to be established based on the fact that the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is a specific non-winning result (special loss result) (executing the addition determination process by the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N13, characterized in that it has a function of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to arouse not only the expectation that the lottery result of the winning lottery will be the winning result, but also the expectation and sense of danger that the result will be a specific non-winning result, thereby improving the interest. can be done. Furthermore, the processing for judging whether the change condition is met can be incorporated into the control processing for the win/fail lottery, and the same effect as the feature N13 can be achieved.

Also, each configuration described in any of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any of the features N1 to N14. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (first operation port 33) and a second ball entry portion (second operation port 34) which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first specific event (game turn of the first special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section, and the first specific event period (first variable display time) elapses. a first specific event control means (a function of executing a first game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the first specific event based on;
A second specific event (second special figure game round) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section, and the second specific event period (second variable display time) elapses. a second specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the second specific event based on;
When one of the first specific event and the second specific event occurs while the other occurs, a specific state is established in which the second specific event period elapses before the first specific event period elapses. A privilege granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 by the main control device 81) that can grant a privilege (V jackpot) to the player based on the
Limiting means (through gate 35, electric accessory 34a, function for executing electric support processing by main controller 81) capable of limiting the frequency of game balls entering the second ball entering portion;
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first game state (ordinary table selection state),
The state transition means shifts the game state to the second game state based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition (that the win/loss determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S6201 to S6203 by the main control device 81).

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion, the first specific event is controlled to occur over the first specific event period, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion, Under the configuration in which the second specific event is controlled to occur over the second specific event period, earlier than the first specific event period elapses from the occurrence of each of the first and second specific events A privilege is given to the player when the period for the second specific event has passed. In this way, whether or not a benefit is granted depends on which period of time elapses first. It is possible to provide a novel game property. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player, and it is possible to greatly contribute to increasing the degree of interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, a second game state is provided in which a specific state is likely to be established, and the transition to the second game state is made based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition. As a result, it is possible to provide the amusement of establishing the transition condition and realizing the transition to the second game state. However, in this configuration, since establishment of the specific state is a condition for granting the privilege, it is not sufficient for the privilege to be granted only by shifting the game state to the second game state. It is necessary to enter the game ball into the ball entry section. This is because establishment of the specific state requires occurrence of the second specific event.

In addition, in this configuration, since the restricting means is provided for restricting the frequency of game balls entering the second ball entering portion, it becomes easy to naturally obtain benefits when the game state shifts to the second game state. Not only is it a simple game, but it also has a gameplay that allows you to get a privilege if you can make it enter the second ball section while the difficulty of entering the second ball section is increased. It can be provided, and it becomes possible to improve interest.

Feature O2. The limiting means are
A passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and through which game balls can pass;
A first state provided in the game area in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the second ball entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the second ball entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between a state and
Acceptance determination means for executing determination processing as to whether or not the variable receiving means is set to the first state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion function) and
acceptance switching means for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on the determination result of the acceptance determination means (a function of executing an electrical opening/closing process by the main controller 81);
The gaming machine according to feature O1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, by adjusting the ease of passing the passage portion of the game ball and the probability that the determination result of the acceptance determination means corresponds to the variable acceptance means being in the first state, the second input It is possible to easily limit the frequency of ball entry into the ball portion, and it is possible to realize the configuration of the feature O1 in a practically preferable manner.

Feature O3. A game ball flowing down the first flow-down path on the game area can or easily enter the second ball entering portion, and a game ball flowing down the second flow-down path on the game area can enter the second entrance. It is configured so that the ball cannot be entered into the ball portion or is more difficult to enter than the game ball flowing down the first flow path,
Distributing means capable of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to the first flow path and the second flow path are provided on the upstream side of the first flow path and the second flow path. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2 characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry portion by the distribution mode of the distribution means, in other words, the flow-down mode of game balls. As a result, the player's interest in the flow of game balls can be heightened, and the level of attention to the game can be improved.

Feature O4. When the game state shifts to the second game state, the second game state is changed based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition (the number of times the number of games played in the second special figure is a specified number). The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, characterized in that it comprises a terminating means capable of terminating the game.

According to the above configuration, it provides a playability aiming at making the game ball enter the second ball entering part before the second game state ends while the frequency of entering the second ball entering part is restricted. can do. As a result, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of danger that the second game state will end without a ball entering the second ball entering portion, and the amusement is improved.

Feature O5. The ending means can end the second game state when a number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event reaches a specific number (predetermined number of times). The gaming machine according to feature O4, characterized by comprising means for:

According to the above configuration, the second game state ends when the number of occurrences of at least one of the first and second specific events reaches a specific number, so that the player can easily understand the conditions for ending the second game state. can do. In addition, by managing the number of occurrences of at least one of the first and second specific events, it is possible to manage the maintenance period of the second game state, thereby simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load. become.

In characteristic O5, "the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event is a specific number" specifies the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the first specific event. number, the number corresponding to the number of occurrences of the second specific event becomes a specific number, the number corresponding to the total number of occurrences of the first and second specific events becomes a specific number, the first and the first The same or different specific numbers are set for each of the two specific events, and the number corresponding to at least one of the number of occurrences of the first and second specific events is the specific number.

Further, in feature O5, "the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event" is changed to "the number of occurrences of the first specific event and the second specific event after shifting to the second game state. The number of times of occurrence of at least one of them may be read as "the number of occurrences". Furthermore, it may be read as "the number of occurrences of the first specific event" or "the number of times the first specific event has occurred after shifting to the second gaming state". It is possible to harmonize with the configuration that limits the frequency of ball entry (the frequency of occurrence of the second specific event).

Feature O6. The state transition means includes change means capable of changing the specific number or the remaining number up to the specific number based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (additional condition) in the second game state. The gaming machine according to feature O5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the second game state ends when the number of occurrences of at least one of the first and second specific events reaches the specified number, and the predetermined change condition is satisfied in the second game state. Therefore, the specific number or the remaining number can be changed. As a result, the transition period to the second game state can be fluidly changed, and it becomes difficult to predict how long the second game state will continue, thereby improving interest. Moreover, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the remaining number of times in the second game state changes during the game in the second game state, which can greatly contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features N1 to N14 may be applied to the feature O6. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature O7. The limiting means are
A passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and through which game balls can pass;
A first state provided in the game area in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the second ball entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot be accepted by the second ball entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between a state and
Acceptance determination means for executing determination processing as to whether or not the variable receiving means is set to the first state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion function) and
acceptance switching means for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on the determination result of the acceptance determination means (a function of executing an electrical opening/closing process by the main controller 81);
with
The characteristic feature O4 is characterized in that the termination means comprises means capable of terminating the second game state when the number corresponding to the number of determinations of the acceptance determination means reaches a specific number. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the second game state is terminated when the number of determinations by the acceptance determination means reaches a specific number, so that the player can easily understand the termination condition of the second game state. In addition, by managing the number of judgments made by the acceptance judging means, it is possible to manage the period during which the second game state is maintained, thereby simplifying the control process and reducing the processing load.

Note that the configuration of the feature O6 may be applied to the feature O7. Further, each configuration described in any one of the features N1 to N14 may be further applied to the configuration in which the feature O6 is applied to the feature O7. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature O8. The feature O1 is characterized in that the limiting means includes a means for sharing the degree of limitation of the frequency of game ball entry into the second ball entry portion between the first game state and the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of O7.

According to the above configuration, it is sufficient to change the state between the first game state and the second game state while keeping the degree of restriction on the frequency of ball entry into the second ball entry portion as it is, thereby simplifying the control process. be possible.

Feature O9. It is characterized by comprising determination means for determining whether or not the transition condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into a ball entry portion (first operation port 33) different from the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O8.

According to the above configuration, since it is configured to determine whether the transition condition is established based on the ball entering the ball entering portion, it is possible for the player to easily understand the timing of the transition to the second game state, and the ease of play is enhanced. can be improved. Under this premise, the configuration is such that a ball-entering section that is different from the second ball-entering section is used, so even if the frequency of ball-entering the second ball-entering section is restricted, the opportunity for transition judgment is appropriately secured. becomes possible. It can be understood that the ball-entering portion different from the second ball-entering portion includes the first ball-entering portion.

Feature O10. As the transition condition, the first transition condition (the result of the judgment result of the first special figure or the second special figure is the jackpot result, and the 16R jackpot A, B is selected as the jackpot type), and the first transition condition has a different second transition condition (V jackpot in the opening and closing execution mode when the result of the judgment result of the second special figure is the special advantage result A, B),
The special transition means is means capable of transitioning the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of either the first transition condition or the second transition condition (step by the main controller 81 A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O9, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of S6201 to S6203.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to have both the playability of shifting to the second game state when the first transition condition is satisfied and the game property of shifting to the second game state when the second transition condition is satisfied. , it is possible to improve interest compared to a configuration in which transition conditions are unified.

Feature O11. Based on the establishment of the first transition condition, means for making the second transition condition more likely to be satisfied than before the first transition condition is satisfied (the result of the determination of whether the first special figure or the second special figure As a result, the gaming machine according to feature O10 is provided with a function of transitioning to an advantageous state 603 in which a V jackpot can occur or is likely to occur.

According to the above configuration, when the first transition condition is established, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be changed to facilitate the establishment of the second transition condition. In this case, before the first transition condition is established, the game is played with the aim of establishing the first transition condition, and after the first transition condition is established, the game is aimed at the establishment of the second transition condition. The game method can be switched on the basis of the establishment of. As a result, the player is confused even though it has both the game property of shifting to the second game state upon establishment of the first transition condition and the game property of shifting to the second game state upon establishment of the second transition condition. It is possible to suppress the playing and improve the playability.

Feature O12. The second transition condition can be established in the second game state, or the second transition condition is more likely to be established in the second game state than in the first game state (advantageous state 603 A configuration in which only a V jackpot occurs or a configuration in which a V jackpot is likely to occur when it becomes an advantageous state 603),
The special transition means is means capable of shifting the game state to the second game state again after the second game state is completed, based on the establishment of the second transition condition in the second game state. (a function of executing the processing of steps S6203 to S6205 by the main controller 81).

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to establish the second transition condition in the second game state shifted based on the establishment of the first transition condition, and the second transition condition is established in the second game state. In this case, the game state can be shifted to the second game state again after the end of the second game state. Thus, if the second transition condition is established in the previous second game state, the transition to the second game state can be repeated, and the second game state can be generated continuously. As a result, not only the anticipation that the specific state is established in the second game state, but also the anticipation that the second transition condition is established can be aroused, thereby improving the amusement.

Feature O13. The second game state includes a plurality of special game states (first and second advantageous states 603a, 603b) with different degrees of establishment of the specific state,
The special transition means is a specific transition means capable of transitioning to one of the plurality of special game states when the game state is transitioned to the second game state (processing of steps S6206 to S6210 by the main controller 81 The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O12, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, since the second game state includes a plurality of special game states with different easiness of establishment of the specific state, it is possible to construct a plurality of advantageous states and diversify the degree of advantage. It is possible to realize a game property that shifts to an advantageous state inside. As a result, not only the expectation that the game state will shift to the second game state, but also the expectation that the game state will shift to the special game state with a high degree of advantage can be aroused, and the amusement is improved.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features M2 to M7 may be applied to Special O13. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature O14. The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state 603b) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first game state. contains
The state transition means includes means capable of transitioning the game state to the second special game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition (promotion condition) in the first special game state. The gaming machine according to feature O13, characterized in that

In a configuration in which a plurality of special game states having different degrees of advantage are provided as advantageous states to which the normal state can be transferred, for example, after the transition to the advantageous state, the game state is fixed until the end. 1 special game state (special game state with a low advantage), the player may be disappointed. In this regard, according to this configuration, it is possible to shift to the second special game state even after shifting to the first special game state, so the first special game state is expected to shift to the second special game state. It is possible to play the game, reduce the disappointment of the player, and increase the willingness to play.

Feature O15. The plurality of special game states include a first special game state (first advantageous state 603a) and a second special game state (second advantageous state 603b) in which the specific state is more likely to be established than the first game state. contains
The state transition means includes means capable of transitioning the game state to the first special game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition (demotion condition) in the second special game state. The gaming machine according to feature O13 or feature O14, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility of shifting to the first special game state with a low advantage even when the state is shifted to the second special game state with a higher advantage. As a result, the enjoyment of playing the second special game state can be added while avoiding the transition to the first special game state, and the amusement is improved.

Incidentally, when this characteristic is applied to the characteristic O14, the "predetermined specific condition" may be read as "the specific condition or a predetermined condition different from the specific condition."

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features J1 to J18 may be applied to any one of the features O1 to O15. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature O16. A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 223 of main controller 81) capable of storing period information (information on second variable display time);
period information acquisition means for acquiring the period information from the period information storage means (function for executing the setting process of the second variable display time by the main control device 81);
A specific event (game turn of the second special figure) is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section, and the period corresponding to the period information acquired by the period information acquisition means elapses. a specific event control means (a function of executing a second game round control process by the main controller 81) capable of ending the specific event based on
Privilege granting means (main controller) capable of granting a privilege (V jackpot) to a player based on acquisition of specific period information (second short variation fluctuation display time information) corresponding to the specific period as the period information 81 to execute the processing of steps S1002 to S1004);
Limiting means (through gate 35, electric accessory 34a, function for executing electric support processing by main controller 81) capable of limiting the frequency of game balls entering the second ball entering portion;
State transition means for transitioning the game state (function for executing table switching processing by the main control device 81);
with
The game states to which the state transition means can shift include a second game state (special table selection state) in which the specific period is more likely to be acquired than the first game state (normal table selection state),
The state transition means shifts the game state to the second game state based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition (that the win/loss determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol becomes a jackpot result). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S6201 to S6203 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the feature O1.

Note that each configuration described in any of the features O2 to O15 and the features J1 to J18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration. In this case, "establishment of a specific state" can be read as "acquisition of a specific period", and "the number of occurrences of at least one of the first specific event and the second specific event" can be read as "the number of occurrences of the specific event". be able to.

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1. a first acquisition means for acquiring first determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined first acquisition condition (a prize winning process based on the first operation opening winning by the main controller 81: a function of executing the processes of S301 to S306); ,
First lottery means (first fluctuation start process by main controller 81) for executing a first lottery to determine whether or not to execute the first specific control based on the first determination information acquired by the first acquisition means function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in the
A first specific control means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the first specific control based on the lottery result of the first lottery means;
Second acquisition means for acquiring second determination information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition that is a predetermined condition and is different from the first acquisition condition (a winning process based on the second operation opening winning by the main controller 81 : a function to execute the processes of S307 to S312);
Second lottery means for executing a second lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second specific control based on the second determination information acquired by the second acquisition means (second fluctuation start process by the main controller 81 function to execute the pass/fail judgment process in the
A second specific control means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of executing the second specific control based on the lottery result of the second lottery means;
with
The first lottery means is capable of executing the first lottery during a period from when the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means until when the second specific control is executed,
The second lottery means is capable of executing the second lottery during a period from when the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means until when the first specific control is performed. A configuration in which the execution of the second specific control based on the second lottery can be restricted by executing the specific control,
a first specific state (low-frequency support mode) in which the second acquisition condition is satisfied during a period from when the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means until when the first specific control is executed;
a second specific state (high-frequency support mode) in which the second acquisition condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first lottery is executed by the first lottery means;
is set.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the execution of the second specific control based on the second lottery can be restricted by the execution of the first specific control, the time period from when the first lottery is performed to when the first specific control is executed A first specific state in which the second lottery can be executed only during the period and a second specific state in which the second lottery can be executed regardless of whether or not the first lottery is executed are set. Therefore, a variety of playability can be realized by the first specific state in which the second lottery is restricted in relation to the first lottery and the second specific state in which the second lottery is not restricted. For example, if the second specific state is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state, the player may want to perform the second specific control. 2 Execution of specific control may be restricted. On the other hand, in the second specific state, the second specific control can be executed independently of the first specific control. In this way, it is possible to build a game that utilizes the relationship of a plurality of specific controls, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature P2. The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the player is more advantageous when the second specific control is performed than when the first specific control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the playability exemplified by the characteristic P1 can be suitably realized.

Feature P3. It is provided in the game area (game area PE) and has a first ball entry part (first operation opening 33) and a second ball entry part (second operation opening 34) into which a game ball can enter,
The first acquisition condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering portion,
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2, wherein the second acquisition condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering portion.

According to the above configuration, each acquisition condition is satisfied by events such as the ball entering the first ball entering section and the ball entering the second ball entering section, so that the player's operation is intervened. It is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the acquisition condition is satisfied without permission. Therefore, the game characteristics of the first specific state in which the first acquisition condition is satisfied in order to satisfy the second acquisition condition, and the game characteristics of the second specific state in which the second acquisition condition is satisfied regardless of the success or failure of the first acquisition condition. , can be performed while the player selects.

Feature P4. In the game area, as the second ball entry part,
a normal second ball-entering portion (second operating port 34) that allows a ball to be entered during the period from when the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means until when the first specific control is executed;
a specific second ball-entering portion (fifth operation opening 34D) that allows a ball to be entered regardless of whether or not the first lottery is executed by the first lottery means;
is provided,
A shooting means (shooting operation device 28) for shooting a game ball toward the game area with a shooting intensity according to the operation by the player,
While the game ball fired at the first firing intensity from the shooting means reaches the normal second ball entering portion, it does not reach the specific second ball entering portion, and is different from the first shooting intensity. The normal second ball entering portion and the specific second entering portion are arranged so that the game ball fired at 2 firing intensity reaches the specific second ball entering portion but does not reach the normal second ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature P3, wherein a ball portion is provided.

According to the above configuration, when playing the game in the first specific state and the second specific state, it is necessary to separate the shots. Specifically, when it is in the first specific state, it is necessary to shoot the game ball with the first shooting intensity, and when it is in the second specific state, it is necessary to shoot the game ball with the second shooting intensity. There is By doing so, it becomes clear what kind of game should be played in each specific state (which second operating port should be aimed at), making the game easier to understand, and changing the game by changing the operation. Easier to feel.

Feature P5. A passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and through which game balls can pass;
Acceptance determination means (by the main controller 81) capable of determining whether or not to accept the ball into the second ball entrance section (support lottery) based on the passage of the game ball through the passage section function to execute electronic support processing) and
Receiving means (electric accessory 34d) that shifts to a receiving state in which the game ball can be received into the second ball entering portion based on the determination result by the acceptance determining means;
The gaming machine according to feature P3 or feature P4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, it is not unconditionally possible to enter the ball into the second ball entering section, but the ball is entered into the second ball entering section by acceptance determination based on passage through the passing section. becomes possible. By doing so, it is possible to achieve both the playability in the first specific state and the second specific state.

Feature P6. The frequency or probability that the receiving means will be in the accepting state in the second specific state is set to be relatively higher than the frequency or probability that the receiving means will be in the accepting state in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature P5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of the first specific state and the second specific state by utilizing the frequency or probability that the receiving means will be in the receiving state. Specifically, in the first specific state, since the receiving means is unlikely to be in the receiving state, the ball is unlikely to enter the second ball entering portion, and the first specific state control is frequently performed. On the other hand, in the second specific state, since the receiving means is likely to be in the receiving state, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entering portion, and the second specific control is frequently performed.

It should be noted that any one of the technical ideas indicated for each feature described above may be applied to another feature, or a combination of technical ideas indicated for a plurality of features may be applied to another feature. It is also possible to extract part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 27... Game ball launching mechanism, 28... Shooting operation device, 32A... First variable winning device, 32B... Second variable winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 81... Main control device, 82... Performance control device, AS... 1st special figure display part, BS... 2nd special figure display part, PE... Game area.

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter;
grant determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined grant condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the granting determination means determines that the granting condition is met;
state transition means for transitioning the game state;
with
The game state that can be shifted by the state transition means includes a second game state in which the ease of establishment of the granting condition is different from that of the first game state,
The state transition means is
special transition means capable of transitioning the game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
transition condition changing means capable of changing the transition condition based on establishment of a predetermined change condition based on a predetermined game result;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images